新外研英语七年级Starter部分Module1 Unit1教案
Unit 1 Good morning Miss Zhou
课型：Listening and speaking
课时：45 minutes
课前预测：the first lesson of their Junior High SchoolIt’s necessary to help them know the importance of learning English and some basic methods
教学方法：Interactive approach
板书设计：Key words and sentences about everyday English in PPT
教学目标：
1 Master the key words and expressions in Unit 1
2Learn to use the key sentences to greet each other
3Cultivate their ability of creation
教学重难点：
1Key words and expressions
hello class my name is miss good good afternoon etc
2Key sentences
Good morningafternoon
My name’s Miss Zhou
Goodbye
Etc
3How to use what they have learnt to greet each other
4How to write the 26 letters regularly
教学准备：
PPTpictures on the Internet videotape
教学程：
Step 1 Warming up
1Show some pictures to tell them the importance of English learning
2Show pictures on the Internet to tell them what is the correct way of learning English
step2Introduction
1learn new words by showing some pictures
2Read all the new words together
step3Practice
1practice the dialogues in pairs in class like that
2Act their dialogues out in class
step4Key points
name’s name is the differences of Mr and Miss
step5 Match
1Match the dialogues in Part 3 by themselves
2Check answers one by one Encouragement should be given
3Read the dialogues in groups
step6Listen and say
Listen to the tape in Part 5 and say after it Especially they should pay attention to the pronunciation of the 26 letters
step7Sing the ABC Song
1 Listen to the song at first then imitate how to sing it for several times
2 Ask some of them to sing the song in class Encouragement should be given
step8Write
1 It’s very important to tell them how to write the letters regularly so the teacher needs to spend more time on this step The teacher should check their spelling carefully and correct them in time
2 The best work should be showed to others in class
3 Have a small inclusion about their work
step9Listen
1 Listen to the tape in Part 7 write the names regularly
2 Check answers and ask them to write their own names in English
step10Exercises
Do some exercises in class to consolidate what they have learnt in this lesson Encouragement should be given
Step11 Homework
1Sing ABC Song
2Read the dialogues in Unit 1 smoothly
3Write the 26 letters carefully in their exercise books
新外研英语七年级starter部分Module1 Unit2教案
Unit 2 Good morning I’m Chen Zhong
课型：Listening and speaking
课时：45 minutes
课前预测：They have learnt how to write the 26 letters regularly in this lesson they need to consolidate them and learn some new everyday English
教学方法：Interactive approach
板书设计：Key words and sentences about greetings in PPT
教学目标：
1 Master the key words and expressions in Unit 2
2Learn to use the key sentences to greet each other
3Cultivate their ability of creation
教学重难点：
1Key words and expressions
I you your spell sorry how fine etc
2Key sentences
What’s your name
I’m Lingling
Sorry
Can you spell it please
How are you
Fine thank you
Etc
3How to use the key sentences to greet with their classmates
教学准备：
PPTpictures on the Internet videotape
教学程：
Step 1 Revision
1 Revise how to write the 26 letters without opening their books
2 Sing the ABC song
step2Introduction
1learn new words and expressions by showing some pictures The pronunciation of the new words should be paid more attention
2Read all the new words and expressions together Then freely give them some help
step3Drills
1What’s your name I’m Li Si
2Can you spell itplease Yes…
3How are you I’m fine thank you
step4Listen and read
1Listen and read after the tape for 2 times then freely Give them some help
2Act the dialogue out in groups then in pairs
step5 Listen and sing
Listen and learn to sing the song Good Morning
step6Match
Listen and match the sentences on their own Check answers and read it in groups
step7Listen and number
Listen and number the sentences on their own Check answers and read it in groups
step8Write
1Write the answers in Part 5especially they should write their answers regularly
2Check answers and give some encouragement
step9Work in pairs
Work in pairs to finish Part 6 Prepare for a few minutes ask them to have an action in class
step10Keys
1Read the keys together then freely
2Have a quick test one by one
Step11Read and find
1 Read and fine some rules about the verb be
2Show some exercises to consolidate what they have learnt in this lesson
Step 12 Homework
1To classify the letters according to their pronounciation
2Recite the text as possible as they can
3Learn to read the 48 phonetic symbols
新外研英语七年级starter部分Module1 Unit3教案
Unit 3 This is my friend
课型：Listening and speaking
课时：45 minutes
课前预测：They have learnt how to write the 26 letters regularly and some new everyday English in this lesson they need to consolidate them and learn to use them in their daily life
教学方法：Interactive approach
板书设计：Key words and sentences about greetings in PPT
教学目标：
1 Master the key words and expressions in Unit 3
2Learn to use the key sentences to greet each other
3Cultivate their ability of creation
教学重难点：
1Key words and expressions
This she her his he tomorrow time etc
2Key sentences
This is my friend his name is…
This is Miss Zhou she is my teacher
Nice to meet you
It’s time to go now
Etc
3How to use the key sentences to greet with their classmates in their daily life
教学准备：
PPTpictures on the Internet videotape
教学程：
Step 1 Revision
1 Revise how to classify the 26 letters according to their pronounciation
2 Sing the Good Morning song
step2Introduction
1Teach them how to read new words and expressions according to the pronunciation of them
2Read all the new words and expressions together Then freely give them some help
step3Drills
1This is… heshe is …
2This is … hisher name is…
step4Pronouns
Show the table about pronouns and read them after the teacher
step5 Listen and read
1Listen and read after the tape for 2 times then freely Give them some help
2Read Part 1 in groups then in pairs
3 Act the dialogues out in pairs in class encouragement should be given
step6Abbreviated forms
Sum up what they have learnt about the abbreviated forms read and fine the rules
step7Match
Listen and match the sentences on their own Check answers and read it in groups
Step8 Listen and number
Listen and number the sentences on their own Check answers and read it in groups
step8Work in groups
1This is my friend…name is…Hello… nice to meet you
step9Write
Listen and finish the sentences on their own Check answers and read it together
step10Exercises in class
Show some exercises to consolidate what they have learnt in this lessonCheck answers one by one Encouragement should be given
Step 12 Homework
1Watch the video to learn how to read the 48 phonetic symbols
2Recite the text as possible as they can
新外研英语七年级Starter部分Module2 Unit1教案
Unit 1 Open your book
课型：Listening and speaking
课时：45 minutes
课前预测：They have learnt some everyday English In this Unit they continue to learn some more about it
教学方法：Interactive approach
板书设计：Key words and sentences about everyday English in PPT
教学目标：
1 Master the key words and expressions in Unit 1
2Learn to use the key sentences to greet each other
3Cultivate their ability of creation
教学重难点：
1Key words and expressions
Sit stand open close up down etc
2Key sentences
Open your book
Close your book
Stand up
Etc
3How to use what they have learnt to greet each other
4How to write the key sentences regularly
教学准备：
PPTpictures on the Internet videotape
教学程：
Step 1 Warming up
1Revise the letters in Module 1
2Revise the words and key sentences they have learnt in Module 1
step2Introduction
1learn new words and read them togetherespecially pay attention to their pronunciation
2Read all the new words freely give them some help and ask some of them to read them in class
step3Listen and read
Listen to Part 1 read after it Then read it in pairs
step4Listen and repeat
1Listen to the tape in Part 2 repeat
2Read Part 2 with the help of their teacher freely
3Do as the teacher’s order
step5 Match
1Complete Part 4 by themselves
2Read the answers together to check them
step6Translate
Show the questions quikly ask them to translate them orally in class
step7Write
1 Listen to the tape and write their answers in their books
2 Show the answers to check their answersgive more encouragement
step8Work in pairs
1 Work in pairs to complete Part 6
2 Ask some of them to act in class
step9Everyday English
1 Show the questions and ask them how to answer
2 Read Everyday English in groups
step10Exercises
Do some exercises in class to consolidate what they have learnt in this lesson Encouragement should be given
Step11 Homework
1Copy the key sentences correctly in their exercise books
2Read Unit 1 smoothly
3Try to remember the spelling of the new words and expressions
4Learn to sing the song hello how are you
新外研英语七年级Starter部分Module2 Unit2教案
Unit 1 What’s your number
课型：Listening and speaking
课时：45 minutes
课前预测：They have learnt some everyday English In this Unit they continue to learn some more about it
教学方法：Interactive approach
板书设计：Key words and sentences about everyday English in PPT
教学目标：
1 Master the key words and expressions in Unit 1
2Learn to use the key sentences to greet each other
3Cultivate their ability of creation
教学重难点：
1Key words and expressions
new student here in one two three etc
2Key sentences
What’s your telephone number
Are you a new student here
What class are you in
Etc
3How to use what they have learnt to ask and answer each other
4How to write the key sentences regularly
教学准备：
PPTpictures on the Internet videotape
教学程：
Step 1 Warming up
1Revise the words in Unit 1 by doing some exercises
2Ask some questions in Unit 1 freely
step2Introduction
1learn the numbers 110 and read them togetherespecially pay attention to their pronunciation
2Have a quick testgive them some help and ask some of them to read them in class
3Learn some other new words and read them together encouragement should be given
step3Listen and chant
1Listen to the tape in Part3 at first then listen again to learn to chant
2Chant each other ask some of them to act it in class
step4Listen and repeat
1Listen to the tape in Part 1 repeat
2Read Part 1 with the help of their teacher freely
3Read the dialogue in pairs
4Like this Ask and answer Lala’s informationthen ask their classmates
step5Listen and read
1Read Part 4 by themselves find the telephone numbers and fill in the blanks
2Read the answers together to check them
3Listen to the tape in Part 4 and read after it read it for some more times with the help of the teacher freely
4Read it in groups then in pairs in class
step6Listen and point
Listen to the tape carefullycheck the answers one by one
step7Listen and write
1 Listen to the tape and write their answers in their books to finish Part 6
2 Show the answers to check their answersgive more encouragement
3 Listen to the tape in Part 7 write the numbers Check answers and read them together
step8Work in pairs
1 Work in pairs what’s your telephoneQQ number
2 Ask some of them freely in class
step9Listen and write
1 Listen to the tape in Part 8 fill in the table on their own check answers
2 Ask them to ask and answer in pairs according to the table in Part 8
3 Ask and answer freely to finish Part 9
Step 10 Complete and find
A ________ you a new student here
B Yes I _______
A What class are you in
B I’m in Class Five Mr Liu’s class
A What class ________Li Minghao in
B He is in Class Six Miss Liang’s class
step11Exercises
Do some exercises in class to consolidate what they have learnt in this lesson Encouragement should be given
Step12 Homework
1Make a survey and write their friends’ telephone number
2Read Unit 2 smoothly including the new words try to have a dictation
3Continue to learn the 48 phonetic symbols
新外研英语七年级Starter部分Module2 Unit3教案
Unit 1 What’s your number
课型：Listening and speaking
课时：45 minutes
课前预测：They have learnt some everyday English In this Unit they continue to learn some more about it
教学方法：Interactive approach
板书设计：Key words and sentences about everyday English in PPT
教学目标：
1 Master the key words and expressions in Unit 2
2Learn to use the key sentences to ask and answer each other
3Cultivate their ability of creation
教学重难点：
1Key words and expressions
How old boy girl desk chair bag thirteen fifteen etc
2Key sentences
How old are you
I’m twelve
How many girls boys are there
Etc
3How to use what they have learnt to ask and answer each other
4How to write the key sentences regularly
教学准备：
PPTpictures on the Internet videotape
教学程：
Step 1 Warming up
Revise the numbers in Unit 2 by a quick test
step2Introduction
1learn the new numbers 1120 and read them togetherespecially pay attention to their pronunciation
2Have a quick testgive them some help and ask some of them to read them in class
3Match the numbers in Part 3 check answers
4Tell them how to write the numbers from 21 to 29
5 Learn some other new words and read them together then freely Give them some help
step3Listen and Point
Listen to the tape in Part4 at firstcheck answers then listen again to repeat
step4Listen and write
1Listen to the tape in Part 5write the answers at the same time
2Check answers and read it one by one
4Learn about some more like plusminusmultiplydivide
step5Listen and write
1Listen to the tape in part 6 write the numbers in their books
2 Check answer each other read them loud in class
step6Listen and Match
Listen to the tape in Part 7 carefullycheck the answers
step7Listen and read
1 Listen to the tape in Part 1and repeat
2 Act the dialogue in pairs
step8Work in pairs
1 Work in pairs How many boysgirls are there
2 Ask some of them freely in class
step9Inclusion
Sum up the key points and ask more questions freely in class
Step 10 Words and expressions in Module 2
Listen to the tape and repeat after it
step11Exercises
Do some exercises in class to consolidate what they have learnt in this lesson Encouragement should be given
Step12 Homework
1Try to remember the spelling of words in Unit 2 and have a dictation
2Read Unit 2 and try to recite it
3Copy the numbers120 in their exercise books
新外研英语七年级Starter部分Module3 Unit1教案
Unit 1 What’s this in English
课型：Listening and speaking
课时：45 minutes
课前预测：They have learnt some everyday English In this Unit they continue to learn some more about it
教学方法：Interactive approach
板书设计：Key words and sentences about everyday English in PPT
教学目标：
1 Master the key words and expressions in Unit 1
2Learn to use the key sentences to ask and answer each other
3Cultivate their ability of creation
教学重难点：
1Key words and expressions
In writeonblackboardpenpencilbirdflower etc
2Key sentences
What’s this in English
How do you spell pencil
Write it on the blackboard
Sorry
Etc
3How to use what they have learnt to ask and answer each other
4How to use the key sentences in their real life
教学准备：
PPTpictures on the Internet videotape
教学程：
Step 1 Warming up
Have a quick test to revise what they have learnt in Module 2
1Revise the numbers
2Revise the key sentences what they have learnt in Module 2
3Have a quick answer in only 3 seconds
step2Introduction
1Show some pictures to learn new words and read them togetherespecially pay attention to their pronunciation
2Read all the new words freely give them some help and ask some of them to read them in class
step3Listen and read
Listen to the tape in Part 1 read after it Then read it in groups then in pairs Have an action in class Encouragement should be given
step4Listen and Point
1Listen to the tape in Part 2 repeat
2Read Part 2 with the help of their teacher freely
3Show some pictures to ask and answer each other
step5 Listen and write
1Listen and write the answers in Part 3 on their own
2Read the answers together to check them
step6Ask and answer
1 Ask and answer to finish Part 4 work in pairs according to the pictures in Part 4 freely
2 Action in classEncouragement should be given
step7Listen and write
1 Listen to the tape and write their answers in Part 5
2 Show the answers to check their answersgive more encouragement
step8Answer race
Divide them into 4 groups to have an answer race
1 What’s this in English
2 How do you spell it
step9Everyday English
Read Everyday English
1What’s this in English
2Write it on the blackboard
3Sorry
4How do you spell pencil
step10Exercises
Do some exercises in class to consolidate what they have learnt in this lesson Encouragement should be given
Step11 Homework
1Find some objects and work in pairs to ask and answer
What’s this in English How do you spell it
2Try to read Unit 1 smoothly or recite it
3Additional exercises
Step 12 A Song
Learn to sing the song What’s this after class
新外研英语七年级Starter部分Module3 Unit2教案
Unit 1 Can you help me please
课型：Listening and speaking
课时：45 minutes
课前预测 In this Unit they’ll continue to learn some more everyday English How to use them may be difficult for them
教学方法：Interactive approach
板书设计：Key words and sentences about everyday English in PPT
教学目标：
1 Master the key words and expressions in Unit 2
2Learn to use the key sentences to communicate each other
3Cultivate their ability of creation
教学重难点：
1Key words and expressions
Helpcoursethatagainwelcome etc
2Key sentences
Can you help meplease
How do you spell it
Can you say that again please
You’re welcome
Etc
3How to use what they have learnt to ask and answer each other
教学准备：
PPTpictures on the Internet videotape
教学程：
Step 1 Warming up
1Revise the words in Unit 1 by having a guessing game
2Ask them How do you spell… To check the spelling of the key words in unit 1
step2Introduction
1learn the new words and read them togetherespecially pay attention to their pronunciation
2Learn new words and read them together encouragement should be given
3Give them some help and ask some of them to read them in class
step3Practice
Show some pictures ask and answer like this
AWhat’s this in English
BIt’s a…
AHow do you spell it
BIt’s…
AThank you
BYou’re welcome
Ask some of them to have an action in class encouragement should be given
step4Listen and read
1Listen to the tape in Part 1 repeat
2Read Part 1 with the help of their teacher freely
3Read the dialogue in pairs
4Encourage them to have an action in class
step5Listen and point
1Listen to the tape in Part 2 and write the words below the pictures according to the spellings
2Read the words in groups then have a dialogue in pairs in class
step6Everyday English
Show Everyday English to read them together
1Can you help me please
Yes of course
2I don’t know
3Can you say that again please
4Thank you
You’re welcome
step7Read and match
1 Listen to the tape and write their answers in their books to finish Part 3
2 Show the answers to check their answersgive more encouragement
3 Check answers and read them together
step8Work in pairs
1 Work in pairs to finish Part 5 freely
2 Ask some of them freely in class
step9Listen and write
1 Listen to the tape in Part 6 write the answers
2 Check answers and read them together
step10Exercises
Do some exercises in class to consolidate what they have learnt in this lesson Encouragement should be given
Step12 Homework
1 Use their school things to ask and Answer Can you help meplease How do you spell it
2 Write their own dialogues in their exercise books
3 Additional exercises
新外研英语七年级Starter部分Module3 Unit3教案
Unit 1 What colour is it
课型：Listening and speaking
课时：45 minutes
课前预测：They have learnt some everyday English In this Unit they continue to learn some more about it
教学方法：Interactive approach
板书设计：Key words and sentences about everyday English in PPT
教学目标：
1 Master the key words and expressions in Unit 3
2Learn to use the key sentences to ask and answer each other
3Cultivate their ability of creation
教学重难点：
1Key words and expressions
blackwhiteredyellowcolour etc
2Key sentences
What colour is it
What colour are they
Is it a red car Yes it is No it isn’t
Etc
3How to use what they have learnt to ask and answer each other
4How to spell new words according to the phonetic symbols
教学准备：
PPTpictures on the Internet videotape
教学程：
Step 1 Warming up
Revise the numbers by a quick test
step2Introduction
1 Ask them what colour is it To learn different colors and read them togetherespecially pay attention to their pronunciation
2 Ask the same questions one by one to check if they have mastered the key sentences
3Write the different colors below the balls
4Have a quick test to say the names of different colors
step3Listen and Point
1 Listen to the tape in Part1 at first then listen again to repeat
2 Read Part 1freely with the help of their teacher
step4Read and match
1Listen to the tape in Part 3 write the answers at the same time
2Check answers by listening again
3work in pairs to read Part 3
step5Listen and write
1Listen to the tape in part 7 write the answers in their books
2 Check answer each other read them loud in class
step6Work in pairs
Work in pairs to finish Part 5 Ask some of them to act their dialogues in class encouragement should be given
step7Write
1 Read the words in the table in Part 5 quickly
2 Divide them into 3 groups according to the table below
3 Check answers and read them together
step8Challenges
1 Draw
2 Ask and answer what colour is it What colour are they
Is it a… Yes it is
Are they… No they aren’t
3 work in pairs to have a creation
Step9Exercises
Do some exercises in class to consolidate what they have learnt in this lesson Encouragement should be given
Step10Words and expressions in Module 3
Listen to the tape of words and expressions in Module 3 read after the tape at the same time
Step11 Homework
1Draw a picture Paint it and name the colors correctly
2Ask and answer according to the pictures What colour is it It’s…
3Read unit 3 smoothly
Step 12 A song
Learn to sing the song What colour after class
新外研英语七年级Starter部分Module4 Unit1教案
Unit 1 What day is it today
课型：Listening and speaking
课时：45 minutes
课前预测：They have learnt some everyday English In this Unit they continue to learn some more about it
教学方法：Interactive approach
板书设计：Key words and sentences about everyday English in PPT
教学目标：
1 Master the key words and expressions in Unit 1
2Learn to use the key sentences to ask and answer each other
3Cultivate their ability of creation
教学重难点：
1Key words and expressions
day today Monday Tuesday Wednesday etc
2Key sentences
What day is it today
What day is your favourite day
Etc
3How to use what they have learnt to ask and answer each other
4How to use the key sentences in their real life
教学准备：
PPTpictures on the Internet videotape
教学程：
Step 1 Warming up
1Revise the words and expressions in Module 3
2Revise the key sentencesWhat’s this in English How do you spell it
3Have a quick answer
step2Introduction
1Show some calendars to learn new words of a week and read them togetherespecially pay attention to their pronunciation
2Read all the new words freely give them some help and ask some of them to read them in class
3 Show them a real calendar to ask and answer What day is it today What day is it tomorrow
4Ask some of them to have an action in class
step3Listen and write
Listen to the tape in Part 5 check answers Encouragement should be given
step4Read and answer
1Read Part 1 and answer
awhere are they
b What day is it today
c What day is it tomorrow
2Check answers one by one
step5 Listen and read
1Listen to the tape in Part 1 read after the tape
2Read Part 1 freely give them some helpEncouragement should be given
3Work in groups or pairs to act Part 1
step6Read and match
1 Read and match to finish Part 3 work in pairs to check the answers
2 Read it in class
step7Listen and write
1 Listen to the tape in Part 6 and write their answers
2 Show the answers to check their answersgive more encouragement
3 Ask some of them to read the sentences
step8Ask and answer
Ask and answer to finish Part 7Ask some of them to have an action in classGive them more encouragement
step9Everyday English
Read Everyday English
1What day is it today
2What day is your favourite day
step10Exercises
Do some exercises in class to consolidate what they have learnt in this lesson Encouragement should be given
Step11 Homework
1 Find a real calendar to ask and answer
What day is it today
How do you spell Monday
What day is your favourite day
2Try to read Unit 1 smoothly or recite it
3Additional exercises
Step 12 A Song
Learn to sing the song What’s day after class
新外研英语七年级Starter部分Module4 Unit2教案
Unit 1 What’s the weather like
课型：Listening and speaking
课时：45 minutes
课前预测 In this Unit they’ll continue to learn some more everyday English How to use them may be difficult for them
教学方法：Interactive approach
板书设计：Key words and sentences about everyday English in PPT
教学目标：
1 Master the key words and expressions in Unit 2
2Learn to use the key sentences to communicate each other
3Cultivate their ability of creation
教学重难点：
1Key words and expressions
Spring summer autumn winter warm hot cold cool etc
2Key sentences
What’s the weather like
How is the weather Etc
3How to use what they have learnt to ask and answer each other
教学准备：
PPTpictures on the Internet videotape
教学程：
Step 1 Warming up
Revise Unit 1 by asking some questions
step2Introduction
1Show some pictures to learn the new words and read them togetherespecially pay attention to their pronunciation
2 Read them together encouragement should be given
3Give them some help and ask some of them to read them in class
4Ask them some questions as an inclusion such as
How many seasons are there in a year
What are they
What’s the weather like in…
step3Listen and repeat
1 Listen to the tape in Part 1repeat after the tape together
2 Close their booksask them to spell the words quickly
3 Listen to the tape in Part 2 repeat after the tape Then match the pictures check answers
4 Have a quick test to say a sentences according to the pictures what they see
step4Listen and point
1Listen to the tape in Part 3 repeat
2Read Part 3 with the help of their teacher freely
3Read the dialogue in pairs
4Encourage them to have an action in class
step5Discussion
Work in pairs to have a discussion What’s your favourite season Why Then have an action in class more encouragement should be given
step6Listen and write
Listen to the tape in Part 5 and write the answers on their own check answers one by one Then ask some of them to read their answers in class
step7Inclusion
1 Show the key sentences and read them
2 Find the use of in
Step8Fill a table
1 Go through the map in Part 6 Fill the table
2 Check answers and read them together
Step9Work in pairs
1 Work in pairs to finish Part 6 freely
2 Ask some of them work freely in class
Step 10 Everyday English
Read Everyday English as an inclusion
step10Exercises
Do some exercises in class to consolidate what they have learnt in this lesson Encouragement should be given
Step12 Homework
1Show some season pictures and work in pairs to ask and answer Or they can have a guessing game
2Read Unit 2 smoothly
3Additional exercises
Step 13 A song called The Four Seasons
新外研英语七年级Starter部分Module4 Unit3教案
Unit 1 What’s your favourite sport
课型：Listening and speaking
课时：45 minutes
课前预测：They have learnt some everyday English In this Unit they continue to learn some more about it
教学方法：Interactive approach
板书设计：Key words and sentences about everyday English in PPT
教学目标：
1 Master the key words and expressions in Unit 3
2Learn to use the key sentences to ask and answer each other
3Cultivate their ability of creation
教学重难点：
1Key words and expressions
Sport swimming basketball football table tennis etc
2Key sentences
What’s your favourite sport
Let’s play football after school
Etc
3How to use what they have learnt to ask and answer each other
4How to spell new words according to the phonetic symbols
教学准备：
PPTpictures on the Internet videotape
教学程：
Step 1 Warming up
Revise the four season by a quick answer one by one
step2Introduction
1 Show some pictures about sports to learn different activities and read them togetherespecially pay attention to their pronunciation
2 Read all the new words together then freely
3Questions what’s your favourite sport
Ask them freely help them to answer Football is my favourite sport Or
My favourite sport is football
4Continue to say Football is my favourite sport too Let’s play football after school
Help them to answer OK good idea
step3Inclusion
1 Show some verbs ask them to adding Then check answers
2 Have a small inclusion about the rules
Step4Work in pairs
Work in pairs to finish Part 6 Encouragement should be given
Step5Listen repeat and number
1Listen to the tape in Part 1 repeat
2Listen to the tape in Part 2 number the pictures
Step6Read and answer
1What’s Daming’s favourite sport
Football
2Is football Tony’s favourite sport
Yes it is
3 What’s Betty and Lingling’s favourite sport
Swimming are their favourite sport
step7Listen and read
1 Listen to the tape in Part 3 and read after the tape
2 Read again with the help of their teacher
3 Read freely then work in pairs
step8Listen and number
1 Go through Part 4 listen and write their answers by themselves
2 Check the answers and read the sentences together
Step 9Write
1 Finish Part 5 check answers and read it
2 Listen and write the answers in Part 7 check answers one by one ask them to read their answers together
Step9Exercises
Do some exercises in class to consolidate what they have learnt in this lesson Encouragement should be given
Step10Words and expressions in Module 4
Listen to the tape of words and expressions in Module 3 read after the tape at the same time
Step11 Homework
1A composition My favourite season
Summer is my favourite season
In summer I can play basketball with my friends after school I like swimming
in summer too Summer is a nice season
2Read unit 3 smoothly
Step 12 A song
Learn to sing the song Sports after class
Module 1 My classmates
教学容：Unit 1 Nice to meet you
二课型：Listening and speaking
三教学目标：
知识技：
1运动词be般现时陈述般疑问形式
2运代词Imyyouyourhehissheher
3听懂介绍
4利be动词作简单介绍询问方信息
情感态度价值观：
1 掌握作介绍时英美士中国答惯
2 培养良际交流态度交流时尊重方惯令方感舒服
四教学重难点：
重点：
1 掌握基词汇：Chinese from where year about Ms not hi our American he China What about America England
2 动词be般现时陈述般疑问形式
3 介绍表达方式
难点：
1运 be般现时陈述般疑问形式
2听懂介绍
3利be动词作简单介绍询问方信息
五教学准备：
次课堂听说课采互动式教学法创设真实语境通呈现伴互动组活动等师生生生交流充分体现学生学程中体位教师课堂引导者组织者合作者学生中学会英语综合培养学生英语语言运力教学程中采媒体手段辅助教学利种图片题务贯穿整教学程节课需准备：PPT课件录音机课堂练奖品
六教学程：
教学
步骤
教师活动
学生活动
设计意图
Step One
Warmingup (5’)
Activity 1 Greet the students as usual
T I’m very glad to be here and give you a lesson Just now you are puzzled about my name Now let me try to introduce myself
My name is Ms Mo I’m a teacher I’m from China and I’m Chinese I’m 24 years old Nice to meet you
Activity 2 New words study
Show two pictures of flags and students Make a story about them
T Just now I said I’m from China and I’m Chinese And you are also from China Today I’m going to introduce two of my friends Let’s look at their pictures and guess Where are they from
1Greet the teacher
2 Read these new words and practice this dialogue
A Where are you from
B I’m from England and I’m English I’m from America and I’m American
图片吸引学生兴趣做出介绍引出话题重点句型
利介绍新伴事开展容呈现新单词句型
Step Two
Listening (5’)
Activity 3 Listening and vocabulary
T Now you’ve met Betty and Tony They are my friends and they are now your friends too Would you like to know more about them Let’s listen to the tape and listen what they are talking
Activity 4 Listen and read
T：From this dialogue above we can know that Betty and Tony are students You are students in my class And they are in Ms Li’s class Let’s listen to the tape and see what they are talking about While listening you should think about these two questions as follow
1 Listen and check (√ ) the number of speaker
a) 1 b) 2 c) 3
2 Listen again and check (√ ) the words you hear
class friend
hello name
teacher too
2Students close the book listen to the tape and answer the questions
1 Who are they
2 Is Daming from China
3Read this dialogue after the teacher
简短听力材料完成课文第12部分听力文听力做准备
带着问题合课听课文学生听时候更目性训练学生抓取信息力
Step
Three
Afterlistening practice (10’)
Activity 5 Now check (√) the true sentences
1 Ms Li is from Wuhan
2 Lingling is twelve years old
3 Daming is thirteen years old
4 Tony is not in Class 4
5 Betty is from America
Activity 6 Choose the correct answers
Show some special sentence in the dialogue on the screen (般疑问句)
般疑问句：疑问句种指yesno回答问句
1—Is Daming from Beijing
—Yes he isNo he isn’t
2—Is Lingling from Beijing
—Yes she isNo she isn’t
3—Is Tony from America
—Yes he isNo he isn’t
4—Is Betty English
—Yes she isNo she isn’t
5—Are you from China
—Yes I amNo I’m not
Activity 7 Complete the passage
Teacher read the new words first and students read after the teacher
Betty Tony Daming and Lingling are (1) in Class 4 (2) 7 Betty is from (3)
and Tony is from (4) Daming and Lingling are (5)
1Students do this exercise by themselves first
2Next check their answers with partners and find the original sentences in the dialogue
3Try to correct the wrong ones
4Then the teacher asks students to say out their answers
1Students do this exercise by themselves
2Check the answers with the whole class
3Pair work
Students ask and answer these dialogues with partners
Teacher asks some pairs to make a presentation in front of the whole class
1Students do this exercise by themselves first
2Then the teacher ask some students to read their version
3Show the answers on the screen and explain the key points
4Read the short passage together
通句子正误判断文章中找出原句环节训练学生听力材料中提取信息力
活动说活动通问答形式进步检查学生话容理解时学be动词般现时般疑问句
通短文填空学生运话中出现重点词汇考查重点词语信息掌握方面考查学生短文理解力
Step Four
Consolidation (9’)
Activity 8 Language points
1 I’m from Wuhan武汉
里be from表示里
外：be from come from
eg They are from England
They come from England
注意：I’m from China and I’m Chinese
中国中国
2． I’m twelve years old 十二岁
表述年龄表示 ……岁省略
3． What about you呢？
4．Welcome to…欢迎……
eg Welcome to our school
5． be verbs
T Pay attention to the red words is am are these three are called be verbs Can you make a conclusion about their usage？ When do we use is am are let the students think about this question for a while and answer together
6． 列句：两更意思关系紧密句子合成句子形成列句分句and连接
eg I’m your teacher and you are my students
1Take notes write down the key points
2Translation
1 学生I’m a student
2 12岁 He is twelve years old
3 身体They are very well
4 男孩You are a boy
5 女孩She is a girl
6 狗 It is a dog
3Conclusion
be 动词法歌
amareIs 连着单数名词is复数名词全are
变否定容易benot 加变疑问前提首句写关键末句问号莫忘记
4Practice
Use is or isn’t are or aren’t to fill in the blanks(is or isn’t are or aren’t 填空）
1) Lingling Chinese
2) She English
3) Lingling and Daming teachers
4) They students
Find more sentences in the dialogue and read them（寻找列句）
次课文中重点句型进行梳理整合结合适练学生时条理吸收新知识加运时培养学生记笔记总结纳学策略
Step Five
Speaking （10’）
Activity9 Summary and pair work
T Today we have learned how to ask personal information Do you still remember them Let’s try together
The teacher asks some pairs to show in front of the whole class
Activity 10 Self introduction
T Boys and girls did you notice that if we put the answers to the questions together we can make a self introduction So now let’s try to do it You can follow these sentence structures
Give students 3 minutes and ask 2 of them to make a show
2Let the students to choose the best team in this lesson
1) A What’s your name
My name is …
2) A Are you English Chinese American
Yes I am No I’m not I’m… I’m from…
3) A How old are you
I’m…years old
4) A What class are you in
I’m in Class… Grade…
5) A Nice to meet you
Nice to meet you too
Practice this dialogue with their partners
Teacher asks some pairs to show in front of the class
Hello class My name is … I’m from … and I’m …I’m a student I’m … years old I’m in Class… Grade… Nice to meet you Thank you
Students practice by themselves
Then two students make a self introduction in front of the class
通桌问答方式学生掌握听力活动中展示语法句法更重交际中学会介绍获取细节性信息
呈现环节充分激发学生思维情感踊跃发言
Step Six
Home
work
（1’）
Homework
1 Listen to the tape and read after it three times
2 Finish the exercises of Unit 1
3 Preview the second unit
Finish the homework
课作业助学生巩固已学知识补充方面锻炼
板书
设计
Module 1 My classmates
Unit 1 Nice to meet you
1) A What’s your name
My name is …
2) A Are you English Chinese American
Yes I am No I’m not I’m… I’m from…
3) A How old are you I’m…years old
4) A What class are you in I’m in Class… Grade…
5) A Nice to meet you
Nice to meet you too
达标训练题（满分100分）
单项选择 （50分）
( ) 1 Zhang Ling and I are thirteen years old ______ are friends
A They B You C We
( ) 2 Tom is from ______ and he is ______
A English England B England English C English English
( ) 3 —Nice to meet you
—_____
A Nice to meet you too B Good afternoon C Goodbye
( ) 4 —Where are you from
—______
A I’m in Class One B I’m Li Lei C I’m from Shenzhen
( ) 5 Beijing is a big ______
A city B school C class
二句子改错 （50分）
面句画线部分中处错误请指出改正
1 Lingling is twelve and she is in class 2
A B C
2 Mr Smith is from America but he is a teacher
A B C
3 Miss Li Lingling and Daming is all Chinese
A B C
4 David is from England and she is in China
A B C
5 There are twenty nine students in our class
A B C
Book1 Module1My classmates
教学容：Unit2 I m Wang Lingling and I’m thirteen years old
二 课型：Reading and writing
三 教学目标：
1够正确列单词词组：but everyone capital last name first namebigsmall
2够读懂介绍短文
3够进行介绍介绍
4区交流时学会尊重域表达惯理解
四 教学重难点：
1掌握课新词词组
2掌握中外姓名表达惯：first name last name
3够进行简单介绍
五 教学准备：
课堂整体运务型教学模式 创设真实语境通呈现伴互动组活动等师生生生交流充分体现学生学程中体位教师课堂引导者组织者合作者课指导学生通阅读获取信息培养学生阅读技教学程中采媒体手段辅助教学利种图片题务贯穿整教学程节课需准备：PPT课件课堂练表格奖品
六 教学程：
教学
步骤
教师活动
学生活动
设计意图
Step One
Warmingup (3’)
Lead in
Play a piece of music and then show some pictures about the stars include some simple personal information
T
Who is shehe
Where is shehe from
How old is shehe
1 Answer the questions in the whole classlike this SheHe is…SheHe is from…SheHe is…years old…
2Answer the questions in person
节课复激发学生兴趣直接效学生思维引介绍话题学生轻松愉快气氛中进入课学
Step Two
Pre
reading
(8’)
Activity 2 New words study
1Lead the students to learn the new words in groups
2Show the sentences about the new words in this unit and some pictures
3Choose the little teacher to teach the new words and the teacher correct the mistakes
4Check the exercise in Activity 1
1Learn the new words in groups
2Fill in the blanks
Check the answers with the whole class
3Little teacher to teach the new wordsThe others to read after the little teacher
4Competitive in the whole class
组学单词体现学生体位全班学参中通图片创设情景学新单词加深学生新单词记忆增加学生学趣味性老师带读锻炼学生丰富课堂教学形式完成导学案词汇练加强学词汇巩固运学生扫清阅读障碍
Step Three
While
reading (20’)
1 Scanning
(1)Ask students to scan
the passage
T How many students are there in this passage
T Read quickly and tell me who they are
2 Skimming
Ask students to skim the passage and check (√) the true sentences and then correct the false sentences
3Careful reading
(1) Paragrap1
①Choose the best answers
T Now please look at paragraphs 1 and choose the best answers of the two questions
②Let the students read Paragraph 1 in groups of six and find out difficulties
③Solve difficulties
T Let’s continue learning Paragraph 2
(2) Paragraph 2
①Present some sentences to the students and ask them to write T or F also correct the wrong sentences after reading Paragraph 2
②Ask a student to be a little teacher to check the answers
③ Let one team students read Paragraph 2 and the other students listen carefully to point out important points
④Solve difficulties
T The last paragraph is talking about Tony Smith Let’s read and know more about him
(3)Paragraph 3
①Let the students fill in the blanks after reading Paragraph 3
②Let the students to check the answers in groups first and then competive
③Ask a group of six students to read paragraph 3 Let the other students listen carefully and find out difficulties
④Solve difficulties
T Let’s read the passage together
(4)Ask the students
read the passage
together make sure they
understand the passage
(1)Scan the passage and answer like this
Ss Three
Ss David Lingling Tony Smith
Group competition
（2）Read the passage and check (√) the true sentences and then correct the false sentences by themselves
1 Henry is Daming’s English name
2 Lingling’s English name is Linda
3 Daming is twelve years old
4 Wang Hui is from Beijing
5 Tony is twelve years old
6 Tony is from the capital of England
(1) Read paragrap1
①Choose the best answers
1Where is the capital of China
AEngland
B China
2How old is Lucy
A She is twelve years old
B We don’t know
C She is from Beijing
②Read Paragraph 1 in groups of six and find out difficulties
③Solve the difficulties together
(2)Read the paragraph 2 also correct the wrong sentences
①write T or F after reading Paragraph 2
1 Wang Lingling is twelve years old( )
2 Wang Lingling and Wang Hui are in the same class( )
3 Henry is from Shanghai and it’s a samll city ( )
②A student to be a little teacher to check the answers Others try their best to answer the questions
③One team students read Paragraph 2 and the other students point out difficulties points
④To say the difficulties
and solve together
(3)Read the Paragraph 3
① Fill in the blanks
after reading paragraph 3
My name is ______ _______
I’m from__________It’s a _____city in England Tony is my ______name and Smith is my ________nameI’m thirteen______old It’s nice to_____ you all
②The students check the answers in groups first and then competive
③A group of six students to read paragraph 3 The other students listen carefully and find out difficulties
④Say the difficulties and solve them
(4)The students read the
passage together to make sure
understand the passage
求学生快速阅读课文整体握课文容
通学生快速阅读培养学生获取旨力 进步学做铺垫
学生带着务（问题）阅读课文找答案助学生更加准确获取信息提高阅读效果技学生通分层次阅读文章获取具体信息知识点课文理解分段学突破组活动通学生间合作学学生充分实践运语言激发学生创造性思维发展
Step Four
Post
reading
(6’)
1Retell
①Let the students fill
in the blanks according
to the picture
②Call back the answers
from two students then
read the short passage
in the whole class
2Speaking
① Ask and answer about the people in the pictures
②Ask some students to come to the blackboard and introduce themselvesand their friends
the others listen and retell
1 Look at the picture
and the table to fillin the blanks
Li Daming’s ________ name is David He is _______ years old and he is fromBeijing Beijing is ______ _________ _____ ChinaWang Lingling is_______ years old Wang Hui is ______ friend He’s______ Shanghai Shanghai is a big _____ Tony Smith is from______ He is _______Tony is______ first name and Smith is his _____ name
Pair work
①One ask and one answer Check in groups
②Ready in groups of sixListen carefully and retell
复述课文学生加深课文容理解
适量口头练学生巩固课时语言重点锻炼口头表达力
Step Five
Summary（2’）
1Get the students to
sum up the language points
T What have we learned today
Ss……
2Let the students to choose the best team in this lesson
1Sum up the language points
2To choose the best groups
引导学生节课总结学生做发言培养学生学总结良学惯
简短评价学生课堂表现肯定激励学生学兴趣树立学英语信心
Step Six
Home
work
（1’）
采访两新学分问问题：
What＇s your name
Where are you from
How old are you
What＇s your favourite subject
采访记录整理成篇My new classmates短文（适增加采访问题全文少60单词）
Finish the homework
课作业助学生巩固已学知识补充方面锻炼写作阅读拓展学生终完全掌握语言实践运语言
七 板书设计：
Module 1 Unit 2 I m Wang Lingling and I’m thirteen years old
What’s your name My name is…
Where are you from I’m from…
Nice to meet you … Nice to meet you too
达标训练题(100分)
阅读文章中找出重信息填写面表格（50分）
My name is Jim Green I am twelve I am not from China and I am not Chinese I am English but I am a student in a Chinese middle school I am in Class 3 Grade 1
Li Ping is my friend He is thirteen He is Chinese He is from Hunan He is not in Class Three He is in Class 1 We are good friends
Read the passage again Find the important information and then fill in the table below
Name
Age
Country(国家)
Class
Jim Green
twelve
(1)__ ____
(2)______ Grade 1
Li Ping
(3)______
(4)______
(5)______ Grade 1
二Write sentences for you （50分）
1)_____________________________________________________
2)______________________________________________________
3)______________________________________________________
4)_______________________________________________________
5）______________________________________________________
Book1 Module 1 My classmates
八 教学容：Unit3 Language in use
九 课型：Revision and application
十 教学目标：
1 正确运模块词汇：Chinese from where year about American all capital England about What about first name last name等
2 运动词be般现时陈述句般疑问句形式运代词I my you your he his she her
3 be动词做简单介绍询问方信息
4 掌握英美国家姓名表达方式中国掌握作介绍时英美士中国答惯
十 教学重难点：
够运学句型结构朋友介绍情况
十二 教学准备：
节课型Revision and application根新课标求结合教材学生特点采务型互动式进行教学结合情景法交际法听说法纳法等教学方法实施课堂活动开启学生思维通系列条理教学活动引导学生探究学互动合作学学生体验愉快学节课需教具资料：PPT图片等
十三 教学程：
教学步骤
教 师 活 动
学 生 活 动
活 动 目
1 Leadingin
（7’）
1Show the pictures and ask the students to make dialogues to introduce three people to your class
2Give instructions of word game
1The students act out the dialogues in pairs introduce the three pepole to the class with the pictures
2 Play a word game a little teacher others give the answers
1Review and consolidate the usage of the present simple be and I he she my his her you your it our
2Review and consolidate the new words
2 Whiletask(17’)
1 Ask the students to write the grammar they have leant in this module as many as they can
The teacher give some examples
2Let the students do Activity 2 and then check the answers
Students finish it by themselves like this
动词Be般现时：
1 肯定句：语+ be(amisare) +
2 否定句：语+be+not+
3 般疑问句：Be+语+？
4 特殊疑问句：疑问词+般疑问句？
动词Be常句式：
1 be + 形容词
I am very happy 幸福
He is very kind 非常
2 be + 名词
Mr Wang is our English teacher
王先生英语老师
They are our good friends
朋友
3 be + 介词短语
She is at home 家里
Are you from America 美国？
The book is on the desk 书桌子
4 be + 副词 Class is over 课
2Do Activity 2 look at the pictures in Activity 1 and complete the sentences
Then check the answers with the partners
Review and consolidate the grammar in this modulel
3 Let the students do Activity 3 and then check the answers
4Let the students do Activity 4 and then check the answers
3 Do Activity3 Complete the conversation Then ask two students to check the answersRead in whole class
4 Do Activity3 Complete the table The students will have a match for it
5Around the world
Ask the students to learn the differnce expression of names
And fill in the form
The students will be given three minutes to fill in the form
Three students will have a match for it on the blackboard
To know the differnce expression of names
Family nameLast name
Given nameFirst name
Yang Liwei
Bill Gates
Li Ming
Tony Smith
3 Posttask
(19’)
1 Organization
2 Organization
1Students work in groups of sixAsk and answer questionsUsing the questions in the text and writing down their best friends’ information
2 Make a report about their best friends’ information Then share with the class
1To practice the skill of speaking
2 Enable students to talk about themselves and their friends
3 Ask the students to write a short passage in the test
4 Organization
3Write a short passage in the test Using the information in the table to help you
4 Some students share their passage with the class See who is the best
To practice the skill of writing
4 Summary
(1’)
Ask the students to conclude the usage of the present simple be and I he she my his her you your it our
Students conclude the usage of the usage of the present simple be and I he she my his her you your it our
Let the students internalize the grammar they’ve learned in this module
5 Homework（1’）
查找资料名资料全班学介绍心目中喜爱英明星
尊敬少60字
板书设计
板书设计 Module 1 Unit 3 Language in use
What’s your name My name is…
Where are you from I’m from…
How old are you I’m …years old
达标训练题（100分）
空白处填适单词（50分）
1 He is ____ Beijing and he is ___ my class
2 I’m from _____ and I’m _______
3 Lingling is not from _______ and she
isn’t _______
4 Tom is _____ （15岁）years old
5 We ___ students We ____ _____ Beijing
二假设Ann请根表格材料提示I’m Ann题学作介绍少50单词（50分）
Name
安
Age
14
From
America
Class
七年级班
Languages
英语汉语
Family
父亲母亲弟弟
Book1 Module 2 My Family
教学容：Unit 1 Is this your mum
二 课型：Listening and speaking
三 教学目标：
1 To talk about your family members
2 To listen and understand familiar topic
3 To learn some key words and useful expressions
四 教学重难点：
1单词词组：brother cousin daughter family grandfather parent son sister uncle a photo of… in front of… on the left next to
2听读关介绍家庭简短话辨认话中物关系
3指示代词介绍家庭询问家庭情况
五 教学准备：
课指导学生通听力获取信息培养学生听力技课堂采媒体手段辅助教学轻松愉快氛围中较真实语境联系学生生活实际结合已知识验运学语言基础知识学互相学学生语言实践中相互启发生成体验成功培养学生合作精神发展思维想象等力教学程中采媒体手段辅助教学利种图片题务贯穿整教学程节课需准备：PPT课件挂图录音机课堂练表格奖品
六 预求：
根音标学课新单词
七 教学程：
教学
步骤
教师活动
学生活动
设计意图
Step One
Warmingup (3’)
Lead in
1 First ：let the students see a video It is a song about familyAnd then answer
1How many people are there in the video
2Who are they
Second Greeting Free talk to lead in our today’s module (Module2 My family Unit 1
Is this your mum )
1 Enjoy the video and try to answer the questions
2 Talk with the teacher and partners
学生喜欢动画首歌曲导入新课学生进入英语氛围中激发学生学兴趣利进入新课学中
Step Two
Pretask(5’)
Task1Check the new words
1 Let the students see the screen
A boy Tony and then study the new words(about his family)
2Organize the students to read the new words together
3Check the students’ new words learning according to the Activity 1
1See the pictures and things to say out the new words
2 Read the new words together
3 Check the students’ new words learning according to the Activity 1
利媒体生动形象学生展示新单词学生轻松环境学会单词通图片情景学单词做词离句
Step Three
Whiletask (20’)
Task2listening
(1) Play the tape ask students to listen and check the people Tony mentions(Activity 2)
(2)Guide the students to listen to the conversation and choose the correct answer (Activity3)
Task 3 Reading
(1) Organize the students to read the conversation with the video
(2)Ask the Ss to work with their groups to read the conversation
(3) Organize the students to underline the correct words
(4)Organize the students to check their answers one by one
（Activity 4）
Task 4 Solve the language points
(1)Organize students to come to the blackboard and show out some difficult language points that they found
(2)Help the students to solve the difficult points
Task5 Show some photos of my family(introduce the teacher’s family members )
(1) Listen and check the people Tony mentions (Activity 2)
(2)Listen to the conversation and choose the correct answer Then check
(1)Read the conversation with the video
(2) Read the conversation in groups
(3) Underline the correct words（Activity 4）
(4) Check the answers one by one
(1) Students come to the blackboard to show out some language points the other students listen to them carefully and note
(2)solve the difficult points with the teacher’s help
Listen and appreciate (欣赏)some pictures about the teacher’s family members )
利听读练方式加强学生课文理解培养学生细节听力技巧够听取信息训练培养学生细节听力技巧
通视频听读话帮助学生进步理解课文容
组活动通学生间合作学学生充分实践运语言培养团结合作精神
通学生台展示找语言点培养学生胆量培养学力
教师点拨补充语言点学生进步理解知识点
环节老师通介绍家庭帮学生复刚刚学容吸引学生兴趣接学生做话做铺垫
Step Four
Posttask
(9’)
Task 6Do some speaking
(1) Show some photos of your family and talk about your family with your family
(2) Have the Ss come to the blackboard and show out their photos of their family And then make dialogues with partners
(1) Ask students to do some
Exercises and then check
(1) Make dialogues in pairs with the teacher’s help
(2) Act out the new dialogues
(3)Do the exercises then check
通做话训练学生说力学生加深课文容理解适量口头练学生巩固课时语言重点
通笔头练进步巩固学
Step Five
Summary（2’）
1Get the students to sum up the language points
T What have we learned today
Ss……
2Let the students to choose the best team in this lesson
1Sum up the language points
2To choose the best groups
引导学生节课总结学生做发言培养学生学总结良学惯
简短评价学生课堂表现肯定激励学生学兴趣树立学英语信心
Step Six
Home
work
（1’）
想象家庭样少女少孙子孙女请画出family tree 学描述出
Finish the homework
课作业助学生巩固已学知识补充方面锻炼
板书
设计
Module2 My Family 组评价
八 Unit1 Is this your mum
T1 T2 T3
Example There are three people in my family They are my father my mother and I My father is forty seven years old My mother is forty six years old Both of them are workers
Let the students introduce their families
A Is this your mumdad
B Yes it is this is my
A Are those your grandparents
B Yes they areNo they aren’t
A Who’s this
B That’s my
A What a happy family
B Thank you
达标训练题
单词练练
祖父 外祖父 gr_nd_ather
祖母 外祖母g_andm_ther
父亲 fa__er
母亲 moth__
兄弟 b__ther
姐 妹 s_s_er
姨 伯母 au_t
叔叔 伯伯 un__e
二根首字母完成单词
1 It is a p____ of Tony’s family
2 How m___ people are there in Lingling’s family
3 Daming’s sister is on the l__
4 Tony’s a___ is next to his u____
三根汉语提示完成句子
1 妹妹医生站旁边
___ sister is a _____ She is standing ___ __ me
2 奶奶美国名公汽车司机
___ grandma is ____ America She’s a bus _____
3 新行车片
Look _____ ___ _____ ______ of my new bike
4 妈妈紧挨着爸爸
His mother is ____ __ his father
四方框中选出合适词填空
her we our my his she he
My name’s Rebecca These are ___ friends There are from different countries Susan is American ___ father is a doctor Mike isn’t Chinese ___is English ___ mother is a teacher ___ is ___ English teacher ___ are her students
Book 1 Module 2 My Family
教学容：Unit2 These are my parents
二 课型：Reading and writing
三 教学目标：
1To read the passage aloud and find specific information about people
2To learn some key words and useful expressions
3To write personal information using punctuation (capital letters and full stops) correctly
四 教学重难点：
1阅读介绍物职业工作点简短文章
2写出简短句子介绍家庭成员正确运写句号
3运指示代词名词格运称代词格形式形容词性物代词
五 教学准备：
课堂整体运务型教学模式阅读课四阶段教学模式课指导学生通阅读获取信息培养学生阅读技教学程中采媒体手段辅助教学利种图片题务贯穿整教学程节课需准备：PPT课件挂图录音机课堂练表格奖品
六 预求：
根音标学课新单词
七 教学程：
教学
步骤
教师活动
学生活动
设计意图
Step One
Warmingup (5’)
1Lead in
Look and say
Look at a picture and say
Who’s this
This is …
What’s your father’s mother’ job
HeShe is …
2．Work in pairs
Ask the students to make dialogues with partners
according to activity 6
1What’s your father’s name
2 What’s your father’s job
3 What’s your mother’s name
4 What’s your mother’s job
Look at a picture and answer the questions according to the picture
Make dialogues with their partners according to the activity 6
1 What’s your father’s name
2 What’s your father’s job
3 What’s your mother’s name
4 What’s your mother’s job
通图片回答问题引导学生回顾节课容引入课相关容
通环节说句子中考验学生知识掌握程度训练学生反应形中培养学生胆说英语惯
Step Two
Pre
reading
(5’)
1Label the places in the pictures with the words and expressions from the box
2Label the people in Activity 1 with the words and expression from the box（activity 2）
1 Label the places in the pictures with the words and expressions from the box Then check
2 Label the people in Activity 1 and then check
引导学生标注课文图片中工作点职业学新单词时通图片学生进步解相关职业学生扫清阅读障碍
Step Three
While
reading (18’)
1 Scanning
(1)Ask students to scan
the passage and write the letters of the pictures in Activity 1
2 Skimming
Ask students to skim the passage and complete the table in Activity 4
3Careful reading
(1)Paragraph 12
①Choose the best answers
T Please read paragraph12 and choose the best answers in groups
1Scan the passage and write the letters of the pictures in Activity 1
2Skim the passage and complete the table in Activity 4
①Read paragraph1 and choose the best answers in groups
求学生快速阅文章完成相关务帮助学生理解课文容
通学生快速阅读培养学生获取旨力进步理解文章容 进步学做铺垫
学生带着务（问题）阅读课文找答案助学生更加准确获取信息提高阅读效果技学生通分层次阅读文章获取具体信息知识点课文理解分段学突破
1) Betty is from ______
A America B England C China
2) Betty’s mother works at a _
A hotel B school C theatre
3) Daming’s father is ________
A a nurse B a policeman C an actor
②Organize some students to come to the blackboard and show out some difficult language points that they found in these paragraphs
(2)Paragraph 34
①Read paragraph 34 and check the true sentences
②Some students come to the blackboard and show out some difficult language points that they found in these paragraphs
①Students check the true sentences about paragraph 34
also correct the wrong sentences
1 Tony is from England
2 Tony’s mother teaches Chinese at a school
3 Lingling’s mother works at a but station
②Organize some students to come to the blackboard and show out some difficult language points that they found in these paragraphs
②Some students come to the blackboard and show out some difficult language points that they found in these paragraphs
Step Four
Post
reading
(10’)
1 Organize the Ss to introduce Betty Daming Tony and Lingling with the information in the table in Activity 4
2 Activity 6 Have the Ss to work in pairs asking and answering the questions
3 Writing（Activity 5）
①Look at the sentences and underline capital letters and full stops
②Ask some students to show out their answers
③explain the use of capital letters and full stops
1 Introduce Betty Daming Tony and Lingling with the information in the table in Activity 4 one by one
2 Asking and answering the questions in pairs in Activity 6 Then introduce their partner’s father and mother
3 Show out their answers and take a note
通完成课练加强刚学课文容巩固时学写字母句号法
Step Five
Summary（1’）
1Get the students to
sum up the language points
T What have we learned today
Ss……
2 Let the students to choose the best team in this lesson
1Sum up the language points
2To choose the best groups
引导学生节课总结学生做发言培养学生学总结良学惯
简短评价学生课堂表现肯定激励学生学兴趣树立学英语信心
Step Six
Home
work
（1’）
Write down your family (3050字)
a bigsmall family there are people grandma grandpa mother father uncle aunt sister brother cousin job worker teacher
Finish the homework and review the new words and expressions
课作业助学生巩固已学知识写作阅读拓展学生终掌握语言实践运语言
八 板书设计：
Module2 My Family 组评价
Unit 2 These are my parents T1 T2 T3
Work in pairs
This is …
SheHe is from …
My mother is…
My father’s job is …
SheHe works at …
达标训练题
根句意写单词
1 Dad’s mum is a nurse She’s at a _______
2 My dad is a ______ He works at a school
3 Daming’s uncle is a manager He works in a ____
4 Linda is my mother’s sister she is my ____
5 My father is a _________ His job is at a police station
二单词适形式填空
1 There ____ (be) 30 students in my class
2 We see many ______ (doctor) in the hospital
3 How many ______ (person) are there in your family
4 He is Tom Give ____ (he) the English book
5 This is ______ (Betty) family picture
三句型转换
1 There are 5 people in my family（变般疑问句作肯定回答）
__ ___ 5 people in your family
Yes there is
2 These are Betty’s grandparents（划线部分提问）
______ grandparents are these
3 He is a doctor（a teacher改选择疑问句）
__ he a doctor __ __ _______
4 Thank you for your help（改义句）
Thank you for _______ ___
5 Is this your grandmother（作肯定回答）
Yes _ __
Book1 Module 2 My Family
教学容：Unit3 Language in use
二 课型：Revision and application
三 教学目标：
1 正确运模块词汇指示代词名词格
2 正确运称代词格形式形容词性物代词
3 够家谱形式画出家庭结构图学介绍家庭说基础够落实笔头够写短文介绍家庭
四 教学重难点：
指示代词称代词格形式形容词性物代词
五 教学准备：
节课型Revision and application根新课标求结合教材学生特点采务型互动式进行教学结合情景法交际法听说法纳法等教学方法实施课堂活动开启学生思维通系列条理教学活动引导学生探究学互动合作学学生体验愉快学节课需教具资料：幻灯图片等
六 教学程：
教学步骤
教 师 活 动
学 生 活 动
活 动 目
1 Leadingin
（8’）
1 Ask the students to work in pairs ask and answer questions about the families make dialogues like these(Activity 1)
Is this your family
Yes it is
Are these your grandparents
Yes they are
1The students act out the dialogues in pairs using the following sentences
Is this your family
Yes it is
Are these your grandparents
Yes they are …
Review and consolidate the sentences which they have learn
2 Whiletask(20’)
1 Ask the students to do Activity 2
Look at the pictures and talk about the families
① Lily’s family
② Jack’s family
③ Li Ming’s family
Eg This is Lily’s family Her father is a doctor and her mother is a nurse Her grandfather…
1 Look at the pictures and talk about the families
① Lily’s family
② Jack’s family
③ Li Ming’s family
Review and consolidate the vocabulary and language just learned in the first two units
2
Let the students do Activity 2 and then check the answers
3Ask students to
finish Activity 345
4 Ask students to read Around the world and then answer the questions after reading
2 Do Activity 2
Look at the pictures and complete the sentences with this that these those Then check the answers with the partners
3 Finish Activity 345 and then check it together
Read Around the world and answer the questions after reading
通练巩固学知识
Enlarge the knowledge about the world
3 Posttask
(10’)
1 Ask students to work in pairs
(activity 6)
Draw your family tree Work in pairs Talk about each other’s family
2Ask the students to act out their conversations
3Let students do some exercises and then check
1Work in pairs
Draw your family tree Work in pairs Talk about each other’s family (activity 6)
2Act out your conversations
3 Do some exercises and then check
1To practice the skill of speaking
2 Enable students to talk about their family
Practice the language points
4 Summary
(1’)
Ask the students to say out what to learn
Students conclude the knowledge that they learn
Let the students internalize the grammar they’ve learned in this module
5 Homework（1’）
Write about your family
My father is a(n)…at…
板书设计
Module 2 My Family
Unit3 Language in use
达标训练题
根句意完成句子
1 __ _____ any bread in the box
2 She doesn’t ____ a nice kite
3 Under the tree _____ ___ some women drinking tea
4 ___ _____ any cakes in your bag
5 ___ _____ your parents
二根括号求改写列句子
1 There are five people in my family (划线部分提问)
____________________________
_____________________________
2 This is my parent (改成复数形式句子)
_____________________________
3 His brother works at a factory (变般疑问句)
____________________________
4 This is David’s sister (变否定句)
____________________________
5 This is a big family (变感叹句)
____________________________
三根汉语意思完成英语句子空词数限
1 贝蒂妈妈医院工作
Betty’s mother _____ at a _______
2 姐姐警察局工作
His _____ works at a _____ ______
3 祖父母没中国
His grandparents aren’t in China ____ ___
4 家口？
________________________ in your family
5 妈妈姨姨？
Is she ______________________
6 爷爷奶奶？
____ these ____________
Book 1 Module 3 My school
十四 教学容：Unit 1 There are thirty students in my class
十五 课型：Listening and speaking
十六 教学目标：
1正确运单元词汇短语：computer furniture map picture television wall thirty forty fifty sixty seventy eighty ninety really many how many there a lot of any world
2听懂介绍学校简单话
3掌握there be句型肯定否定般疑问特殊疑问句式相应回答运句型介绍教室样子
4学描述理想教室样子理想教室样子设想等
十七 教学重难点：
掌握there be句型肯定否定般疑问特殊疑问句式相应回答运句式介绍教室样子
五教学准备：
课指导学生通听力获取信息培养学生听力技课堂采媒体手段辅助教学轻松愉快氛围中较真实语境联系学生生活实际结合已知识验运学语言基础知识学互相学学生语言实践中相互启发生成体验成功培养学生合作精神发展思维想象等力教学程中采媒体手段辅助教学利种图片题务贯穿整教学程节课需准备：PPT课件挂图录音机课堂练表格奖品
六 预求：
根音标学课新单词
七 教学程：
教学
步骤
教师活动
学生活动
设计意图
Step One
Warmingup (3’)
Lead in
1Free talk
(1)Show some pictures and ask Ss like these
What’s in the picture
IsAre there …
What’s in the classroom
There isare …
(2)Show more pictures and let Ss talk about them and learn some new words try to use the sentences with There isare…
1 Answer the questions
2 Talk with partners learn some new words and try to use the sentences with There isare
学生free talk程中感受新语言项目通环节活跃课堂气氛调动学生学兴趣
Step Two
Pretask(5’)
Task1 Check the new words
1 Show some pictures and things to get the students to say out the new words
2 Organize the students to read the new words together
3Ask the Ss to describe the pictures and try to use the words in the box(Activity 1)
1 Look at the pictures and things to say out the new words
2 Read the new words together
3 To describe the pictures and try to use the words in the box(Activity 1)
引导学生谈实物ppt图片检查学生词汇掌握程度训练学生表达力通图片情景学单词做词离句Check完词汇时做Activity 1进行巩固
Step Three
Whiletask (20’)
Task2listening
(1)Ask the Ss to read the numbers in the box in Activity 2 and match the words with numbers in Activity 6
(1) Play the tape ask the students to listen and choose the correct picture in Activity 1 (Activity 2)
(2)Organize the students to check their answers
(3)Guide the students to listen to the conversation and complete the table(Activity 3)
T Here’s the dialogue about Linda’s and Daming’s classrooms Let’s listen and complete the table
(4)Organize the students to check their answers
Task 3 Reading
(1) Organize the students to read the conversation with the video
(2)Ask the Ss to work with their groups to read the conversation
(3) Have a competition Read the dialogue in groups and choose the best group
Task 4 Solve the language points
(1)Organize students to come to the blackboard and show out some difficult language points that they have found
(2)Help the students to solve the difficult points
(1)Read the numbers aloud and match the words with the numbers in Activity 6
(1) Listen to the tape and choose the correct picture in Activity 1 (Activity 2)
(2) Check the answers
(3) Listen to the conversation and complete the table(Activity 3)
(4)Check the answers
(1)Read the conversation with the video
(2) Read the conversation in groups
(3) Read the dialogue in groups and choose the best group
(1) Students come to the blackboard to show out some language points the other students listen to them carefully and make notes
(2)Solve the difficult points with the teacher’s help
利听读练方式加强学生课文理解培养学生细节听力技巧够听取信息训练培养学生细节听力技巧
通视频听读话帮助学生进步理解课文容
组活动通学生间合作学学生充分实践运语言培养团结合作精神
通学生台展示找语言点培养学生胆量培养学力
教师点拨补充语言点学生进步理解知识点
Step Four
Posttask
(9’)
Task 6Do some speaking
(1) Get the Ss to talk about Linda’s and Daming’s class with the information in the table in Activity 3 in groups then individual
（2）Ask students to talk about their ideal classroom
A How many … are there in your classroom
B There are…
A Is there a …
B Yes there isNo there isn’t
(3) Have the Ss act out their new dialogues
(4) Organize the Ss to talk about their ideal classroom
(5) Ask students to do some
exercises and then check
(1) Try to talk about Linda’s and Daming’s class with the information in the table in Activity 3 in groups then individual
（2）Make dialogues in groups with the teacher’s help And write down the information in the table in Activity 7
(3) Act out the new dialogues
(4) Talk about their ideal classroom in groups then individual
(5)Do the exercises then check
培养学生表达力引导记住话容
通做话训练学生说力学生加深课文容理解适量口头练学生巩固课时语言重点
通笔头练进步巩固学
Step Five
Summary（2’）
1 Get the students to sum up the language points
T What have we learned today
Ss…
2 Let the students choose the best team in this lesson
1 Sum up the language points
2 To choose the best team
引导学生节课总结学生做发言培养学生学总结良学惯
简短评价学生课堂表现肯定激励学生学兴趣树立学英语信心
Step Six
Home
work
（1’）
Write a passage about their ideal classroom
Write a passage about their ideal classroom
课作业助学生巩固已学知识补充方面锻炼
板书
设计
Module 3 My school 组评价
八 Unit 1 There are thirty students in my class
What’s in your classroom T1 T2 T3
There is are ________
How many students are there in your class
There are sixty
达标训练题
单项选择
（ ）1 There _______ 21 boys in our class
A am B is C are
（ ）2 There aren’t _______ computers on our desks
A some B any C much
（ ）3 Are there any books on your desk _________
A Yes there is B Yes there are C Yes they are
（ ）4 There a pen and some rulers on the desk
A is B are C have
（ ）5The teacher asks us to listen to him
A in the class B in class C at class
二根汉语完成句子空词
1．班四十六学生
______ ______ 46 students _______ ______ ________
2．李老师桌子台电脑？
______ _______ a computer on ______ _______ _________
3．班少名女生？
______ _______ _______ are there in _______ _______
Book 1 Module 3 My school
十八 教学容：Unit2 The library is on the left of the playground
十九 课型：Reading and writing
二十 教学目标：
1够正确列单词词组：building hall gate library office playground science lab behind in front of between middle near with for room
2通描述判断出图中物体间位置关系
3正确表示方位介词描述图中物体位置关系
4运学结构介绍学校
二十 教学重难点：
1正确表示方位介词描述图中物体位置关系（重点）
2运学结构介绍学校（难点）
二十二 预求：
根音标学课新单词
二十三 教学准备：
课堂整体运务型教学模式阅读课四阶段教学模式课指导学生通阅读获取信息培养学生阅读技教学程中采媒体手段辅助教学利种图片题务贯穿整教学程节课需准备：PPT课件挂图录音机课堂练表格奖品
二十四 教学程：
教师活动
学生活动
设计意图
Step One
Warmingup (5’)
Lead in
1Free talk
(1) Ask the Ss like these
What’s in the classroom
There isare …
Where is the…
(2)Show a picture of a school and ask the Ss like these
What’s in the picture？
Where is the library
(3)Help the Ss to answer The library is on the left of the playground Show more pictures of different positions
(4) Let the Ss read Betty’s words silently to find where the Ss are sitting
1 Answer the questions
2 Read Betty’s words silently to find where the Ss are sitting and label the names
先引导学生回顾节课容巩固there be结构语句通环节活跃课堂气氛说句子中考验学生方位介词知识掌握程度阅读作准备
Step Two
Prereading(5’)
Check the new words
1 Show some pictures and things to get the students to say out the new words
2 Organize the students to read the new words together
3Ask the Ss to label the pictures with the words and expressions from the box(Activity 1)
1 Look at the pictures and things to say out the new words
2 Read the new words together
3 To label the pictures with the words and expressions from the box(Activity 1)
引导学生谈实物ppt图片检查学生词汇掌握程度训练学生表达力通图片情景学单词做词离句Check完词汇时做Activity 1进行巩固阅读作铺垫
Step Three
Whilereading (20’)
1 Reading
(1) Scanning
Ask the Ss to read the passage and label the map of the school then check the answers
(2) Skimming
Ask students to read the passage again and check the true sentences
(3) Careful reading
Ask the Ss to read the passage again and answer the questions in Activity 4 then check the answers in groups Organize the Ss to check the answers in the whole class
2 Solve the language points
(1)Organize students to come to the blackboard and show out some difficult language points that they have found
(2)Help the students to solve the difficult points
(1)Read the passage and label the map of the school
(2) Check the answers
(1) Read the passage again and check the true sentences
1 There are six buildings in our school( )
2 In the middle of the school is a library( )
3 On the right of classroom is the dining hall( )
(1) Answer the questions
(2) Check the answers in groups
(3) Check the answers in the whole class
(1) Students come to the blackboard to show out some language points the other students listen to them carefully and make notes
(2)Solve the difficult points with the teacher’s help
求学生快速阅读文章标出建筑物名称达训练快速阅读力目
通学生快速阅读培养学生获取旨力进步理解文章容 进步学做铺垫
学生带着务（问题）阅读课文找答案助学生更加准确获取信息提高阅读效果技组活动通学生间合作学学生充分实践运语言激发学生创造性思维发展
通学生台展示找语言点培养学生胆量培养学力
教师点拨补充语言点学生进步理解知识点
Step Four
Postreading
(8’)
1Retell
①Let the Ss fill in the blanks according to the picture
②Call back the answers from two students then the whole class read the short passage
2Writing
①Write sentences about their school
②Ask some students to say out their sentences
①Look at the picture and fill in the blanks
This is a ___ of our school There are __ buildings in our school __________the school is a big playground The _____ is on the left of the playground ____ the library are the school offices The ________ is between this building and the dining hall ______ it is the sports hall and the building in front of that is for _____
②Two students say out the answers the whole class read the short passage together
① Write sentences about their school
②Some students say out their sentences
复述课文学生加深课文容理解
通写作学生巩固学增强写作力适量口头练学生巩固课时语言重点
Step Five
Summary（2’）
1 Get the students to sum up the language points
T What have we learned today
Ss…
2 Let the students choose the best team in this lesson
1 Sum up the language points
2 To choose the best team
引导学生节课总结学生做发言培养学生学总结良学惯
简短评价学生课堂表现肯定激励学生学兴趣树立学英语信心
Step Six
Home
work
（1’）
(1) Write a passage about their school
(2) Finish the exercises in the workbook of Unit 2
Finish the homework
课作业助学生巩固已学知识补充方面锻炼
板书
设计
Module 3 My school 组评价
Unit 2 The library is on the left of the playground T1 T2 T3
Where is the…
on the left on the right
behind in front of
between …and …
in the middle of
达标训练题
完成句子
1 贝蒂玲玲旁边
Betty _____ ______ ______ Lingling
2．明莉莉前面
They _____ _____ _____ ______ Daming and Lily
3 汤姆凯特吉姆面
Tom _____ ______ Kate and Jim
4 —学校办公室？
—办公室
—______ _______ ________ school offices
—Yes there ________ _______ offices
Book 1 Module3 My school
七 教学容：Unit3 Language in use
八 课型：Revision and application
九 教学目标：
1 掌握正确运模块词汇
2 掌握there be句型肯定否定般疑问特殊疑问句式相应回答
运句型介绍事物
3 正确表示方位介词描述物体位置关系
4 提高学英语兴趣树立信心培养积极动参种语言实践活动学态度
十 教学重难点：
运there be句型表方位介词描述介绍学校情况
十 教学准备：
节课型Revision and application根新课标求结合教材学生特点采务型互动式进行教学结合情景法交际法听说法纳法等教学方法实施课堂活动开启学生思维通系列条理教学活动引导学生探究学互动合作学学生体验愉快学节课需教具资料：幻灯图片等
十二 教学程：
教学步骤
教 师 活 动
学 生 活 动
活 动 目
1 Leadingin
（8’）
1 Ask the Ss
What’s the topic of this module
What’s in the school
Show and get the Ss to complete the word map in Activity 3
2 Get the Ss to talk about their school And write some key structures sentences on the blackboard
1 Answer the teacher’s questions and complete the word map
2 Talk about their school with the words on the word map
eg Is there a library in your school
Where is it
How many books are there in it
Review and consolidate the sentences which they have learned
2 Whiletask
2 Let the students do Activity 2 and then check the answers
3Ask students to read Around the world and then answer the questions after reading
2 Do Activity 2 and check the answers
3Read Around the world and answer the questions after reading
Consolidate the prepositions of place
Enlarge the knowledge about the world
3 Posttask
(10’)
2 Ask students to work in groups
Draw a map of your school
2Ask the students to introduce their school
3Let students do some exercises and then check
1Work in groups
Draw a map of their school
2Introduce their school
3 Do some exercises and then check
1To practice the skill of speaking
2 Enable students to talk about their ideal school
3Practice the language points
4 Summary
(1’)
Ask the students to say out what they have learned
Students conclude the knowledge that they have learned
Let the students internalize the grammar they’ve learned in this module
5 Homework（1’）
Draw a map of your ideal school and write a passage about your ideal school
板书设计
Unit 3 Language in use
Is there a library in our school Yes there is
The library is behind the on the left of the playground
How many books are there in the library
There are …
达标训练题
I 句型转换
1 There are some offices in front of our classroom(改般疑问句)
____ ____ _____office in front of your classroom
2 There are some computers on our desks(改否定句)
_____ ______ _____ computers on our desks
3 Is there a computer on your desk (作否定回答)
______ ______ ______
II Complete the passage
There _______ 44 students in Jeff’s class There are 21 ______ and 23 girls There _____ a blackboard on the front wall There ______ two maps on the wall but there _____ any pictures in the classroom There ______ 38 students in Dick’s class 20 boys and _____ girls There _____ a computer on the teacher’s desk There are four pictures in the classroom but there ______ a map
Book 1 Module 4 Healthy food
二十五 教学容：Unit 1 We’ve got lots of apples
二十六 课型：Listening and speaking
二十七 教学目标：
1正确运单元词汇短语 food drink candy fruit meat vegetable apple bean beef carrot chicken chocolate coffee juice milk potato tea tomato water kind some bad go shopping havehas got lots of too much
2听懂关食物饮料话
3掌握have got肯定句否定句疑问句回答
4谈喜欢食品健康食品购买食物
四教学重难点：
掌握have got肯定句否定句疑问句回答 运have got
谈食物饮料
五教学准备：
课指导学生通听力获取信息培养学生听力技课堂采媒体手段辅助教学轻松愉快氛围中较真实语境联系学生生活实际结合已知识验运学语言基础知识学互相学学生语言实践中相互启发生成体验成功培养学生合作精神发展思维想象等力教学程中采媒体手段辅助教学利种图片题务贯穿整教学程节课需准备：PPT课件挂图挂图关某实物录音机课堂练表格奖品
六预求：
根音标学课新单词
七教学程：
教学
步骤
教师活动
学生活动
设计意图
Step One
Warmingup (3’)
Lead in
1Free talk
(1)Show some pictures and ask Ss like these
Are you hungry
What’s you favorite food
(2)Show more pictures and let Ss talk about them
2 Answer the questions
(2)Talk with partners about food
学生free talk程中感受新语言项目通环节活跃课堂气氛调动学生学兴趣
Step Two
Pretask(5’)
Task1 Check the new words
1 Word game Show some pictures and things to get the students to say out the new words quickly
2 Guessing game
Let the Ss play a guessing game
3Ask the Ss to look at the pictures and talk about them(Activity 1)
4 Ask the Ss to label the food in the pictures with the words from the boxes (Activities 23)
1 Look at the pictures and things to say out the new words quickly
2 Play a guessing game Guess out What’s in the bag Use the sentence Have you got any …
3Look at the pictures and talk about them(Activity 1)
4 Label the food in the pictures with the words from the boxes (Activities 23)
游戏形式引导学生快速说出实物ppt食物饮料名称引导学生学新词汇然猜游戏形式巩固词汇学新句型通图片情景学单词做词离句
Step Three
Whiletask (20’)
Task2listening
Play the tape ask students to listen and check (∨) the food and drink Betty and her mother have got (Activity 4)
Task 3 Listening and Reading
(1)Tell students they are going to listen to Tony and his father talking about going shopping and complete the table (Activity 5)
(2)Organize the students to read the conversation with the video
(3)Ask the Ss to work with their groups to read the conversation
(4) Have a competition Read the dialogue in groups and choose the best group
Task 4 Solve the language points
(1)Organize students to come to the blackboard and show out some difficult language points that they found
(2)Help the students to solve the difficult points
Task5 Retell the dialogue
(1)Ask students to retell the conversation with the information in the table in Activity 5 in groups
（2）Ask two of the students to retell the dialogue
Listen to the tape and choose check (∨) the food and drink Betty and her mother have got (Activity 4)
(1) Listen to Tony and his father talking about going shopping complete the table and (Activity 5)
(2)Read the conversation with the video
(3) Read the conversation in groups
(4) Read the dialogue in groups and choose the best group
(1) Students come to the blackboard to show out some language points the other students listen to them carefully and note
(2)Solve the difficult points with the teacher’s help
(1)Try to retell the conversation with the information in the table in Activity 5 in groups
(2)Two students retell the dialogue the others listen
利听读练方式加强学生课文理解培养学生细节听力技巧够听取信息训练培养学生细节听力技巧
通视频听读话帮助学生进步理解课文容
组活动通学生间合作学学生充分实践运语言培养团结合作精神
通学生台展示找语言点培养学生胆量培养学力
教师点拨补充语言点学生进步理解知识点
通复述话加深课文掌握时锻炼口语
Step Four
Posttask
(9’)
Task 6Do some speaking
(1)Ask students to talk about What they have got at home and make a list
(1) Talk about What they have got at home and make a list
通做话训练学生说力学生加深课文容理解适量口头练学生巩固课时语言重点
通笔头练进步巩固学
A Have you got any apples
B Yes I have I have got some apples No I haven’t
Have got
Haven’t got
Apples
√
Chicken
Beef
Tomatoes
(2) Have the Ss to talk about what the friends’ home have got
(3)Ask students to do some
Exercises and then check
(2) Talk about what the friends’ home have got
(3)Do the exercises then check
Step Five
Summary（2’）
1 Get the students to sum up the language points
T What have we learned today
Ss…
2 Let the students to choose the best team in this lesson
1 Sum up the language points
2 To choose the best groups
引导学生节课总结学生做发言培养学生学总结良学惯
简短评价学生课堂表现肯定激励学生学兴趣树立学英语信心
Step Six
Home
work
（1’）
(3) Make dialogues with partners to talk about the food
(4) Finish the exercises in the workbook of Unit 1
Finish the homework
课作业助学生巩固已学知识补充方面锻炼
板书
设计
Module4 Healthy food 组评价
二十八 Unit1 Unit 1 we’ve got lots of apples
We’ve got some … T1 T2 T3
Have we got any…
Yes we haveNo we haven’t
达标训练题
单项选择
（ ）1There isn’t _______meat in that box
A any B some C a
（ ）2Mary has got some
A apple B milk C tomato
（ ）3 I don’t like vegetables I like fruit
A and B so C but
（ ）4 There is a glass of on the table
A cakes B apples C water
（ ）5 John like apples of all the
A vegetables B fruits C drinks
二根汉语完成句子空词
1天晚回家
It was late ______ I went home
2冰箱里没牛奶需购物
There isn’t any ______ in the fridge We need to ____ _____
3块蛋糕样
_______ _______another cake
4俩太工作做
We both have______ _______ ________to do
5想起购物？
_______ you ______ ______ _______with me
Book 1 Module 4 Healthy food
二十九 教学容：Unit2 Is your food and drink healthy
三十 课型：Reading and writing
三十 教学目标：
1够正确列单词词组： healthy bread fish ice cream noodle rice eat child children be good for be bad for egg eye cheese soup well fat or breakfast every lunch home dinner banana
2够读懂关健康食品短文
3够发表食品法
4写出关健康食品短句掌but连词功
5通阅读关健康食品短文培养中国饮食感情培养民族豪感
三十二 教学重难点：
1够读懂关健康食品短文阅读中找出healthy food and drinkunhealthy food and drink 完成务（重点）
2够发表食品法（难点）
三十三 教学准备：
课堂整体运务型教学模式阅读课四阶段教学模式课指导学生通阅读获取信息培养学生阅读技教学程中采媒体手段辅助教学利种图片题务贯穿整教学程节课需准备：PPT课件挂图录音机课堂练表格奖品
三十四 教学程：
教学
步骤
教师活动
学生活动
设计意图
Step One
Warmingup (3’)
1Lead in
1Free talk
(1)Show some pictures and ask Ss like these What’re these
Ss They’re…
2．Taste and say
Ask 3 students to come to blackboard and taste wine cola and orange juice Ask them to say which food and drink are healthy
1Say the sentences
like this They’re…
2Taste and say
Sentence like this The orange juice is healthy drink for children The wine is unhealthy drink for children
The cola is unhealthy drink
先引导学生回顾节课容巩固关食品单词
通环节活跃课堂气氛说句子中考验学生Unit1知识掌握程度训练学生反应形中培养学生胆说英语惯
Step Two
Pre
reading
(5’)
1 Show the pictures in Activity 2 get the Ss to learn the new words
2 Organize the Ss to work in groups making the three lists from the food and drink of the pictures
Delicious food and drink
Favourite food and drink
Healthy food and drink
1 Learn the new words with the pictures
2 Work in groups making the three lists from the food and drink of the pictures
Delicious food and drink
Favourite food and drink
Healthy food and drink
Then show their answers
引导学生谈图片训练学生描述食物力描述时学新单词句型学生扫清阅读障碍
Step Three
While
reading (24’)
Step Three
While
reading (24’)
1 Scanning(Activity3)
(1)Ask students to scan the passage
T Please scan the passage and choose which food and drink are healthy for children
2 Skimming
Ask students to skim the passage
T How many paragraphs are there in the passage
Ss Three
T Read quickly again and match the main ideas with each paragraph
3 Careful reading
①Ask the students to carefully read Paragraph 1&2 then complete the table
②Let the students read Paragraph 3 in groups of six and find out difficulties
③Solve difficulties
T Let’s listen and read the passage together
④Ask the students listen and read the passage together make sure they understand the passage
(1)Scan the passage and choose healthy food and drink for children (Activity3)
Skim the passage and match the main idea with each paragraph
Paragraph 1 Unhealthy food and drink for children
Paragraph 2 Healthy food and drink for children
Paragraph3 A healthy diet
①Read the passage of Paragraph 1&2 then complete the table
②Read Paragraph 3 in groups of six and find out difficulties
③Solve the difficulties together
④The students listen and read the passage together make sure understand it
求学生快速阅读短文选出healthy food and drink for children够巩固刚学食物句型
通学生略读阅读培养学生获取旨力进步学做铺垫
学生带着务（问题）阅读课文找答案助学生更加准确获取信息提高阅读效果技学生通分层次阅读文章获取具体信息知识点课文理解分段学突破组活动通学生间合作学学生充分实践运语言激发学生创造性思维发展
Step Four
Post
reading
(10’)
1 Retell (Activity4)
①Let the students fill
in the blanks according
to the table
②Call back the answers
from two students then
read the short passage in the whole class
2Speaking
Choose food from Unit 1 and 2 for your meals (breakfast lunch dinner)Now work in pairs Talk about your answers like this
①What’s your favourite food and drink
②Is it healthy food and drink Then ask some students to come to the blackboard and act
①Complete the passage with the correct form of the words and expression from the box
(Activity4)
Work in pairs Talk about their answers like this
①What’s your favourite food and drink
②Is it healthy food and drink Then some students to come to the blackboard and act
复述课文学生加深课文容理解
适量口头练学生巩固课时语言重点
Step Five
Summary（2’）
1Get the students to
sum up the language points
T What have we learned today
Ss…
2 Let the students to choose the best team in this lesson
1 Sum up the language points
2 To choose the best groups
引导学生节课总结学生做发言培养学生学总结良学惯
简短评价学生课堂表现肯定激励学生学兴趣树立学英语信心
Step Six
Home
work
（1’）
Write a passage to describe their a healthy diet
Finish the homework
课作业助学生巩固已学知识补充方面锻炼写作阅读拓展学生终完全掌握语言实践运语言
七板书设计：
Unit2 Is your food and drink healthy 组评价
T1 T2 T3
It’s good for…
It’s bad for…
It’s important to…
达标训练题
单项选择
（ ）1Meat and fish _______healthy food
A am B are C is
（ ）2The students are in good They like eating ______ food
A healthy health B healthy health C health healthy
（ ）3 is on the table
A Many apples B Much carrots C Much tea
（ ）4 My food is meat I often eat it
A boring B favourite C awful
（ ）5 Tony is a clever boy he doesn’t study hard
A So B but C or
二根汉语完成句子空词
1女孩喜欢喝乐
The little girl’s ______ _____ is _______
2——汤姆喜欢食物什？
——面条汉堡包
——_______Tom’s _________food
——They’re ______ and _____
3牛肉土豆健康食品
Beef and potatoes_______ ________ food
4果汁水牛奶健康食品乐健康食品
Juice water and milk ______ healthy drinks _______ cola________ a healthy drink
5——蔬菜？
——没牛奶
—— _____ we _____ ______vegetables
—— Yes we ______ ______ we _____ _____ _____ milk
Book 1 Module 4 Healthy food
三十五 教学容：Unit3 Language in use
三十六 课型：Revision and application
三十七 教学目标：
1 正确运模块词汇：healthy bread fish ice cream noodle rice eat child children be good for be bad for egg eye cheese soup well fat or breakfast every lunch home dinner banana等
2熟练运havehas got句型
3句子中正确some any
4正确区分数名词数名词正确数名词复数形式
5够运学知识发表食品法学间进行真实交际
三十八 教学重难点：
1够运学知识发表食品法
2够制作食品海报进行展示
三十九 教学准备：
节课型Revision and application根新课标求结合教材学生特点采务型互动式进行教学结合情景法交际法听说法纳法等教学方法实施课堂活动开启学生思维通系列条理教学活动引导学生探究学互动合作学学生体验愉快学节课需教具资料：幻灯图片调查表等
四十 教学程：
教学步骤
教 师 活 动
学 生 活 动
活 动 目
1 Leadingin
1 Play a word game Four Ss from each group come to the blackboard and write down the words of 4 kinds
Food drink vegetable fruit
See which one write the most words
2 Get the Ss to talk about what they have got in groups And write some key structures on the blackboard
1 Play a word game Four Ss from each group come to the blackboard and write down the words of 4 kinds as many as possible
Food drink vegetable fruit
2 Talk about what they have got in groups
eg A Have you got any fish
B No I haven’t I haven’t got any fish
C Has B got any fish
D No he hasn’t He hasn’t got any fish
Review and consolidate the food and drink
2 Whiletask
1 Let the students do Activity 1 and then check the answers
1 Do Activity 1 Work in pairs Look at the picture and talk about the food in the fridge
2 Write about the food in the fridge Then check the answers with the partners
Review and consolidate the vocabulary just learned in the first second units
2 Let the students finish (Activity4)
Students finish (Activity4)2
3 Posttask
1 Organization
1 Have a party about their weekend Then share with the class
1 Talk about healthy food and drink for children using the vocabulary just learned in the first second units
2 Ask the students to make a poster about a healthy breakfast
2 Make a poster about a healthy breakfast in groups
To practice the skill of writing
4 Summary
(1’)
Ask the students to conclude the usage of singular and plural nouns correctly
Students conclude the usage of singular and plural nouns correctly
Let the students internalize the grammar they’ve learned in this module
5 Homework（1’）
Write a passage to introduce your eating habits
板书设计
Module 4 Healthy food
Unit 3 Language in use
I haven’t got any fish potatoes
I have got some meat oranges
HeShe has some…
He She hasn’t any
达标训练题
单项选择
（ ）1There are many _______in the school
A boy B girl C students
（ ）2I have here
A two cups of tea B two cup of tea C two cups of teas
（ ）3Fish and milk my favourite food
A be B are C is
（ ）4 healthy we should eat less junk food
A To be B Are C Be
（ ）5 These want to have some ______ for lunch
A Americans fish B American fish C Americans fishs
二句型转换
1 There is a pen and two pencils in my pencilcase (划线部分提问)
__________ ________ your pencilcase
2 We have got some fruit (改般疑问句)
_______ you ______ _______ fruit
3They have got some eggs (改否定句)
They ______ ______ _______ eggs
4Have you got any oranges（做肯定回答）
_____ ______ ______
5 Betty’s mum hasn’t got any potatoes She’s got some meat (but连接两句子)
___________________________________________________
Book 1 Module 5 My School Day
教学容： Unit1 I love history
二 课型：Listening and speaking
三 教学目标：
1掌握节课单词：half past o’clock art geography history maths PE IT lesson like difficult love subject because interesting love
2听懂时间表达法分辨学校科目
3理解关a school day话
4介绍学校开设科目课时间
四 教学重难点：介绍学校开设科目课时间
五 教学准备：
课指导学生通听力获取信息培养学生听力技课堂采媒体手段辅助教学媒体课件挂钟模拟钟（意调整时间）
六 预求：
根音标学课新单词
七 教学程：
教学
步骤
教师活动
学生活动
设计意图
Step One
Warmingup (3’)
Lead in
1Free talk
（1）Review numbers
（2）Show a big clock to the students Ask What’s the time and get the Ss to learn how to say out the time
（1）Play a game Say out the following numbers quickly onetenfourteenfifteentwentytwenty—two thirty forty fifty
（2）Look at the clock
They may say
It’s one o’clock
It’s half past one
It’s ten past two
It’s ten to three
学表达时间做准备游戏激发学生兴趣然导出话题
复学学时间表达法引导学生学past to表达时间
Step Two
Pretask(5’)
Task1Check the new words
1 Show some pictures and things to get the students to say out the new words
2Organize the students to learn the key structures by asking What are our lessons today
1Look at the pictures and things to say out the new words history maths etc
2 Talk about the lessons
We have Chinese English maths…
We have Chinese at eight o’clock
We have English at…
引导学生谈实物ppt图片检查学生词汇掌握程度训练学生表达力通图片情景语境学单词句型做词离句
Step Three
Whiletask (20’)
Task2 Do activity 2
1 Give students some minutes to do activity 2 by themselves
2 Add biology politics
Task3listening
(1) Play the tape ask students to listen and answer the two questions
1 What lessons do they have on Monday
2 What subject is Betty good at
(2)Organize the students to check their answers
Task 3 Reading
(1) Organization
(2)Organize the students to read the conversation with the video
(3)Ask the Ss to work with their groups to read the conversation
(4) Have a competition Read the dialogue in groups and choose the best group
Task 4 Solve the language points
(1)Organize students to come to the blackboard and show out some difficult language points that they found
(2)Help the students to solve the difficult points
Task5 Retell the dialogue
(1)Ask students to complete the passage
（Activity 5）
（2）Ask two of the students to retell the dialogue
1 First learn by themselves then check the answer in the group
2 Think all the subjects in school that they study
(1) Listen to the tape and answer the two questions
1 What lessons do they have on Monday
2 What subject is Betty good at
(2)Check the answers
(1) Ss read the conversation in activity 3 and check the true sentences
(2)Student read the passage with the video Then work in groups to practice
Try to read the best in groups
(1) Students come to the blackboard to show out some language points the other students listen to them carefully and note
(2)solve the difficult points with the teacher’s help
(1)Students complete the passage
(2)Several students retell the dialogue the others listen
学生通学完成务培养学生学力熟悉学科目名称
训练学生听力扑捉话信息力
循序渐进培养学生听读力模仿力组赛激发学生竞争意识
组合作探究完成学务培养学生团结协作精神
培养学力
教师点拨补充语言点学生进步理解知识点
通复述话加深课文掌握时锻炼口语
Step Four
Posttask
(9’)
Task 6Do some speaking
Group work
Make a conversation
Talk about your lessons
1 What are your lessons today What lessons do we have today
2 Do you like maths
3 When is your maths lesson
4 I have art at eight o’clock
(2) Have the Ss to introduce their lesson a day
(3) Give some exercise on the screen
(1) Make dialogues in groups with the teacher’s help
(2) Introduce their lesson a day in groups
(3) Do the exercise and check the answers Other students correct the mistakes
通组活动进行话练助学生情境中进行交际提高学生英语语言综合运力
通题巩固节课学知识
Step Five
Summary（2’）
1Get the students to sum up the language points
T What have we learned today
Ss……
2Let the students to choose the best team in this lesson
1Sum up the language points
(1) time expressions
(2) at on in
(3) the simple present tense
2To choose the best groups
引导学生节课总结学生做发言培养学生学总结良学惯
简短评价学生课堂表现肯定激励学生学兴趣树立学英语信心
Step Six
Home
work
（1’）
Talk about your favourite school day
Talk about their favourite school day
分层作业材施教
板书
设计
Module 5 My School Day 组评价
Unit1 I love history
1 — What’s the time What time is it T1 T2 T3
— It’s … o’clock It’s half past …
2 — What day is it today
— It is …
3 — When is your … lesson
— I have … at …
4 — Do you like…
— Yes I like … No I don’t like
达标训练题
写出列时间表达法
1 700 ______________________ 2 930 _______________________
3 620 _______________________ 4 1110 ______________________
5 555 _______________________ 6 345 _______________________
二 根汉语提示完成句子
1 天午玲玲明节数学课
Lingling and Daming ____ __ ______ ______ this morning
2 历史课什时候？
_____ __ your history ______
3 午没英语
We _____ ____ English in the morning
4 — 天星期？ — 星期五
— _____ ____ is it today — It’s ______
5 八点钟语文
We have ________ at ______ _______
6 喜欢化学 喜欢数学
They ____ _________ but they _____ ____ _______
Module 5 My school day
四十 教学容：Unit 2 We start work at nine o’clock
四十二 课型：Reading and writing
四十三 教学目标：
1 掌握列单词短语： go to school weekday get up have breakfastlunchdinner start house work break go home evening watch do homework go to bed sleep
2 掌握灵活运列句子：
(1) I go to school on weekdays but not on Saturday and Sunday
(2)I get up at half past seven in the morning and then have breakfast
3读懂介绍学校生活文章
4and but联进两简单句
5够简单描写天学校生活
四十四 教学重难点：
1学会般现时态描述惯性惯性动作（重点）
2够般现时态描述惯性惯性动作（难点）
四十五 教学准备：
阅读活动设计中采填表回答问题简单复述等形式引导学生明白阅读目提高阅读兴趣训练阅读技巧培养学生阅读力节课需准备：PPT课件挂图录音机课堂练表格奖品
四十六 教学程：
教学
步骤
教师活动
学生活动
设计意图
Step One
Warmingup (3’)
Lead in
1 Daily work
Morning Report
2 Free talk
Ask What day is it today
What are your lessons today
What’s your favourite lesson
What time do you have Chinese Etc
1 One student give a Morning Report
2 Free talk
Talk about with the teacher
日常汇报形成学生良说英语惯训练口语
通谈话引入课话题
2
Step Two
Pre
reading
(5’)
Task Learn the new words
Show some pictures on the computer and get the Ss to talk about them to learn the new words
T What time do you get up
T What do you do then
Look at the pictures on the computer and talk about them to learn the new words
S I get up at half past six
S I wash my face and have breakfast Etc
引导学生谈图片训练学生描述物力描述时学新单词句型学生扫清阅读障碍
Step Three
While
reading (24’)
Step Three
While
reading (24’)
1 Ask students to read the passage quickly and put the pictures in order
2 Scanning
Ask students to match the times with the pictures in Activity 1
3 Skimming
Ask students to skim the passage and answer
How many lessons do they have every day
5 Careful reading
Task 1 Ask them to read the passage and finish Activity 3 Underline the correct expressions
Then check the answers by asking individual student
Task 2 Ask them to read carefully complete the table in groups
Task 3 Reading
(1) Organize the students to read the passage
(2)Ask the Ss to read in groups
(3) Have a competition Read the dialogue in groups and choose the best group
Task 4 Solve the language points
(1)Organize students to come to the front and show out some difficult language points that they found
(2)Help the students to solve the other difficult points which they didn’t mention
To teach to join the sentences with and then
Grammar Explain the simple past tense
1 Read the passage quickly and put the pictures in order
2 Scanning
Match the times with the pictures in Activity 1
3 Skimming
Read the passage and answer
How many lessons do they have every day
Read the passage and finish Activity 3
1 ）I get up start work at half past seven
2 ）We have a break have lunch at half past twelve
3 ）I go home watch TV in the evening
4 ）I do my homework see my friends in the evening
5 ）I go home go to sleep at ten o’clock
Read carefully complete the table in groups
What time
What to do
in the morning
730
830
go to school
start work
1100
in the afternoon and evening
1230
130
330
go home
go to bed
1 Watch the video and read with it then read the passage together
2 Work in groups to practice
3 Try to read the best
(1) Students come to the blackboard to show out some language points the other students listen to them carefully and note The phrases they may tell
have lunchhave ricedrink water go homewatch TVhave dinnerdo my homework
go to bedin the morning
in the afternoonin the evening
(2)Listen carefully to the teacher Take notes
训练听力课文整体感知
通scanningskimming培养学生阅读程中掌握浏览跳读等阅读技巧
通观录调动视觉听觉记忆力参语言活动
学生带着问题读文章学生质疑老师进行探讨诱发学生尝试动机培养学力
第二次阅读篇章旨学生掌握篇章细节信息通信息纳检查学生篇章初步理解程度
熟读课文容掌握课文单词词汇
培养合作精神
锻炼学生口头表达力胆量培养学力
教师点拨补充语言点学生进步理解知识点
Step Four
Post
reading
(10’)
1Retell
①Let the students fill
in the blanks according
to the picture and the
table
②Call back the answers
from some students then
read the short passage
in the whole class
2Speaking
Organize the students to share their school day in a group of four
2 Look at the picture
and the table to fill
in the blanks
I’m Alex Greenall I ____ ___ at half past seven ___ the morning I go to school at _____ ____ _____ and lessons _____ at nine o’clock We have _____ lessons in the morning I ____ __ _____ at eleven o’clock I don’t like ________ We have lunch at ____ _____ ______ Lessons start in the afternoon at _____ ___ _____ We have ____ lessons in the afternoon We ____ _____ at half past three I go to bed at _____ o’clock
Share your day in group of four
通课文容复述进步课文容语言点巩固语言点运落实篇章中运更具意义
话题继续延伸进步鼓励学生发挥想象力观动性实际相结合提出新观点新思路新方法
Step Five
Summary（2’）
1Get the students to
sum up the language points
T What have we learned today
Ss……
2Let the students to choose the best team in this lesson
1Sum up the language points
2To choose the best groups
引导学生节课总结学生做发言培养学生学总结良学惯
简短评价学生课堂表现肯定激励学生学兴趣树立学英语信心
Step Six
Home
work
（1’）
Write a passage to describe their best friendThey may begin like this
Hi I’m _____ I study in…
Finish the homework
课作业助学生巩固已学知识补充方面锻炼写作阅读拓展学生终完全掌握语言实践运语言
七板书设计：
Module 5 My School Day 组评价
Unit 2 We start work at nine o’clock T1 T2 T3
1 I get up at half past seven in the morning
and have breakfast
2 in the morning
in the afternoon
in the evening
3 I get up at seven o’clock and then go to
school at eight o’clock
达标训练题
单词适形式填空
1 She ____ (go) to bed at nine o’clock
2 You ________ (not go) home
3 She _______ (watch) TV in the evening
4 He gets up and ___ (have) breakfast
5 _______ (lesson) start at half past one in the afternoon
6 We do our __________ (homework) in the evening
二英汉词组互译
1 起床
2 课间休息
3 学
4 吃早饭
5 喝水
6 at half past ten
7 go to bed
8 go to the playground
9 have dinner
三 句型转换
1 I go to school at 830 (划线部分提问)
_____ __ you __ to school
2 She gets up at half past six (改否定句)
She ______ ___ up at half past six
3 In the morning we have a break We play football (and两句子连起)
In the morning we have a break ___ ____ _______
4 We start lessons at nine o’clock (改般疑问句)
___ you ____ ______ at nine o’clock
5 They do the housework in the evening (改否定句)
They _____ __ the housework in the evening
Module 5 My school day
四十七 教学容：Unit3 Language in use
四十八 课型：Revision and application
四十九 教学目标：
1掌握运模块单词短语
2运实义动词（语I they you we）般现时肯定句否定句般疑问句特殊疑问句
3运介词atinon表示时间
4伴谈理想中学校生活
五十 教学重难点：
运学知识谈理想学校生活
五教学准备：
节课型Revision and application根新课标求结合教材学生特点采务型互动式进行教学结合情景法交际法听说法纳法等教学方法实施课堂活动开启学生思维通系列条理教学活动引导学生探究学互动合作学学生体验愉快学节课需教具资料：幻灯图片调查表等
六 教学程：
教学步骤
教 师 活 动
学 生 活 动
活 动 目
1 Leadin
1Play a game Simon Says T Simon says get up then do the action
2 Duty report
1Play a game Simon Says
2 Listen to a morning report One student come to the front to give a lecture
游戏枯燥乏味词组操练融入游戏乐趣复旧知识时提高学生反应力
2 Whiletask(17’)
1 Give three verbs on the blackboard (have do go) get the Ss to write as many phrases as they can
2 Get the Ss to make sentences with the (have do go) phrases and write some important sentences on the blackboard
3 Organize the Ss to do Activity 4and 5 Then Activity 3
5 Around the world
Say In China we start class usually at 800 in the morning and we finish class usually at 600 in the evening What about the children in UK Read and find the answer quickly
Organize them to read the short passage together once
6English Grammar for this module Ask some students to summary the key sentences
Teach the Simple Present Tense by using ppt
1 Write as many phrases as they can using have do go
eg have lessons have a break have breakfast etc
2 Make sentences with the (have do go) phrases
eg We have lessons on Monday
I have breakfast at half past six
3 Finish the exercises in Activity 4 5 3
5 Read and find the answer
What time do the children in UK begin classes and finish school
Answer in pairs
Read the short passage together once
6 Summary the language points which they learnt in Module 5
Grammar
I talk to my friends
You have dinner in the evening
We have art and history
They don’t start at eight o’clock
Learn the Simple Present Tense and take notes
词短语句子引导学生复 知识
通游戏活跃课堂气氛通学生造句赛掌握单元短语够课外延伸时训练学生发散思维创新意识
汇总介词at in on 法重点掌握
at 时刻前
in 表示午午晚on 表示某天某天午午晚
通短文解国家学生学情况通综合问题针性训练学生阅读概括力
通声朗读学生进步熟悉短文
通学生查找资料复单元知识纳单元涉般现时句型学会学
3 Posttask
(19’)
Work in pairs Ask them to imagine their ideal school day (Activity7)
Talk about their ideal school day in a group of three Choose their favorite one to share with the whole class
学生通单元学获语言储备语言输出做铺垫进步巩固学容
4 Summary
(1’)
Ask the students to conclude the structure of
the Simple Present Tense
Students conclude the structure of the simple the Simple Present Tense
学会纳总结学知识
5 Homework（1’）
1 Write a passage called My ideal school day
板书设计
Module 5 My school day
Unit 3 Language in use
I go to the park on Sunday
I don’ t go to school
达标训练题
选择正确介词 (at in on) 完成面句子
1 We have history __ the afternoon
2 I go to school __ half past seven
3 Do you have a piano lesson __ Saturday
4 They do their homework __ ten o’clock
5 What time do you go to school __ the morning
6 The children have computer lessons __ four o’clock __ Fridays
二 单项选择题
1 Jenny ____ in an office Her parents ____in a hospital
A work works B works work C work are working D is working work
2 One of the boys_____ a black hat
A have B there is C there are D has
3 We will go shopping if it____ tomorrow
A don＇t rain Bdidn＇t rain Cdoesn＇t rain Disn＇t rain
4 He said the sun ____in the east and ____in the west
A rose set B rises sets C rises set D rise sets
5 Wang Mei ____ music and often ____ to music
A like listen B likes listens C like are listening D liking
listen
6 Jenny____ English every evening
A has study B studies C study D studied
Book1 Module 6 A trip to the zoo
教学容：Unit 1 Does it eat meat
二课型：Listening and speaking
三教学目标：
语言目标
(1)To help students master the words ： elephant giraffe kangaroo lion monkey panda polar bear tiger wolf zebra bamboothere such as leafleaves dangerous
(2)To help students master the sentences：
①Does it eat meat
Yes it does
No it doesn’t
力目标
(1) To understand and get more detailed information about animals from
listening and reading
(2) To ask and answer questions about the habitat and the food of different animals
(3) To talk about their favourite animal
情感目标
Students can love and protect animals from learning
四教学重难点：
重点：
(1)重点句型：般现时（语第三称单数）般疑问句肯定否定形式
(2)重点话题：
Talk about one’s favourite animal
难点：
(1)掌握般现时（语第三称单数）般疑问句肯定否定形式
(2) 恰道英语问答关动物问题介绍喜爱动物
五教学准备：
次课堂听说课采互动式教学法创设真实语境通呈现伴互动组活动等师生生生交流充分体现学生学程中体位教师课堂引导者组织者合作者学生中学会英语综合培养学生英语语言运力教学程中采媒体手段辅助教学利种图片题务贯穿整教学程节课需准备：PPT课件录音机课堂练奖品
六教学程：
教学
步骤
教师活动
学生活动
设计意图
Step One
Warmingup (6’)
)
Activity 1 Greet the students as usual
T T HelloclassNice to meet you
Ss Nice to meet you too
T What’s the weather like today
Ss It’s…
T The weather will be … this weekend (too)
I’m going to the park
Where are you going
Ss …
T Tony and Lingling are having a trip to
the zoo Ok Today we are going to learn Module 6 A trip to the zoo This is Beijing Zoo(show a short film about Beijing Zoo)
T What can you see from the film
S…
Activity 2 New words study
T Now let’s see What kinds of animals in Beijing Zoo
Guessing game
(1)monkey
T The animal likes to eat bananas What is it
(2)elephant
T The animal has a long nose and two big ears
(3)tiger
T It’s the king of forest
2 Show pictures to learn new words
(1) panda (2) giraffe (3) kangaroo Australia (4) polar bear Arctic (5)zebra (6)wolf Europe (7) camel
3 Repeat after the little teacher
4 Read by Ss together
5 Read the new words together
(1) Greet the teacher
(2) Talk
something about the short film
(1) Guess the animals
(2)Read after the little teacher
(3)Read the new words together
(4)Check the exercise in groups
创设话情景提问方式提问学生引入话题关北京动物园短片学生更直观感知课容导入课新单词学
通游戏Guessing
game检查学生词汇掌握程度训练学生表达力通图片情景学单词做词离句组竞赛完成练活跃课堂气氛巩固新词
Step Two
Listeningand reading (8’)
Activity 3 Listening
(1)T Now Tony and Lingling are in Beijing ZooWould you like to know more about them Let’s listen to the tape and listen what they are talking
(2)Organize the students to check their answers
Activity 4 Reading
(1) Organize the students to read the conversation with the video
(2)Ask the Ss to work with their groups to read the conversation
(3) Have a competition Read the dialogue in groups and choose the best group
(1) Students close the book listen to the conversation and fill in the blanks
(2)Check the answers in groups
(1)Read the conversation with the video
(2) Read the conversation in groups
(3) Read the dialogue in groups and choose the best group
利听读练方式加强学生课文理解培养学生细节听力技巧够听取信息训练培养学生细节听力技巧
通视频听读话帮助学生进步理解课文容
组活动通学生间合作学学生充分实践运语言培养团结合作精神
Step
Three
Afterlistening practice (10’)
Activity 5 Solve the language points
(1)Organize students to come to the blackboard and show out some difficult language points that they found
(2)Help the students to solve the difficult points
Activity6 Retell the dialogue
(1)Ask students to complete the passage
（Activity 5）
（2）Ask two of the students to retell the dialogue
(1) Students come to the blackboard to show out some language points the other students listen to them carefully and note
(2)solve the
difficult points with the teacher’s help
(1)Students complete the passage
(2)Two students retell the dialogue the others listen
通学生台展示找语言点培养学生胆量培养学力
教师点拨补充语言点学生进步理解知识点
通复述话加深课文掌握时锻炼口语
StepFive
Speaking （15’）
Activity7 Summary and pair work
T Today we have learned something about animals NowLet’s work in pairs Ask and answer
The teacher asks some pairs to show in front of the whole class
Activity 8 Role plays
Free talk Work in pairs and make up a similar dialogue Let’s go to the zoo
1) A what’s your favourite animal
B My favourite animal is…
2) A Does it eat plants
BYes it does No it doesn’t
3) A Does it come from China
B Yes it doesNo it doesn’t
4) A Is it the panda
B
Practice this dialogue with their partners
Teacher asks some pairs to show in front of the class
（1）Work in groups of six students and make role plays Imaging they are in the zoo
(2)Then some groups show in front of the class
通做话训练学生说力学生加深课文容理解适量口头练学生巩固课时语言重点
话题课文知识实际生活延伸体现语言语原充分激发学生思维情感踊跃发言
Step Six
Home
work
（1’）
Activity 9Homework
1 Listen to the tape and read after it three times
2 Finish the exercises of Unit 1
3 Preview the second unit
Finish
the homework
课作业助学生巩固已学知识补充方面锻炼
板书
设计
Module6 A trip to the zoo
Unit 1 Does it eat meat
1) Does it eat meat
Yes it does No it doesn’t
2) Shall we…
Yes let’s… No …
3) There be…
Be there…
Yes there isare No there isn’taren’t
达标训练题（满分100分）
单项选择 （50分）
( ) 1 Welcome ______Beijing
A at B in C to D on
( ) 2 The ______ don’t like eating meat
A wolf B panda C monkeys D wolves
( ) 3 —The polar bear_________tne Aratic
A comes from B come from C are from D from
( ) 4 —________the tiger_______grass
A Does eats B Does eats C Does eat D Do eat
( ) 5 Where are the children
Look _________
A there are they B there they are C here are they D are they here
二根汉语完成句子 （50分）
1 欢迎北京动物园里
________ __ Beijing Zoo
2 天接万六千
______ ________ _____ visit it every day
3 袋鼠澳利亚
The kangaroo _______ ____ Australia
4老虎吧
_____ ___ and ___ a tiger
5 熊猫喜欢动物
The panda is ___ ________ ______
Module6 A trip to the zoo
九 教学容：Unit2 The tiger lives in Asia
十 课型：Reading and writing
十 教学目标：
1掌握节课单词词组：little a little only about kilo people as well as grass large usually alone be good at strong catch even all kinds of
2读懂介绍动物篇章找出文中相关细节信息
3学知识描写喜欢动物
4正确写字母
十二 教学重难点：
1够理解介绍动物篇章
2学知识描写喜欢动物
十三 教学准备：
课堂整体运务型教学模式阅读课四阶段教学模式课指导学生通阅读获取信息培养学生阅读技教学程中采媒体手段辅助教学利种图片题务贯穿整教学程节课需准备：PPT课件挂图录音机课堂练表格奖品
十四 预求：
根音标学课新单词
十五 教学程：
教学
步骤
教师活动
学生活动
设计意图
Step One
Warmingup (5’)
Step Two
Pre
reading
(5’)
1Lead in
Guess the animal in each picture and then tell us where it comes from
Eg
(1)It’s the king of the forest
It lives in ____
(2)It’s small and cute
It likes eating bananas and peaches
It lives in ____
2．（1）Find these place on the map
Africa America Asia Europe
（2）Look at the map again and write four sentences Use the words from the box
Eg：
There are tigers in Asia
There are elephants in…
Look at a picture and guess the animal in each picture and then tell us where it comes from
（1）Find these place on the map
（2）Look at the map again and write four sentences Use the words from the box
Eg：
There are tigers in Asia
There are elephants in…
猜图游戏：图片根提示回答图中说种动物说说该动物里生长时学生图找出方引导学生回顾节课容引入课相关容
通环节激发学生学兴趣活跃课堂气氛通图片学生进步解相关容学生扫清阅读障碍
Step Three
While
reading (18’)
1 Scanning
Scanning the passage and answer the questions
(1) How many animals are mentioned(提) in the passage
(2) What are they
2 Skimming
Ask students to skim the passage and complete the table(Activity 3)
3Careful reading
(1)Paragraph 1
①Read Paragraph 1 and then fill in the blanks
②Organize some students to come to the blackboard and show out some difficult language points that they found in these paragraphs
(2)Paragraph 23
①Read Paragraph 23 and then choose the right answers
②Organize some students to come to the blackboard and show out some difficult language points that they found in these paragraphs
(3)Read paragraph45
①Read paragraph 45 and answer the questions
②Organize some students to come to the blackboard and show out some difficult language points that they found in these paragraphs
1 Scanning the passage and answer the questions
(1) How many animals are mentioned(提) in the passage
(2) What are they
2Skim the passage and and complete the table (Activity 3)
①Read Paragraph 1 and then fill in the blanks
②Some students come to the blackboard and show out some difficult language points that they found in these paragraphs
①Read Paragraph 23 and then choose the right answers
②Some students come to the blackboard and show out some difficult language points that they found in these paragraphs
①Read paragraph 45 and answer the questions
②Organize some students to come to the blackboard and show out some difficult language points that they found in these paragraphs
求学生快速阅文章完成相关务帮助学生理解课文容
通学生快速阅读培养学生获取旨力进步理解文章容 进步学做铺垫
学生带着务（问题）阅读课文找答案助学生更加准确获取信息提高阅读效果技学生通分层次阅读文章获取具体信息知识点课文理解分段学突破
Step Four
Post
reading
(10’)
1 Writing（Activity 5）
①How much do you know
about the animals
②Correct the mistakes
③Ask some students to say out their answers
①How much do you know
about the animals
②Correct the mistakes
③Ask some students to say out their answers
通完成课练加强刚学课文容巩固时学写字母句号法
Step Five
Summary（1’）
1Get the students to
sum up the language points
T What have we learned today
Ss……
2 Let the students to choose the best team in this lesson
1Sum up the language points
2To choose the best groups
引导学生节课总结学生做发言培养学生学总结良学惯
简短评价学生课堂表现肯定激励学生学兴趣树立学英语信心
Step Six
Home
work
（1’）
Write something about your favourite animal (3050字)
my favourite animal there be come from live in eat sth like sth doesn’t like sth
Finish the homework and review the new words and expressions
课作业助学生巩固已学知识写作阅读拓展学生终掌握语言实践运语言
十六
十七 八
十八 板书设计：
Module6 A trip to the zoo Unit2 The tiger lives in Asia
My favourite animal there be come from live in eat sth
like sth doesn’t like sth
组评价
T1 T2 T3
达标训练题
三完形填空（题15分满分15分）
There is a zoo in our city My parents often take me there on the 26 I like animals I have a lot of 27 animals in my room In the 28 I can see tigers elephants bears monkeys pandas snakes and many other 29 Some animals are friendly but some are not Tigers bears and some snakes are 30 That is why they have to stay in 31 But I do not think it is good for animals to stay in cages They should be free The animals in cages can’t be 32
I think the most interesting animals in the zoo are the dolphins I like 33 them swim and jump They swim so fast and jump so high They can play with a ball They can stand up and walk 34 water They are very 35 to people If you fall into the water and can’t swim they may come to help you
26 A summer B month
C autumn D weekend
27 A real B funny
C toy D your
28 A zoo B park
C bank D library
29 A tigers B people
C friends D animals
30 A dangerous B safe
C interesting D ugly
31 A houses B buildings
C cages D ponds（池塘）
32 A angry B happy
C sad D strong
33 A looking B seeing
C watching D noticing
34 A in B at
C with D on
35 A friendly B rude
C warm D cold
Book 1 Module 6 A trip to the zoo
五十 教学容：Unit3 Language in use
五十二 课型：Revision and application
五十三 教学目标：
i 语言知识目标：
①正确运般现时单数第三称肯定句否定句般疑问句回答
②正确运模块词汇：bear elephant giraffe lion monkey panda tiger zebra zoo animal come from dangerous bamboo cute which over there funny Africa Asia Europe little a little kilo people all over the world African as well as grass be good at strong many kinds of等
2语言技目标：
①运般现时询问回答关动物话学间进行真实交际
②般现时学展示介绍动物作品
3情感态度目标：
通学种表示动物词汇提高英语兴趣英语学积极性
五十四 教学重难点：
够般现时学展示介绍动物作品
五十五 教学准备：
节课型Revision and application根新课标求结合教材学生特点采务型互动式进行教学结合情景法交际法听说法纳法等教学方法实施课堂活动开启学生思维通系列条理教学活动引导学生探究学互动合作学学生体验愉快学节课需教具资料：幻灯图片调查表等
五十六 教学程：
教学步骤
教 师 活 动
学 生 活 动
活 动 目
1 Leadingin
（7’）
1 Show the pictures and ask the students to make dialogues about what they are
2 Give instructions of guessing game
1The students act out the dialogues in pairs about what they are with the pictures
2 Play a guessing game asking their partners some questions in order to guess which places they traveled eg Do you like animals Where are they from
Review and consolidate how to use do and does
2 Whiletask(17’)
1 Let the students do Activities 24 and then check the answers
1 Do Activities 24 Then check the answers with the partners
Review and consolidate the vocabulary just learned in the first two units
2 Ask the students to translate around the world into Chinese
2 The students will be given five minutes to translate around the world into Chinese
To learn about the foreign culture
5 Ask the students to make a poster of their favorite animal
3 They will have a match for writing and drawing on the blackboard (See which group can do the best of the four groups)
4 Two students will review the poster on the blackboard And see which group will do the best
5 The students make a poster of their favorite animal and get ready to interview their best friend
To practice talking about their favorite animal
3 Posttask
(19’)
1 Organization
2 Organization
1Students interview their best friends about their favorite animal using the poster in the above and writing down their best friends’ information
2Make a report about their best friends’ favorite animal Then share with the class
1To practice the skill of speaking
2 Enable students to talk about their favorite animal using the Simple Present Tense
3 Ask the students to write about some dangerous animals
4 Organization
3 Write an email to the best friends about some dangerous animals
4 Some students share their emails with the class See who writers the best
To practice the skill of writing
4 Summary
(1’)
Ask the students to conclude the usage of the simple present regular verbs
Students conclude the usage of the simple present regular verbs
Let the students internalize the grammar they’ve learned in this module
5 Homework（1’）
Write about your favourite animal
板书设计
Module 6 A trip to the zoo
Unit 3 Language in use
It doesn’t eat meat Does it eat meat
Yes it is No it doesn’t
The tiger lives in Asia
达标训练题
单项选择
（ ）1 Here ___your magazines
A am B is C are D be
（ ）2 The elephant comes from ______It’s _______
A American America B Africa Africa
C Australian Australia D India Indian
（ ）3 —Can you speak English Mr Wang
—Yes but only____
A little B a little C a lot D a few
（ ）4 Tom is ______Chinese
A good at B good for C good to D well at
（ ）5 My pen pal lives _______England
A on B in C at D
（ ）6 —Where ______the camel come ________
— Asia
A does from B do from C does of D do of
（ ）7 Where does Lily _______
A come from B be from C is from D from
Book 1 Module7 Computers
五十七 教学容：Unit 1 How do I write my homework on the computer
五十八 课型：Listening and speaking
五十九 教学目标：
1掌握单元词汇短语：connect turn turn on learn use save box finally paper print
2听懂电脑操作相关连续指令 听力材料中辨认电脑相关信息
3掌握行动词般现时特殊疑问句回答
4简单描述介绍电脑相关操作
六十 教学重难点：
1听懂电脑操作相关连续指令
2掌握行动词般现时特殊疑问句回答 运般现时询问做某事什方做某事等
五教学准备：
课指导学生通听力获取信息培养学生听力技课堂采媒体手段辅助教学轻松愉快氛围中较真实语境联系学生生活实际结合已知识验运学语言基础知识学互相学学生语言实践中相互启发生成体验成功培养学生合作精神发展思维想象等力教学程中采媒体手段辅助教学利种图片题务贯穿整教学程节课需准备：PPT课件挂图录音机课堂练表格奖品
六十 预求：
根音标学课新单词
六十二 教学程：
教学
步骤
教师活动
学生活动
设计意图
Step One
Warmingup (3’)
Lead in
1Free talk
(1)Show some pictures and ask Ss like these
What is this
Do you often use a computer
What do you often do on the computer
(2)Show more pictures and let Ss talk about them try to use the sentences with What how where when
(1)Answer the questions and discuss the questions in group
(2)Talk with partners and try to use the sentences withWhat how where when
学生free talk程中感受新语言项目通环节活跃课堂气氛调动学生学兴趣
Step Two
Pretask(5’)
Task1Check the new words
1 Show some pictures and things to get the students to say out the new words
2Organize the students to read the new words together
3Ask the Ss to describe the picture and try to use the words in the box(Activity 1)
1Look at the pictures and things to say out the new words
2 Read the new words together
3 To describe the picture and try to use the words in the box(Activity 1)
引导学生谈实物ppt图片检查学生词汇掌握程度训练学生表达力通图片情景学单词做词离句Check完词汇时做Activity 1进行巩固
Step Three
Whiletask (20’)
Task2listening
(1) Play the tape ask students to listen and number the words as the students hear them (Activity)
(2)Ask the students to label the parts of the computer according to the computer in the classroom (Activity 2)
(3)Ask one student to connedct the screen to the computer
T Do you know how to do before you use the computer Let’s do it together (Activity3)
(4)Organize the students to check their answers
Task 3 Reading
(1) Organize the students to read the conversation with the video
(2)Ask the Ss to work with their groups to read the conversation
(3) Have a competition Read the dialogue in groups and choose the best group
Task 4 Solve the language points
(1)Organize students to come to the blackboard and show out some difficult language points that they found
(2)Help the students to solve the difficult points
Task5 Retell the dialogue
(1)Ask students to complete the passage
（Activity 5）
(2)Ask two of the students to retell the dialogue
(1) Listen to the tape and number the words (Activity 1)
(2)label the parts of the computer(Activity 2)
(3)The other students fill in the blank (Activity3)
(4)Check the answers
(1)Read the conversation with the video
(2) Read the conversation in groups
(3) Read the dialogue in groups and choose the best group
(1) Students come to the blackboard to show out some language points the other students listen carefully them carefully and note
(2)solve the difficult points with the teacher’s help
(1)Students complete the passage
(2)Two students retell the dialogue the others listen
利听读练方式加强学生课文理解培养学生细节听力技巧够听取信息训练培养学生细节听力技巧
通视频听读话帮助学生进步理解课文容
组活动通学生间合作学学生充分实践运语言培养团结合作精神
通学生台展示找语言点培养学生胆量培养学力
教师点拨补充语言点学生进步理解知识点
通复述话加深课文掌握时锻炼口语
Step Four
Posttask
(9’)
Task 6Do some speaking
(1)Ask students talk about what your school will be like in ten years
A We will study at home and only go to school for sports and games
B Well this is good but I’ll miss my teachers and friends
(2) Have the Ss act out their new dialogues
(3)Ask students to do some
Exercises and then check
(1) Make dialogues in groups with the teacher’s help
(2) Act out the new dialogues
(3)Do the exercises then check
通做话训练学生说力学生加深课文容理解适量口头练学生巩固课时语言重点
通笔头练进步巩固学
Step Five
Summary（2’）
1Get the students to sum up the language points
T What have we learned today
Ss……
2Let the students to choose the best team in this lesson
1Sum up the language points
2To choose the best groups
引导学生节课总结学生做发言培养学生学总结良学惯
简短评价学生课堂表现肯定激励学生学兴趣树立学英语信心
Step Six
Home
work
（1’）
Make dialogues with partners to talk about how to write homework on the computer
Finish the homework
课作业助学生巩固已学知识补充方面锻炼
板书
设计
Module7 Computers 组评价
六十三 Unit1 How do I write my homework on the computer T1 T2 T3
First next then finally…
I usually sometimes don’t usually…
What…
Where…
How often…
达标训练题
单词填空
1 ________(首先) I want you to help me do it
2 What are we going to do ________(次)
3 ________(然) you can find your way
4 ________() I want to say Thank you to all of you
二根汉语完成句子空词
1电脑显示器？
What’s wrong with my______ ________
2 写家庭作业？
______ _______ he _________ his homework
3电脑？
_______ I _______ your computer
4需开新文件
You need to ______ _________ _________ ________
Book 1 Module7 Computers
六十四 教学容：Unit2 When do you use a computer
六十五 课型：Reading and writing
六十六 教学目标：
1够正确列单词词组： share Australia company customerInternet check plan ticket movie search for information send cinema visit
2够读懂介绍电脑情况短文
3够正确特殊疑问词when how等
4通阅读电脑情况正确认识合理电脑网络
六十七 教学重难点：
1够读懂介绍电脑情况三篇短文阅读中找出作者相关细节信息完成务（重点）
2够正确特殊疑问词（难点）
六十八 教学准备：
课堂整体运务型教学模式阅读课四阶段教学模式课指导学生通阅读获取信息培养学生阅读技教学程中采媒体手段辅助教学利种图片题务贯穿整教学程节课需准备：PPT课件挂图录音机课堂练表格奖品
六十九 教学程：
教学
步骤
教师活动
学生活动
设计意图
Step One
Warmingup (3’)
1Lead in
Play a piece of music and then have a conversation with the students
What’s this
We often use the computer to …
How do you write your homework on the computer
2．See and say
Ask some students to present some ways of using the computer Ask other students to say out the sentences Use the sentences like this What are they doing Do you often …
1Say the sentences
like this It is a computerWe often use the computer to…
2See the action and say
sentence like this He is downloading the music…
I often…
先引导学生回顾节课容巩固学电脑词句表达
通环节活跃课堂气氛说句子中考验学生Unit1知识掌握程度训练学生反应形中培养学生胆说英语惯
Step Two
Prereading
(5’)
Show the students some pictures about using the computer and lead the students to describe what they are doing Also present new words and teach them
egshareAustraliacompany customer Internet …
learn some new words and try to describe them like this I share my computer with my brother
引导学生谈图片描述时学新单词句型学生扫清阅读障碍
Step Three
While
reading (20’)
1 Scanning
Ask students to scan the passages
T What are the passages talking about
2 Careful reading
①Ask students to skim the passages
T Jack Alice and like using the computer Find out Who can use the computer on Sundays
Who often share the computer with his father
Who has a friend in Australia
②T Let’s read again and tell true or false
Ask a student to be a little teacher to check the answers
③Let some team students read the paragraphs and the other students listen carefully to point out important points
④Solve difficulties
3Ask the students
read the letter
T Let’s read the letter together Make sure they
understand the letter
Scan the passage and answer the question
①Read the passages and answer the questions
②Write T or F after reading
1 Jack’s father uses the computer every Friday night
( )
2 Alice checks emails at home ( )
3Mike likes playing computer games ( )
4 Mike and his parents use their home computer ( )
A student acts a little teacher to check the answers Others try their best to answer the questions
③Read Paragraph A&B in groups of six and find out difficulties
④To say the difficulties and solve the difficulties together
The students read the
letter together ang make sure to
understand the passage
通学生快速阅读培养学生获取旨力
学生带着务（问题）阅读课文找答案助学生更加准确获取信息提高阅读效果技学生通分层次阅读文章获取具体信息知识点课文理解分段学突破组活动通学生间合作学学生充分实践运语言激发学生创造性思维发展
Step Four
Postreading
(10’)
1 Let the students do Activity 3
2 Let the students do Activity4
3 Retell
①Let the students fill
in the blanks according
to the picture and the
table
②Call back the answers
from two students then
read the short passage
in the whole class
2Make a survey
Ask the students to make a survey in group Then ask teams to report
When do you use a computer…How do you …
Match the words and expressions in ColumnA with those in Column B
Complete the passage with the correct form of the words from the box
Look at the picture and the table to fill in the blanks
Jack has a _______ at home His father and he _____it His father is a ______ of a coes on the ______ to ______ the times Jack _____ or _______ on the computer every Friday night Alice can use the computer ____ She ____ information fo her ____and check her email She talk to her ______ on the Internet Mike’s ______ don’t use computer He use it on ____ He ________ to his friends and play computer ______ But _______ he plays a lot of games and ________ doesn’t like it
2 Make a servey and report
I often use a computer I …on the computer…
完成活动3活动4面复述课文作铺垫
复述环节学生加深课文容理解
适量口头练学生巩固课时语言重点
Step Five
Summary（2’）
1Get the students to
sum up the language points
T What have we learned today
Ss……
2Let the students to choose the best team in this lesson
1Sum up the language points
2To choose the best groups
引导学生节课总结学生做发言培养学生学总结良学惯
简短评价学生课堂表现肯定激励学生学兴趣树立学英语信心
Step Six
Homework
（1’）
Write a passage to talk about when and how you use a computer
Finish the homework
课作业助学生巩固已学知识补充方面锻炼写作阅读拓展学生终完全掌握语言实践运语言
板书设计
Module4 Module7 Computers 组评价
七十 Unit2 When do you use a computer
share a computer T1 T2 T3
go on the Internet
talk to customers
watch movies
work for a company
…
达标训练题
单项选择
（ ）1 _______the radiol I d like to listen to the weather report over it
ATurn off B Turn on C Turn out D Turn down
（ ）2 do you write emails to your parents
Once a week
A How often B How long C How soon D Where
（ ）3 Jack usually his homework after dinner
A writes B do C take D buys
（ ）4 I have got to tell you
A two piece of information B two piece of informations
C two pieces of information D two piece of informations
（ ）5 What do on the weekend
A usually he does B does he usually
C does usually he D he usually does
二．求完成句子
1 He helps you to buy tickets(变否定句)
2 She likes listening to the music (变般疑问句做否定回答)
3 You can write the name on the box (划线部分提问)
4 My sister goes to school by bus (划线部分提问)
5 Lily gets up at six (划线部分提问)
Book 1 Module 7 Computer
七十 教学容：Unit3 Language in use
七十二 课型：Revision and application
七十三 教学目标：
1 正确运模块词汇
2 运特殊疑问句询问做某事步骤细节
3 会描述做某事步骤 学间进行真实交际
4简单表示计算机途
七十四 教学重难点：
运特殊疑问句询问做某事步骤细节描述做某事步骤 学间进行真实交际
七十五 教学准备：
节课型Revision and application根新课标求结合教材学生特点采务型互动式进行教学结合情景法交际法听说法纳法等教学方法实施课堂活动开启学生思维通系列条理教学活动引导学生探究学互动合作学学生体验愉快学节课需教具资料：幻灯图片调查表等
七十六 教学程：
教学步骤
教 师 活 动
学 生 活 动
活 动 目
1 Leadingin
（7’）
Show the pictures and ask the students to make dialogues about how to write homework on a computer
1The students act out the dialogues in pairs about how to write homework on a computer with the pictures
复巩固电脑写作业步骤前面两模块学单词描述件事情进程
2 Whiletask(17’)
1 Let the students do Activity 1 and then check the answers
2 Let the students do Activity 2 and then check the answers
3 Organization
4 Organization
5 Let the students do Activity 3 and then check the answers
6Ask the students to write questions with the words in the form
1Match the questions with the answers Then check the answers with the partners
2Complete the conversations
3 They will have a match for writing on the blackboard (See which group can write the most correct sentences of the four groups)
4 Two students will collect the sentences on the blackboard And see which group will do the best
5Complete the sentences with the correct form of the words in brackets
6The students write questions and get ready to interview their best friend
复巩固特殊疑问句法掌握行动词般现时特殊疑问句回答 运般现时询问做某事什方做某事等
Questions
answers
Where use a computer
Who go on the Internet
What do on the computer
When go online
How open a document
…
3 Posttask
(19’)
1 Organization
2 Organization
1Students interview their best friends about using a computer They use the questions in the form above and write down their best friends’ information
2 Make a report about their best friends’ answers using the information in the form Then share with the class
通组进行采访汇报形式操练口头表达力学生学会灵活掌握行动词般现时中特殊疑问句回答
3 Ask the students to write about their using a computer with first next then finally…
4 Organization
3Write an email to the best friends about their using a computer withfirst next then finally…
4 Some students share their emails with the class
通写作方式学描述件事情进程步骤熟练展示出 真实运日常交际中
4 Summary
(1’)
1Get the students to sum up the language points
T What have we learned today
Ss……
2Let the students to choose the best team in this lesson
1Sum up the language points
2To choose the best groups
引导学生节课总结学生做发言培养学生学总结良学惯
简短评价学生课堂表现肯定激励学生学兴趣树立学英语信心
5Homework（1’）
Write an email to your best friend about their using a computer with first next then finally…
板书设计
Module 7 Computer
Unit 3 Language in use 组评价
First next then finally… T1 T2 T3
I usually sometimes don’t usually…
What…
Where…
How often…
达标训练题
． 求改写句子
1 Tom sends three emails to his teacher(划线部分提问)
2 Jim plays games on his computer (变否定句)
3Lucy usually buys a ticket on the Internet (划线部分提问)
4Mr Wang uses his computer in the evening (划线部分提问)
5She often does her homework on the computer (变般疑问句)
二．求完成句子
1常网搜索信息
I often ________ _______ ________ on the Internet
2通常样制定旅游计划
How do you usually _______ _________ _________
3请开电脑
Please ___________ __________ the computer
4没时间买票
I haven’t got any time to _______ ___________
Book 1 Module8 Choosing presents
学情分析
单元教学象初学生学英语热情积极性较高思维活跃爱表现爱活动通半学期学教师指导动参活动合作探究相部分学生英语表达意愿节课容学生非常熟悉实际生活密切相关较感兴趣教学中设计量活动针层次学生学安排选择难易活动题目更机会说英语增强学信心完成课学务时学生胆发表见解强烈英语表达力发挥特长
教材分析
模块话题生日学生较感兴趣话题生日说十分重生日仅种行反映出定文化特点模块第单元邀请朋友参加生日聚会容涉中国孩子外国孩子生日学生解国外生日文化较中西方生日文化培养提高学生跨文化交际意识第二单元题挑选生日礼物课文介绍爱教师教学中纳总结表达喜设计学组织次生日聚会活动帮助学生运表达方式仅增进学生相互间情感交流培养良学关系时生日活动程中引导学生避免浪费注意健康良惯
模块教学目标
（）语言知识目标
1功：Would you like to…发出邀请
2语法：掌握频度副词正确运动词第三称单数形式掌握形容词性物代词法
3词汇：card party present would always great cake never cut give sing happy choose wear shoe spend money film song usually sometimes often ect
4语音：k g θ ð ʃ ʒ
（二）语言技目标
1听：识 Would you like to … 句型发出邀请听懂关生日简单描述
2说：Would you like to …句型发出邀请询问方生日
3读：读懂关生日庆祝短文识爱
4写：正确般现时介绍爱
5演示表达：描述家朋友喜欢特点挑选生日礼物
（三）学策略
1学策略：注意学生活中关生日礼物简单英语
2合作学策略：关心生日情况喜惯
3：学生活相结合
（四）文化意识
解国家赠送生日礼物时风俗惯
（五）情感态度
培养乐交友乐合作健康品格
（六）务
学设计场生日聚会
Unit 1 I always like birthday parties
教 材
英语（新标准）七年级册
课时
1课时
教 学 设 计
课 型
Listening and speaking
教学目标
1Language Knowledge
To use the key vocabulary card party present would always never cut give sing happy secret
To use the key structures Would you like to…
I always often usually sometimes never…
2 Listening and speaking skills
1)To understand conversations involving birthday in listening Improve the students’ listening ability
2) To understand the description of birthday celebration
3) To use the invitation expressed by Would you like to…
4) To ask about one’s birthday
3 Affection and attitudes To like making friends with others and care for others’ likes
教学重点
1 To understand conversations involving birthday in listening Improve the students’ listening ability
2 To talk about one’s birthday
教学方法
听说法练法
教学准备
录音机媒体直观教具
教
学
程
教
学
程
教学
步骤
教师活动
学生活动
活动目
Step1
Pretask
1Warming up
Greet to the Ss
2Lead in
1 Organize the Ss to enjoy and sing a happy song—Happy birthday
Q What is the song about
To lead the title
3 Free talk
Q1 When is your birthday
Q2：How do you celebrate your birthday
1Greet to the teacher
2 Listen to the songs and sing with the recorder
3Answer the question
What is the song about
( Birthday)
4 To read the title once And answer the teacher’s questions
调动学生学情绪导入新课
Step2
While_ task
Presentation of key words
(T What do we usually do on our birthday to lead in this part)
1 Show the Ss the pictures and teach the new words
2 Check the new words
1 Look at the pictures and answer the teacher’s questions They can answer all together or a group or one by one
2 Look at the pictures Say out the new words one by one
媒体展示课文关图片学生直观图片轻松学新词汇新颖动感图片增加学乐趣
Task1Listening
(Activity 2)
1 Play the tape Have the students number the words as they hear Then check the answers
2 Guide the students to learn the conversation (Activity 3)
(T I have a friend his name is Tony This Saturday is his birthday What does he do And What about his friends to lead in the conversation)
3 Play the tape again and get the students to listen and choose the best answers Then check
Task1 Listening
1 Listen and number the words as they hear Then check
2 Listen to the conversation and choose the best answers Then check
1Daming’s birthday is on _______
A Sunday B Friday
C Saturday
2 Tony likes _______
A cards B birthday parties C flowers
3 Daming’s mother never makes _____
A Jiaozi B a birthday cake C noodles
4 Lingling ______ gets birthday presents
A always B sometimes C never
学生听录音根录音容作出判断加强学生课文理解训练学生听力材料中够听取信息培养学生细节听力技巧
Task2 Reading
(Acitivity 3)
1 Let the Ss read the conversation and do Activity3
2 Let them check their answers
3 Organize the students to read the conversation with the video
4 Ask the Ss to work with their groups to read the conversation then ask several pairs to act it out
Task3：Language points
1 Organize three students to come to the teacher’s desk and show out some phrases and the difficult points
2 Help the students to solve the difficult points
Task 4 Practice
1 Ask the students to do Activity4 and retell it
2 Let the students complete the sentences with the words from the box then check the answers (Activity5)
Task 2 Reading
1 Read the conversation and do Activity 3
2 Check the answers one by one
3 Read the conversation with the video
4 Read the conversation in groups then read in roles
Task3 Language points
1 Three students come to the teacher’s desk to show out some phrases and the difficult points the other students listen to them carefully and note them
2 Solve the difficult points with the teacher’s help
Task 4 Practice
1 Do Activity4 individually and retell it
2 Finish off Activity 5 then check the answers
环节操练学生通细读话获取具体信息组活动通学生间合作学巩固节课语言点培养学生语言表达力表演中锻炼学生胆量
Step3
Posttask
Task5：Make a survey
1 Let the Ss work in groups of three One interviews the other two students about their birthdays
2 Let the Ss do a report according to the information
3 Ask three or four Ss to report their surveys Let other Ss listen and choose the best reporters
1 Work in groups of three One interviews the other two students about their school things Use the questions
A What do you usually do on your birthday
B I usually…
A Would your friends like to come to your birthday party
B Yes they’ d like to
A What parents do you get from your friends
B I always often usually get… but I never get…
2 After finishing it they must do a report
3 Three or four Ss report their surveys to the class The other Ss listen and choose the best reporters
课学知识学间进行采访交流记信息信息进行整理汇报样巩固课重点句型培养综合运力探究力
Step4 Sum up
Sum up
总结纳识记
巩固课堂知识
Step5
Homework
Let the Ss finish the exercises in the paper
Finish the exercises in the paper
通课练加强消化掌握课堂知识
板书设计
Moule8 Choosing presents 组评介：
Unit 1 I always like birthday parties T1 T2 T3
1 Would you like to…
Yes I’d like to Sorry I’m afraid I can’t I have to…
2 I always usually often sometimes never…
教学反思：
1 整节课气氛活跃课堂引入然新颖容真实老师学生感兴趣歌曲入手引起学生兴趣图片出现学生欣然接受新知识点师生双边关系融洽学生轻松谐气氛中学英语表现感觉学乐趣更激发学兴趣
2 活动设计贴学生历生活务设计具明确目性操作性务简繁易难层层深入吸引全体学生参
3 充分训练学生听说读写力尤读写综合部分设计练题环节学生较课堂操练进入课书面练效果较
4 存问题改进措施
1) 表演汇报学生较积极口语水限导致参表演汇报学生面够广力鼓励学生胆参处理分层教学学生特长充分发挥
2) 互动评价够元化应进步改进完善
附调查表
Survey
1 Make a survey
Names
What do you usually do on your birthday
What presents do you get
Would your friends like to come
Peter
have a birthday party eat noodles eat birthday cake
a birthday cake (always)
a birthday cake (often)
Yes
2 面句子采访学：
AWhat do you usually do on your birthday Peter
B I usually…
A Would your friends like to come to your birthday party
B Yes they’ d like to
A What parents do you get from your friends
B I always often usually get… but I never get…
3 Give a report and choose the best reporter (评出佳报告员)
Report
Peter usually has a birthday party eats noodles and birthday cakes on his birthday His friends would like to come to his party He always gets a birthday card and he often gets a birthday cake from his birthday…
练题
求完成句子
1 Tom gives me a present (改义句)
Tom _____ a present __ ___
2 never plays he games computer (连词成句)
____________________________
3 She does her homework at home(改否定句)
She ______ ___ her homework at home
4 This Saturday is my birthday (划线部分提问)
_____ __ _ your birthday
二根汉语提示完成句子
1 托尼通常收张生日贺卡Tony ______ ____ a birthday card
2 常做蛋糕He ____ _____ a cake
3 汉语英语唱歌He ____ the song in French
4 生日聚会样？_____ _____ a birthday party
5 举办生日聚会We _____ ____ a birthday party
Unit 2 She often goes to concerts
七十七 教学容：Unit2 She often goes to concerts
七十八 课型：Reading and writing
七十九 教学目标：
1掌握单元单词 choose wear shoe spend money film song weekend
2读懂关生日短文识爱
3般现时介绍爱描述家朋友喜特点挑选生日礼物
八十 教学重难点：
1 理解关生日短文
2 般现时介绍爱
八十 教学准备：
课堂整体运务型教学模式阅读课四阶段教学模式课指导学生通阅读获取信息培养学生阅读技教学程中采媒体手段辅助教学利种图片题务贯穿整教学程节课需准备：PPT课件挂图录音机课堂练表格奖品
八十二 预求：
根音标学课新单词
八十三 教学程：
教学
步骤
教师活动
学生活动
设计意图
Step One
Warmingup (5’)
1Lead in
(1)Ask students to discuss If your birthday is tomorrow What presents would you like Why
(2)Let students look at the pictures and choose their birthday presents
(1)To discuss their birthdays presents and reasons
(2) Look at the pictures and choose their presents
通讨引导学生回顾节课容巩固般现时语法知识通环节活跃课堂气氛说句子中考验学生Unit1知识掌握程度训练学生反应形中培养学生胆说英语惯
Step Two
Pre
reading
(5’)
1 Learn the new words
(1) Show students some pictures and check the new words
(2) Ask the students to label the picture with the words from the box ( Activity 1)
(1) Look at the pictures to say out some new words
(2) Label the pictures with the picture with the words from the box then check the answers ( Activity 1)
引导学生谈图片训练学生描述物品物力描述时学新单词句型学生扫清阅读障碍
Step Three
While
reading (18’)
1 Scanning
(1)Ask students to scan
the passage and answer
Who does the passage talk about
2 Skimming
1 Ask students to skim the passage and match the people with what they like doing (Activity 2)
2 Let the students check the answers
3Careful reading
(1)Paragraphs 1 and 2
① Read Para 1 and 2then answer the following questions
1How often do Daming’s grandparents get some exercise
2Does Daming’ mother like chocolate
3 How many silk scarves does she have got
②Organize some students to come to the blackboard and show out some difficult language points that they found in these two paragraphs
(2)Paragraph 3 and 4
①Read para3and 4then answer the following questions
4Does Betty’s cousin like reading
5 What does she often do
6 Does Tony’s sister like music
②Organize some students to come to the blackboard and show out some difficult language points that they found in these two paragraphs
(3)Paragraphs 5
①Let the students fill in the blanks after reading it
Lingling’s aunt and uncle like _______ but they _____ ______ go to football matchesThey usually watch football _____ _______They like _______ AC Milan
②Organize some students to come to the blackboard and show out some difficult language points that they found in this paragraph
(4) choose presents from the pictures in Activity1 for them
1Daming’s grandparents __________
2 Daming’s mother______
3 Betty’s cousin_______
4Tony’s sister________
5Lingling’s aunt and uncle
_________
(1) Scan the passage and answer the question：
Who does the passage talk about
1 Skim the passage and match the people with what they like doing (Activity 2)
2 Check the answers
①Read Para 1 and 2then answer the questions
②Some students come to the blackboard and show out some difficult language points that they found in these atwo paragraphs
①Read Para 3 and 4 and answer the questions
②Some students come to the blackboard and show out some difficult language points that they found in these two paragraphs
①The students fill in the blanks after reading it
②Some students come to the blackboard and show out some difficult language points that they found in this paragraph
(4) choose presents from the pictures in Activity1 for them
求学生快速阅文章回答问题帮助学生理解课文容
通学生快速阅读培养学生获取旨力进步理解文章容 进步学做铺垫
学生带着务（问题）阅读课文找答案助学生更加准确获取信息提高阅读效果技学生通分层次阅读文章获取具体信息知识点课文理解分段学突破组活动通学生间合作学学生充分实践运语言激发学生创造性思维发展
Step Four
Post
reading
(10’)
1 Retell
①Let the students fill
in the blanks according
to the passage
（Activity 3）
②Call back the answers
from two students then
retell the short passage
in the whole class
2Writing
① T It is more important to show your love for your parents and your friends So we should learn to thank
② Write about the things you like or don’t like and the things your best friend likes or doesn’t like and choose presents for them
①Fill in the blanks according
to the passage (Activity 3
②Call back the answers then
retell the short passage
① Write about the things you like or don’t like and the things your best friend likes or doesn’t like and choose presents for them
复述课文学生加深课文容理解
通写作学生巩固学增强写作力适量口头练学生巩固课时语言重点
Step Five
Summary（1’）
1Get the students to
sum up the language points
T What have we learned today
Ss…
2 Let the students to choose the best team in this lesson
1 Sum up the language points
2 To choose the best groups
引导学生节课总结学生做发言培养学生学总结良学惯
简短评价学生课堂表现肯定激励学生学兴趣树立学英语信心
Step Six
Home
work
（1’）
Write a passage
Write about the things you like or don’t like and the things your best friend likes or doesn’t like and choose presents for them
Finish the homework
课作业助学生巩固已学知识补充方面锻炼写作阅读拓展学生终完全掌握语言实践运语言
七板书设计：（略）
达标训练题
单项选择
( ) 1 ____ mother likes singing
A Tony B Tony’s C Tony
( ) 2 There is _______ shoes under the bed
A a lot B a pair of C a
( ) 3I have a lot of _______
A magazines B novel C book
( ) 4 He doesn’t ______ the piano on Monday
A plays B playing C play
( ) 5 She likes ____ and she reads ___ book
A reading a lot B reading lots of C to read lot of
二求完成列句子
1 His favorite food is rice (改义句)
He ______ rice ________
2 She plays the piano and likes to sing (改否定句)
She _______ _______ the piano _______ like to sing
3 He often goes to the cinema (改般疑问句)
____ he often ___ to the cinema
4 Betty’s aunt and uncle live in the USA (划线部分提问)
______ __ Betty’s aunt and uncle ___
Book 1 Module8 Choosing presents
八十四 教学容：Unit3 Language in use
八十五 课型：Revision and application
八十六 教学目标：
1 正确运always often sometimes never usually often
2正确运动词第三称单数形式
3运学知识描述家朋友喜特点挑选生日礼物
八十七 教学重难点：
运学知识描述家朋友喜特点挑选生日礼物
八十八 教学准备：
节课型Revision and application根新课标求结合教材学生特点采务型互动式进行教学结合情景法交际法听说法纳法等教学方法实施课堂活动开启学生思维通系列条理教学活动引导学生探究学互动合作学学生体验愉快学节课需教具资料：幻灯图片调查表等
八十九 教学程：
教学步骤
教 师 活 动
学 生 活 动
活 动 目
1 Leadingin
（8’）
1Show some pictures and ask students to discuss in pairs and make sentences like these
I like watching films
I often go to the cinema
1 Discuss in pairs and make sentences like these
I like watching films
I often go to the cinema
Review and consolidate the sentences which they have learn
2 Whiletask(20’)
1Explain the grammar to the students 般现时
2 Let the students work in pairs Ask and answer questions about Grandpa
(Activity 1)
Does Grandpa always watch TV
Yes he does
3 Ask the students to do Activity 3 Rewrite the sentences with the words in brackets( Activity 3 )
1 Listen to the teacher to explain the grammar般现时
2 work in pairs Ask and answer questions about Grandpa
(Activity 1)
3 Do Activity3 and then check the answers
Review and consolidate the grammar and vocabulary just learned in the first two units
4 Ask the students to do Activity 4 Complete the sentences with Would you like or Let’s
5 Let the students do Activity5 Read the emails and check the true sentences ( Activity 5)
6 Ask students to read Around the world and then answer the questions after reading
Q1：What do people often give to children as birthday presents in the UK and the US
Q2 When do the children open their presents
6 Check the answers
4 Complete the sentences with Would you like or Let’s
5 Read the emails and check the true sentences ( Activity 5)
6 Read Around the world and answer the questions after reading
Q1：What do people often give to children as birthday presents in the UK and the US
Q2 When do the children open their presents
6 Show the answers
Review the words
Enlarge the knowledge about the world
3 Posttask
(10’)
1Ask students to work in groups of six Planning a classmate’s birthday party
2Ask the students to say out their ideas
3Let students do some exercises and then check
1Work in six
Talk about their ideas of the plan
2Say out the ideas
3 Do some exercises and then check
To practice the skill of speaking
Practice the language points
4 Summary
(1’)
Ask the students to say out what to learn
Students conclude the knowledge that they learn
Let the students internalize the grammar they’ve learned in this module
5Homework（1’）
Finish the workbook of Unit 3
板书设计
达标训练题
动词适形式填空
1 He ________ TV every evening (watch)
2 We always _____ to school on foot (go)
3 Tom with his classmates often ______ football after school (play)
4 Your shoes _____ under the bed (be)
5 His uncle usually _____ to work by bus (go)
6 I always _____ up at six in the morning (get)
7 John ______ like his father (look)
二单项选择
1 — Can your father drive
—Yes and he usually _____ to school
A drove B is driving C drives D has driven
2 Tom _____ to work by bicycle
A usually go B go usually C usually goes D goes usually
3 Jerry _________ for school
A is usually late B usually is late C is late usually D goes usually late
4 — Do you often exercise Jason
— No _____ I don’t like sports at all
A always B often C usually D never
5 — Is the cat ______ friend
— Yes _______
A your it isn’t B he it is C your it is D her it isn’t
Module 9 People and places
九十 教学容：Unit 1 We’re enjoying the school trip a lot
九十 课型：Listening and speaking
九十二 教学目标：
1掌握单元词汇短语：call lie lie in the sun take photos wait walk a few enjoy go back
2掌握现进行时态be (am is are) +doing法结构
3听懂含现进行时态简短话
4转述正做发生事情根图片视频真实行等描述正发生事情
九十三 教学重难点：
掌握现进行时态句子肯定疑问否定形式现进行时态叙述正发生事情
九十四 教学准备：
课指导学生通听力获取信息培养学生听力技教师教学时量游戏图片flash动画种媒体引起学生学兴趣引导学生交际中动态生成学生话说乐合作分享样利更运课知识达提高综合运语言力目时培养学生合作精神发展思维想象等力教学程中采媒体手段辅助教学利种图片题务贯穿整教学程节课需准备：PPT课件挂图录音机课堂练表格奖品
九十五 预求：
1根音标学课新单词
2查找相关资料找出认课较重语言点短语
九十六 教学程：
教学
步骤
教师活动
学生活动
设计意图
Step One
Warmingup (3’)
Lead in
1Free talk
(1)Show some pictures and ask Ss like these
What is he she doing now
Where are they What are they doing now
(2)Show more pictures and let Ss talk about them try to use the sentences with be doing
1Free talk
(1)Answer the questions
He is listening to music
She is dancing now
They are playing basketball
(2)Talk with partners and try to use the sentences with be doing
学生熟悉日常活动free talk程中感受新语言项目通环节活跃课堂气氛调动学生学兴趣
Step Two
Pretask(5’)
Task1Check the new words
1 Show some pictures and things to get the students to say out the new words and phrases
2Organize the students to read the new words together
3Ask the Ss to describe the picture and try to use the words in the box(Activity 1)
Where is Betty What is she doing
What is Lingling doing What are they doing
1Look at the pictures and things to say out the new words and phrases
2 Read the new words and phrases together
3 To describe the picture and try to use the words in the box(Activity 1)
引导学生谈实物ppt图片检查学生词汇掌握程度训练学生表达力通图片情景学单词做词离句Check完词汇时做Activity 1进行巩固
Step Three
Whiletask (20’)
Task2listening
1Play the tape ask the students to listen and number the pictures (Activity 2)
2Ask the students to Listen to the conversation carefully and match the people 15 with the actions ag
T Now we are going to listen to a dialogue between Betty and her mum Betty is in China and her mum is at home in America Let’s listen and match
1 Listen to the tape and
number the pictures (Activity 2)
2 Listen to the conversation carefully and match the people 17 with the actions ag
利听读写练方式加强学生课文理解培养学生细节听力技巧够获取信息训练培养学生细节听力技巧
通视频听读话帮助学生进步理解课文容
组活动通学生间合作学学生充分实践运语言培养团结合作精神
通学生台展示找语言点培养学生胆量培养学力
教师点拨补充语言点学生进步理解知识点
通进步描述话中物正做事情加深课文掌握时锻炼口语
1Betty a eat an ice cream
2 Tony b have lunch
3 Wang Hui c lie in the sun
4 Lingling e stand on the Great Wall
5 Daming f take photos
g buy presents
3Organize the students to check their answers
Task 3 Reading
1Organize the students to read the conversation with the video
2Ask the Ss to work with their groups to read the conversation
3 Have a competition Read the dialogue in groups and choose the best group
Task 4 Solve the language points
1Organize students to come to the blackboard and show out some difficult language points that they found
2Help the students to solve the difficult points
Task5 Retell the dialogue
1 Organize the students to complete the table(Activity 3)
2 Organize the students to underline the correct words(Activity 4)
3 Ask the students to work in pairs Say what people are doing in the conversation using the form in Activity 3
3Check the answers
1Read the conversation with the video
2 Read the conversation in groups
3 Read the dialogue in groups and choose the best group
1 Students come to the blackboard to show out some language points the other students listen to them carefully and note
2Solve the difficult points with the teacher’s help
1Students complete the table(Activity 3)
2Students underline the correct words
(Activity 4)
3Students work in pairs Say what people are doing in the conversation using the form in Activity 3
Step Four
Posttask
(9’)
Task 6Do some speaking
1Work in pairs Ask students to talk about the photos which they brought and say what people are doing in the photos at the moment
A This is a photo of my family
I’m sitting on the grass and
reading My father mother
brother sister is … We are
having a good time
B In this photo we are enjoy ing the school trip Li Ming is … Tony is …
2 Have some students to come to the blackboard to talk about their photos
3．Play a guessing game Have some Ss to do the actions in front of the class The other Ss guess what is he doing
4Ask students to do some
Exercises and then check
1Work in pairs Students talk about the photos which they brought and say what people are doing in the photos at the moment
2Some students to come to the blackboard to talk about their photos
3Play a guessing game Some Ss do the actions in front of the class The other Ss guess what is he doing
4．Do the exercises then check
通做介绍片训练学生说力学生加深课文容理解适量口头练学生巩固课时语言重点
通动作猜迷游戏激发学生学兴趣组竞争意识进步强化巩固现进行时态法
通笔头练进步巩固学知识
Step Five
Summary（2’）
1Get the students to sum up the language points
T What have we learned today
Ss……
2Let the students to choose the best team in this lesson
1Sum up the language points
2To choose the best groups
引导学生节课总结学生做发言培养学生学总结良学惯
简短评价学生课堂表现肯定激励学生学兴趣树立学英语信心
Step Six
Home
work
（1’）
1Choose one of photos and write down what people are doing
2Finish the exercises in the workbook of Unit 1
Finish the homework
课作业助学生巩固已学知识补充方面锻炼
板书
设计
Module9 People and places 组评价
Unit1 We’re enjoying the school trip a lot T1 T2 T3
1Sentences
I’ m standing on the Great Wall of China and talking to you
Wang Hui is taking a lot of photos
Daming is having lunch and lying in the sun
2 动词ing形式变化规
达标训练题
单项选择
（ ）1At the momenteveryone dumplings
A are eating B eating C is eating D eat
（ ）2Listen She in the classroom
A is singing B sing C to sing D is sing
（ ）3Americans like the sun
A lie in B lying in C to lie under D lying on
（ ）4My father enjoys piano
A to play B playing C play the D playing the
（ ）5This is not easy work
A a B C one D an
二 动词适形式填空
1 Listen She (sing) a song
2 Look Tony (take) photos
3 John (play) basketball at this moment
4 What are you doing
I (run) for the bus
5 Daming (eat)lunch and (lie)in the sun at the moment
Book 1 Module9 People and places
教学容：Unit2 They’re waiting for the buses or trains
二 课型：Reading and writing
三 教学目标：
1够正确单元单词词组
2够读懂包含现进行时态句型简单文章
3够介绍国家时差时间里国家做什事情
4掌握明信片格式运现进行时态正确写张明信片
5中外中解国家生活情况培养学生异国文化生活俗兴趣提高国文化认识进步树立正确语言学观
四教学重难点：
1够阅读包含现进行时态句型简单文章够介绍国家时间里做什事情（重点）
2读懂正发生事情描述学会明信片描述正做事情（难点）
五 教学准备：
课堂整体运务型教学模式阅读课四阶段教学模式课指导学生通阅读获取信息培养学生阅读技通解国家生活俗培养学生文素养异国文化认识教学程中采媒体手段辅助教学利种图片题务贯穿整教学程节课需准备：PPT课件挂图录音机课堂练表格奖品
六 预求：
1根音标学课新单词词组
2查找相关资料找出认课较重语言点短语
七 教学程：
教学
步骤
教师活动
学生活动
设计意图
Step One
Warmingup (3’)
1Lead in
Ask one Ss to do the action with the given words the other Ss guess and say like this He is swimming running…
2．See and say
Show some pictures to revise the pattern Get students to ask and answer in pairs For example What is she doing She is getting up
Say the sentences like this He is swimming running…
Ask and answer in pairs For example What is she doing She is getting up
通环节活跃课堂气氛说句子复节课现进行时态训练学生反应
通组合作进步考验学生Unit1知识掌握程度培养学生胆说英语惯
Step Two
Pre
reading
(5’)
1Show students a map of the world and some famous cities Tell them there are 24 time tones in the world and at the same moment people in different countries have different time tones and they are doing different activities
For example It’s 100 am in Beijing People are sleeping People aren’t having dinner（Activity 1）
2Let the students learn words and phrases they will use in the reading
materials
1Look at the world’s map and the cities learn the time tones Say people in different countries have different time tones and they are doing different activities For example It’s 100 am in London People are … People aren’t … （Activity 1）
2Learn the words and phrases they will use in the reading
materials
Such as running for trains having afternoon tea going to the opera watching a ballet getting dressed etc
引导学生谈图片 步骤中 学积极动发言答案统老师鼓励学生胆表达训练学生描述图画力描述时学新单词短语学生扫清阅读障碍
Step Three
While
reading (18’)
Step Three
While
reading (20’)
1 Scanning
(1)Ask students to scan
the passage
T People in different places of the world are doing different things Please read the passage and match the
paragraphs with the pictures in Activity 1
(2) Organize the students to check their answers
2 Skimming
(1)Ask students to skim the passage
T Read it quickly again and choose the correct answer in Activity 3
(2) Organize the students to check their answers
3Careful reading
(1)Paragraph A
Ask the Ss to read Paragraph A and answer the questions in groups
1) In London what are people doing at 5 PM
2) Some are having afternoon tea at home what are other people doing
(2)Paragraphs B&C
Ask the Ss to read Paragraphs B&C and check the true sentences
(3)Paragraph D&E
Ask the Ss to read Paragraphs D&E and complete the passages
(1)Scan the passage and match the paragraphs with the pictures in Activity 1
(2)Check the answers
(1)Skim the passage Read it quickly again and choose the correct answer in Activity 3
(2) Check the answers
Read Paragraph A and answer the questions in groups
1) In London what are people doing at 5 PM
____________________ ___
2) Some are having afternoon tea at home what are other people doing
_____________________ __
Read Paragraphs B&C and check the true sentences
1) People aren’t having dinner at home at eight PM ( )
2) Some are going to the cinema or watching films ( )
3)People in Beijing are sleeping at one o’clock
( )
3 Read paragraphs D&E and complete the passages
In Los Angeles it’s nine o’clockPeople aren’t ________ washing or__________ They’re working Children are starting ___________
In ______ it’s midday People aren’t working They are ___________ They are eating _______or hot dogs and drinking______They’re seeing
friends_______or shopping
求学生快速阅读文章段活动图片连起快速掌握文章旨意思
通学生快速阅读培养学生获取旨力进步掌握含现进行时态句子
学生带着务（问题）阅读课文找答案助学生更加准确获取信息提高阅读效果技学生通分层次阅读文章获取具体信息知识点课文理解分段学突破组活动通学生间合作学学生充分实践运语言激发学生创造性思维发展
Step Four
Post
reading
(12’)
1Retell
(1)Let the students retell the last two paragraphs
2Writing
(1)Show a postcard from Betty’ mum
T Here is a postcard from Betty’s mum She is in Los Angeles now Please read the postcard and check the true sentences(Activity 5)
(2) Ask Ss to writing Betty’s postcard to her grandma from the Great Wall (Activity 7)
(3) Ask Ss to read Betty’s postcard in the class
(1) Try to retell the last two paragraphs
In Los Angeles it’s nine o’clockPeople aren’t ________ washing or__________ They’re working Children are starting ___________
In ______ it’s midday People aren’t working They are ___________ They are eating _______or hot dogs and drinking______They’re seeing
friends_______or shopping
(1)Read the postcard and check the true sentences(Activity 5)
(2) Writing a Betty’s postcard to her grandma from the Great Wall (Activity 7)
Dear Grandma
Now I’ m standing
Love
Betty
(3)Read Betty’s postcard in the class
复述课文学生加深课文容理解适量口头练学生巩固课时语言重点
通学明信片格式学会正确书写明信片描述正做事情加强巩固模块重句型语言点训练学生书面表达力口语表达力体现学生学英语英语综合力
Step Five
Summary（2’）
1Get the students to
sum up the language points
T What have we learned today
Ss……
2Let the students to choose the best team in this lesson
1Sum up the language points
2To choose the best groups
引导学生节课总结学生做发言培养学生学总结良学惯
简短评价学生课堂表现肯定激励学生学兴趣树立学英语信心
Step Six
Home
work
（1’）
Write a postcard to your best friend to tell him her
What are your family doing at the moment
Finish the homework
课作业助学生巩固已学知识补充方面锻炼写作阅读拓展学生终完全掌握语言实践运语言
板书
设计
Module9 People and places 组评价
Unit2 They’re waiting for the buses or trains T1 T2 T3
1Sentences
In London it’s … and people are leaving work
Some people are …Some are …
In Beijing it’s … so people aren’t
2 明信片书写格式
达标训练题
单项选择
（ ）1 I can’t find Mary because all the girls are all the same clothes
A wearing B dressing C putting on D put on
（ ）2Can you him clearly (清楚)？
A to hear B hear C listen D to listen
（ ）3 My brother often me at the school gate
A is waiting B is waiting for C waits D waits for
（ ）4Now we’re in Beijing We’re Beijing tomorrow
A leave for B leaveing for C leaving D leaving for
（ ）5People run buses after work
A after B for C about D of
二完成句子
1现5点钟 喝午茶
_____five and people ____________________
2孩开始课
The boy _________________________
3探朋友
They _______________________________
4Tony 写明信片
_____ Tony ____________________Yes ____________
5莫斯科正电视者家里玩游戏
In Moscow people or
Book 1 Module9 People and places
四 教学容：Unit3 Language in use
五 课型：Revision and application
六 教学目标：
1正确运模块词汇： call lie in the sun take photos of wait for a few on sale enjoy hot dog restaurant go back等
2识话中谈正发生事情
3转述正做发生事情
4运现进行时态描述正做事情学间进行真实交际
七 教学重难点：
根图片真实行等描述正发生事情
八 教学准备：
节课型Revision and application根新课标求结合教材学生特点采务型互动式进行教学结合情景法交际法听说法纳法等教学方法实施课堂活动开启学生思维通系列条理教学活动引导学生探究学互动合作学学生体验愉快学节课需教具资料：幻灯图片调查表等
九 教学程：
教学步骤
教 师 活 动
学 生 活 动
活 动 目
Step One
Leadin
（3’）
1 Show the flash of some pigs but students can’t see what they are doing Get students to guess
T What is he doing Is he running Is he singing
1See and guess
He She is …
游戏引出话题活跃课堂气氛鼓励学生胆表达时复巩固现进行时态句型
Step Two
Whiletask(20’)
1 Show students the phrases ask and answer questions in pairs (Activity 4)
2 Let students see nine sentences and ask them to try to find out the rules of v ing forms
3Ask the students to do some exercises
1 Use the given phrases
ask and answer like this ：
A Are you running for a bus
B No Yes
2 See nine sentences and try to find out the rules of v ing forms
3Do some exercises
1）The girls_______(buy) hot dogs
2）Daming ________
(have) an ice cream
3）Tony _________(talk) on his cell phone
4）Betty_________(carry) a bag
5）Lingling_______(shop) in the mall
通两组问答训练学生胆开口表达真正学运英语培养学生胆合作精神
纳现进行时结构复巩固现进行时法
通笔头练时巩固模块重语言点
4Show the picture about Betty’s school trip on the Great Wall Ask Ss to say
(Activity 1)
5Ask the students to complete the conversation between Tony and his father
T Tony is visiting the Forbidden City now and he is calling his dad
(Activity 2)
3 Organize Ss to check the answers
4 Have Ss write about
the pictures
(Activity 2)
5 Have one student show his answer to the class
4Look at the picture and say what they are doing
(Activity 1)
5Complete the conversation between Tony and his father
(Activity 2)
3 Check the answers
4 Write about the
pictures(Activity 2)
5 Check the answers
通量口头训练笔头训练进步强化现进行时法加强词汇理解运鼓励学生相互合作相互学竞争提高英语学兴趣学生快乐中学
Step Three
Posttask
(14’)
1 Around the world
Show students pictures of the US
T There are different time zones from New York to Hawaii And people in different places are doing different things Please read and
finish the blanks
2 Make a radio report
Have Ss work in group s of three of four And plan a radio report
3Organization
4Organization
1 Read Around the world
And finish the blanks
It’s in New York and people are It’s in Los Angeles children are
It’s in Hawaii most people are
2Work in group s of three of four And plan a radio report
What news you’d like to report
List the activities
Make notes
Write down the news
3Show their reports to the whole class
4 Choose the best report
通阅读快速获取信息纳信息培养学生获取重信息力学外国文化生活俗增强学生提高国文化认识
通组合作讨完成新闻报道运模块学词汇句型运正确 时态表达鼓励学胆想象胆表达想法
Step Four
Summary
(2’)
Ask the students to conclude the usage of
the present continue tense
Students conclude the usage of the present continue tense
学生纳总结学重语言点语法点
Step Five
Homework（1’）
Write a news report
板书设计
Module9 People and places
Unit 3 Language in use
现进行时：be +Ving
达标训练题
单项选择
（ ）1 Wang Hui is __________ his mother on his cell phone
A drawing B leaving C calling D telling
（ ）2 Don’t talk here They are __________
A walking B playing C sitting D sleeping
（ ）3 —__________ the trip
—Yes we are
A Does he enjoy B Do you enjoy
C Is Sam enjoying D Are you enjoying
（ ）4 The tiger ____ breakfast
A run for B runs C is running D is running for
（ ）5He usually sends ________ postcards to his friend
A a lot B lot of C a lot of D a lots
二书面表达
写少5现进行时句子描述校园里正发生事情语句通意思连贯
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Unit 1 Are you getting ready for Spring Festival
学
情
分
析
17年级学生学英语较浓厚兴趣热情活泼动奇心强表现欲尊心强希老师学认赞扬
2学课前学生已够娴熟两合作组方法进行语言表达交流基英语相结合英语开展思维发表意见学生七年级初步解关现进行时句型单元前面基础引入现进行时般疑问句通学生较感兴趣话题Spring Festival教师预设务中引导学生交际中动态生成学生话说乐合作分享样利更运课知识达提高综合运语言力目
教
材
分析
Module 10节日话题容谈春节准备重点学现进行时般疑问句结构单元目标学进行时般疑问句结构通听读呈现般疑问句功运说写务循环训练强化语言知识
教
学
目
标
目标：①To understand the conversation about the Spring Festival
②To recognize phrases and recognize short answers
③To talk about the Festivals with given information
重难点：
vocabulary—Spring Festival ready get ready for learn dragon dragon dance lantern sweep
structures What is Lingling doing
She’s getting ready for the Spring Festival
Is your mother working
Yes she is No she isn＇t
教
学
策
略
模
式
课指导学生通听力获取信息培养学生听力技课堂采媒体手段辅助教学轻松愉快氛围中较真实语境联系学生生活实际结合已知识验运学语言基础知识学互相学学生语言实践中相互启发生成体验成功培养学生合作精神发展思维想象等力
教学程中种图片题务贯穿整教学程学生够表感觉知觉系动词表达感觉积极合作学增加课堂直观性趣味性学效性加课堂密度提高教学效果活跃课堂气氛鼓励学生积极参加活动中教学中采取组竞赛形式设置奖品学生学中乐乐中学
课堂整体运务型教学模式阅读课四阶段教学模式（参中学课堂教学模式选编第六章P95）
教学
准备
PPT课件课堂活动表格奖品
教学程
教
学
活
动
教
学
活
动
教
学
活
动
教学
步骤
教师活动
学生活动
设计意图
Step One
Warmingup (2’)
Lead in
1Organize the Ss to enjoy and sing a happy song—Happy New Year
2T What festival is the song about
To lead the title
1Listen to the songs and sing with the video
2 Answer the question
What festival is the song about
( Spring Festival)
3 To read the title once
先首新年歌引出节课题通环节活跃课堂气氛调动学生学兴趣
Step Two
Pretask(5’)
Task1Check the new words
1Show some pictures and get the students to check the new words
eg T What’s the girl doing
S She’s making lanterns
T Is her grandma making lanterns with her
S No she isn’t She’s cooking the meal
2Organize the students to read the new words together
1See the pictures and say the new words
2 Read the new words together
引导学生谈图片训练学生表达力通图片情景学单词现进行时句型做词离句
Step Three
Whiletask (22’)
Task2listening
(1) Play the tape Have the students match the people with what they are doing Then check the answers
T The new year is coming
What should we do(Activity 2)
(2)Guide the students to learn the conversation (Activity 3)
(T The ring bells Who’s that to lead in the conversation)
Task 3 Reading
(1) Organize the students to read the conversation with the video
(2)Ask the Ss to work with their groups to read the conversation
(3) Organize the students to choose the correct answers (Activity3)
(4)Organize the students to check their answers one by one
Task 4Language points
(1)Organize students to come to the blackboard and show out some difficult language points
(2)Help the students to solve the difficult points
Task 5Retell the dialogue
(1)Ask the students to complete the passage
(2)Ask the students to retell it
(1) Listen to the tape and match the people with what they are doing Then check
(2) Listen to the conversation and choose the best answers Then check
(1)Read the conversation with the video
(2) Read the conversation in groups
(3) Read the conversation again and choose the correct answers (Activity 3)
(4) Check the answers one by one
(1) Students come to the blackboard to show out some language points the other students listen to them carefully and note
(2)solve the difficult points with the teacher’s help
(1)Complete the passage
(2) Retell the dialogue
利听读练方式加强学生课文理解培养学生细节听力技巧
够听取信息训练培养学生细节听力技巧
学生带着务（问题）阅读课文找答案助学生更加准确获取信息提高阅读效果技学生通细读话获取具体信息组活动通学生间合作学学生充分实践运语言激发学生创造性思维发展通解释语言点复述话学生进步熟悉课文理解话
Step Four
Posttask
(10’)
Task 6Do some speaking
(1)Show some pictures and organize the students to talk about the other festivals
（2） Help the students to make dialogues of the other festivals like this
A Are they eating birthday cakes
B No they aren’t
A what are they doing
B They are eating moon cakes
（3）Organize the students to make dialogues in pairs according to some pictures and information
4 Have the Ss act out their
new dialogues
（1）Look and say out the other festivals
（2）make dialogues of the other festivals with the teacher’s help
（3） Work in pairs and make dialogues according to some pictures and information
4 Act out the new dialogues
通学节日次训练学生说力学生加深课文容理解适量口头练学生巩固课时语言重点
Step Six
Home
work
（1’）
发挥想象连词成文(4060字)
(festival get ready for cook the meal lantern sweep away cutting paper at work)
Finish the homework
课作业助学生巩固已学知识补充方面锻炼写作阅读拓展学生终完全掌握语言实践运语言
板书设计
Module10 Spring Festival 组评价
Unit1 Are you getting ready for Spring Festival
Is her grandma making lanterns with her T1 T2 T3
No she isn’t
What’s she doing
She’s cooking the meal
教学反思
达标训练题
根汉语提示 完成句子 空词
1 元宵节通常吃元宵
On Lantern _______ we usually ____ yuanxiao
2 贝蒂正学舞龙
Betty is _______ a dragon _____
3 玲玲家正春节做准备
Lingling’s ______ are ______ _____ ____ Spring Festival
4 正唱圣诞歌
They are _______ Christmas songs
5 正做灯笼
They are _______ _______
Book1 Module10 Spring Festival
十 教学容：Unit2 My mother’s cleaning our house and sweeping away bad luck
十 课型：Reading and writing
十二 教学目标：
1够正确列单词词组：Christmas February January before sweep away luck table celebrate traditional dumpling programme sweater coat mean lucky merry tell
2够通阅读材料读懂描述春节短文段落相应图片搭配
3继续学现进行时区分现进行时般现时法
4学知识描述英国圣诞节
十三 教学重难点：
1够通阅读材料读懂描述春节短文段落相应图片搭配熟练运现进行时（重点）
2区分现进行时般现时法 学知识描述英国圣诞节（难点）
十四 教学准备：
课堂整体运务型教学模式阅读课四阶段教学模式课指导学生通阅读获取信息培养学生阅读技教学程中采媒体手段辅助教学利种图片题务贯穿整教学程节课需准备：PPT课件挂图录音机课堂练表格奖品
十五 教学程：
教学
步骤
教师活动
学生活动
设计意图
Step One
Warmingup (3’)
1 Lead in
Play a piece of music and then ask some students to do some actions and others say out what the students are doing
See the actions and say sentences like this
xxx is writing…
xxx is singing…
xxx and xxx are…
先引导学生回顾节课容巩固现进行时法
通环节活跃课堂气氛说句子中考验学生Unit1知识掌握程度形中培养学生胆说英语惯
Step Two
Pre
reading
(5’)
Show three pictures to the students and ask the students to talk about what is happening
Look at the pictures and talk about what is happening
What’s Li Shan’s mother doing
She’s cleaning the house
…
引导学生谈图片训练学生现进行时态描述物行力描述时学新单词句型学生扫清阅读障碍
Step Three
While
reading (24’)
Step Three
While
reading (24’)
1 Scanning
(1)Ask students to scan the passage and match the paragraphs with the pictures in Activity1
T Spring Festival is one of the most important festivals in China We do many things for Spring Festival Please scan the passage and match the paragraphs with the pictures in Activity1
2Careful reading
①Present some sentences to the students and ask them to write T or F also correct the wrong sentences after reading Paragraph C
②Choose the best answers after reading
T Read the passage carefully and choose the best answers of the two questions
③Ask a student to be a little teacher to check the answers
3Reading in groups
①Let some team students read the passage paragraph by paragraph in groups of six and other students listen carefully to find out the important points
②Solve difficulties
③Ask the students to read the passage together and make sure they understand the passage
(1)Scan the passage and match the paragraphs with the pictures in Activity1
Picture A for paragraph A
…
①Tell true or false after reading
1 Spring Festival happens every year( )
2 people don’t clean their house before Spring Festival ( )
②Choose the best answers after reading
1 Li Shan usually ______ after the dinner
A eats dumplings
B watches TV
C cleans the house
2 What does hongbao mean
A It means rich
B It means good luck
C It means beautiful
③A student to be a little teacher to check the answers Others try their best to answer the questions
①Read the passage paragraph by paragraph in groups of six and other students listen carefully to find out the important points
②Solve difficulties
③The students read the passage together and make sure to understand the passage
求学生快速阅读文段选出段落相应图片够帮助学生更理解课文
学生带着务（问题）阅读课文找答案助学生更加准确获取信息提高阅读效果技学生通分层次阅读文章获取具体信息知识点课文理解分段学突破组活动通学生间合作学学生充分实践运语言激发学生创造性思维发展
Step Four
Post
reading
(10’)
1Retell
①Let the students complete the passage with the correct form of the words and expression from the box in Activity 3
②Call back the answers
from two students then
read the short passage
in the whole class
2Writing
Ask the students to write sentences with the notes in Activity4 and join two notes and write one sentence with and
①Complete the passage with the correct form of the words and expression from the box in Activity 3
②Call back the answers
from two students then
read the short passage
in the whole class
Write sentences with the notes in Activity4 and join two notes and write one sentence with and
复述课文学生加深课文容理解
and连接两句子练学生写作热身
Step Five
Summary（2’）
1Get the students to sum up the language points
T What have we learned today
Ss……
2Let the students to choose the best team in this lesson
1Sum up the language points
2To choose the best groups
引导学生节课总结学生做发言培养学生学总结良学惯
简短评价学生课堂表现肯定激励学生学兴趣树立学英语信心
Step Six
Home
work
（1’）
Write a passage about Christmas in Britain
Finish the homework
课作业助学生巩固已学知识补充方面锻炼写作阅读拓展学生终完全掌握语言实践运语言
板书设计
Module 10 Spring Festival
十六 Unit2 My mother’s cleaning our house and sweeping away bad luck
组评价
T1 T2 T3
现进行时be doing
般现时 do does
达标训练题
单项选择
1 She is _______ in her room at the moment
A looking her book B seeing the book
C reading the book D watching the book
2 Look The boy is __________ in the river now
A swiming B swimming C swim D swims
3 –Is she drawing pictures now
________________
A Yes she is B Yes he is C No she is D Yes she isn’t
4 My sister _________ eating an apple
A doesn’t B does C are D isn’t
5 My father often __________ to work
A walk B rides a bike C by bike D is walking
二 句型转换
1 He is taking some photos now (改般疑问句)
________ he taking _________ photos now
2 We are looking at the old watch (改否定句)
We ______ ________ looking at the old watch
3 Li Lei is cleaning the house now (划线部分提问)
_________ is Li Lei ________ now
4 They are doing their homework in the classroom (划线部分提问)
________ ________ they doing their homework
5 She usually washes her clothes on Sundays(now改写句子)
She _______ __________ her clothes now
文档香网(httpswwwxiangdangnet)户传
《香当网》用户分享的内容，不代表《香当网》观点或立场，请自行判断内容的真实性和可靠性！
该内容是文档的文本内容，更好的格式请下载文档
Unit 1 Good morning Miss Zhou
课型：Listening and speaking
课时：45 minutes
课前预测：the first lesson of their Junior High SchoolIt’s necessary to help them know the importance of learning English and some basic methods
教学方法：Interactive approach
板书设计：Key words and sentences about everyday English in PPT
教学目标：
1 Master the key words and expressions in Unit 1
2Learn to use the key sentences to greet each other
3Cultivate their ability of creation
教学重难点：
1Key words and expressions
hello class my name is miss good good afternoon etc
2Key sentences
Good morningafternoon
My name’s Miss Zhou
Goodbye
Etc
3How to use what they have learnt to greet each other
4How to write the 26 letters regularly
教学准备：
PPTpictures on the Internet videotape
教学程：
Step 1 Warming up
1Show some pictures to tell them the importance of English learning
2Show pictures on the Internet to tell them what is the correct way of learning English
step2Introduction
1learn new words by showing some pictures
2Read all the new words together
step3Practice
1practice the dialogues in pairs in class like that
2Act their dialogues out in class
step4Key points
name’s name is the differences of Mr and Miss
step5 Match
1Match the dialogues in Part 3 by themselves
2Check answers one by one Encouragement should be given
3Read the dialogues in groups
step6Listen and say
Listen to the tape in Part 5 and say after it Especially they should pay attention to the pronunciation of the 26 letters
step7Sing the ABC Song
1 Listen to the song at first then imitate how to sing it for several times
2 Ask some of them to sing the song in class Encouragement should be given
step8Write
1 It’s very important to tell them how to write the letters regularly so the teacher needs to spend more time on this step The teacher should check their spelling carefully and correct them in time
2 The best work should be showed to others in class
3 Have a small inclusion about their work
step9Listen
1 Listen to the tape in Part 7 write the names regularly
2 Check answers and ask them to write their own names in English
step10Exercises
Do some exercises in class to consolidate what they have learnt in this lesson Encouragement should be given
Step11 Homework
1Sing ABC Song
2Read the dialogues in Unit 1 smoothly
3Write the 26 letters carefully in their exercise books
新外研英语七年级starter部分Module1 Unit2教案
Unit 2 Good morning I’m Chen Zhong
课型：Listening and speaking
课时：45 minutes
课前预测：They have learnt how to write the 26 letters regularly in this lesson they need to consolidate them and learn some new everyday English
教学方法：Interactive approach
板书设计：Key words and sentences about greetings in PPT
教学目标：
1 Master the key words and expressions in Unit 2
2Learn to use the key sentences to greet each other
3Cultivate their ability of creation
教学重难点：
1Key words and expressions
I you your spell sorry how fine etc
2Key sentences
What’s your name
I’m Lingling
Sorry
Can you spell it please
How are you
Fine thank you
Etc
3How to use the key sentences to greet with their classmates
教学准备：
PPTpictures on the Internet videotape
教学程：
Step 1 Revision
1 Revise how to write the 26 letters without opening their books
2 Sing the ABC song
step2Introduction
1learn new words and expressions by showing some pictures The pronunciation of the new words should be paid more attention
2Read all the new words and expressions together Then freely give them some help
step3Drills
1What’s your name I’m Li Si
2Can you spell itplease Yes…
3How are you I’m fine thank you
step4Listen and read
1Listen and read after the tape for 2 times then freely Give them some help
2Act the dialogue out in groups then in pairs
step5 Listen and sing
Listen and learn to sing the song Good Morning
step6Match
Listen and match the sentences on their own Check answers and read it in groups
step7Listen and number
Listen and number the sentences on their own Check answers and read it in groups
step8Write
1Write the answers in Part 5especially they should write their answers regularly
2Check answers and give some encouragement
step9Work in pairs
Work in pairs to finish Part 6 Prepare for a few minutes ask them to have an action in class
step10Keys
1Read the keys together then freely
2Have a quick test one by one
Step11Read and find
1 Read and fine some rules about the verb be
2Show some exercises to consolidate what they have learnt in this lesson
Step 12 Homework
1To classify the letters according to their pronounciation
2Recite the text as possible as they can
3Learn to read the 48 phonetic symbols
新外研英语七年级starter部分Module1 Unit3教案
Unit 3 This is my friend
课型：Listening and speaking
课时：45 minutes
课前预测：They have learnt how to write the 26 letters regularly and some new everyday English in this lesson they need to consolidate them and learn to use them in their daily life
教学方法：Interactive approach
板书设计：Key words and sentences about greetings in PPT
教学目标：
1 Master the key words and expressions in Unit 3
2Learn to use the key sentences to greet each other
3Cultivate their ability of creation
教学重难点：
1Key words and expressions
This she her his he tomorrow time etc
2Key sentences
This is my friend his name is…
This is Miss Zhou she is my teacher
Nice to meet you
It’s time to go now
Etc
3How to use the key sentences to greet with their classmates in their daily life
教学准备：
PPTpictures on the Internet videotape
教学程：
Step 1 Revision
1 Revise how to classify the 26 letters according to their pronounciation
2 Sing the Good Morning song
step2Introduction
1Teach them how to read new words and expressions according to the pronunciation of them
2Read all the new words and expressions together Then freely give them some help
step3Drills
1This is… heshe is …
2This is … hisher name is…
step4Pronouns
Show the table about pronouns and read them after the teacher
step5 Listen and read
1Listen and read after the tape for 2 times then freely Give them some help
2Read Part 1 in groups then in pairs
3 Act the dialogues out in pairs in class encouragement should be given
step6Abbreviated forms
Sum up what they have learnt about the abbreviated forms read and fine the rules
step7Match
Listen and match the sentences on their own Check answers and read it in groups
Step8 Listen and number
Listen and number the sentences on their own Check answers and read it in groups
step8Work in groups
1This is my friend…name is…Hello… nice to meet you
step9Write
Listen and finish the sentences on their own Check answers and read it together
step10Exercises in class
Show some exercises to consolidate what they have learnt in this lessonCheck answers one by one Encouragement should be given
Step 12 Homework
1Watch the video to learn how to read the 48 phonetic symbols
2Recite the text as possible as they can
新外研英语七年级Starter部分Module2 Unit1教案
Unit 1 Open your book
课型：Listening and speaking
课时：45 minutes
课前预测：They have learnt some everyday English In this Unit they continue to learn some more about it
教学方法：Interactive approach
板书设计：Key words and sentences about everyday English in PPT
教学目标：
1 Master the key words and expressions in Unit 1
2Learn to use the key sentences to greet each other
3Cultivate their ability of creation
教学重难点：
1Key words and expressions
Sit stand open close up down etc
2Key sentences
Open your book
Close your book
Stand up
Etc
3How to use what they have learnt to greet each other
4How to write the key sentences regularly
教学准备：
PPTpictures on the Internet videotape
教学程：
Step 1 Warming up
1Revise the letters in Module 1
2Revise the words and key sentences they have learnt in Module 1
step2Introduction
1learn new words and read them togetherespecially pay attention to their pronunciation
2Read all the new words freely give them some help and ask some of them to read them in class
step3Listen and read
Listen to Part 1 read after it Then read it in pairs
step4Listen and repeat
1Listen to the tape in Part 2 repeat
2Read Part 2 with the help of their teacher freely
3Do as the teacher’s order
step5 Match
1Complete Part 4 by themselves
2Read the answers together to check them
step6Translate
Show the questions quikly ask them to translate them orally in class
step7Write
1 Listen to the tape and write their answers in their books
2 Show the answers to check their answersgive more encouragement
step8Work in pairs
1 Work in pairs to complete Part 6
2 Ask some of them to act in class
step9Everyday English
1 Show the questions and ask them how to answer
2 Read Everyday English in groups
step10Exercises
Do some exercises in class to consolidate what they have learnt in this lesson Encouragement should be given
Step11 Homework
1Copy the key sentences correctly in their exercise books
2Read Unit 1 smoothly
3Try to remember the spelling of the new words and expressions
4Learn to sing the song hello how are you
新外研英语七年级Starter部分Module2 Unit2教案
Unit 1 What’s your number
课型：Listening and speaking
课时：45 minutes
课前预测：They have learnt some everyday English In this Unit they continue to learn some more about it
教学方法：Interactive approach
板书设计：Key words and sentences about everyday English in PPT
教学目标：
1 Master the key words and expressions in Unit 1
2Learn to use the key sentences to greet each other
3Cultivate their ability of creation
教学重难点：
1Key words and expressions
new student here in one two three etc
2Key sentences
What’s your telephone number
Are you a new student here
What class are you in
Etc
3How to use what they have learnt to ask and answer each other
4How to write the key sentences regularly
教学准备：
PPTpictures on the Internet videotape
教学程：
Step 1 Warming up
1Revise the words in Unit 1 by doing some exercises
2Ask some questions in Unit 1 freely
step2Introduction
1learn the numbers 110 and read them togetherespecially pay attention to their pronunciation
2Have a quick testgive them some help and ask some of them to read them in class
3Learn some other new words and read them together encouragement should be given
step3Listen and chant
1Listen to the tape in Part3 at first then listen again to learn to chant
2Chant each other ask some of them to act it in class
step4Listen and repeat
1Listen to the tape in Part 1 repeat
2Read Part 1 with the help of their teacher freely
3Read the dialogue in pairs
4Like this Ask and answer Lala’s informationthen ask their classmates
step5Listen and read
1Read Part 4 by themselves find the telephone numbers and fill in the blanks
2Read the answers together to check them
3Listen to the tape in Part 4 and read after it read it for some more times with the help of the teacher freely
4Read it in groups then in pairs in class
step6Listen and point
Listen to the tape carefullycheck the answers one by one
step7Listen and write
1 Listen to the tape and write their answers in their books to finish Part 6
2 Show the answers to check their answersgive more encouragement
3 Listen to the tape in Part 7 write the numbers Check answers and read them together
step8Work in pairs
1 Work in pairs what’s your telephoneQQ number
2 Ask some of them freely in class
step9Listen and write
1 Listen to the tape in Part 8 fill in the table on their own check answers
2 Ask them to ask and answer in pairs according to the table in Part 8
3 Ask and answer freely to finish Part 9
Step 10 Complete and find
A ________ you a new student here
B Yes I _______
A What class are you in
B I’m in Class Five Mr Liu’s class
A What class ________Li Minghao in
B He is in Class Six Miss Liang’s class
step11Exercises
Do some exercises in class to consolidate what they have learnt in this lesson Encouragement should be given
Step12 Homework
1Make a survey and write their friends’ telephone number
2Read Unit 2 smoothly including the new words try to have a dictation
3Continue to learn the 48 phonetic symbols
新外研英语七年级Starter部分Module2 Unit3教案
Unit 1 What’s your number
课型：Listening and speaking
课时：45 minutes
课前预测：They have learnt some everyday English In this Unit they continue to learn some more about it
教学方法：Interactive approach
板书设计：Key words and sentences about everyday English in PPT
教学目标：
1 Master the key words and expressions in Unit 2
2Learn to use the key sentences to ask and answer each other
3Cultivate their ability of creation
教学重难点：
1Key words and expressions
How old boy girl desk chair bag thirteen fifteen etc
2Key sentences
How old are you
I’m twelve
How many girls boys are there
Etc
3How to use what they have learnt to ask and answer each other
4How to write the key sentences regularly
教学准备：
PPTpictures on the Internet videotape
教学程：
Step 1 Warming up
Revise the numbers in Unit 2 by a quick test
step2Introduction
1learn the new numbers 1120 and read them togetherespecially pay attention to their pronunciation
2Have a quick testgive them some help and ask some of them to read them in class
3Match the numbers in Part 3 check answers
4Tell them how to write the numbers from 21 to 29
5 Learn some other new words and read them together then freely Give them some help
step3Listen and Point
Listen to the tape in Part4 at firstcheck answers then listen again to repeat
step4Listen and write
1Listen to the tape in Part 5write the answers at the same time
2Check answers and read it one by one
4Learn about some more like plusminusmultiplydivide
step5Listen and write
1Listen to the tape in part 6 write the numbers in their books
2 Check answer each other read them loud in class
step6Listen and Match
Listen to the tape in Part 7 carefullycheck the answers
step7Listen and read
1 Listen to the tape in Part 1and repeat
2 Act the dialogue in pairs
step8Work in pairs
1 Work in pairs How many boysgirls are there
2 Ask some of them freely in class
step9Inclusion
Sum up the key points and ask more questions freely in class
Step 10 Words and expressions in Module 2
Listen to the tape and repeat after it
step11Exercises
Do some exercises in class to consolidate what they have learnt in this lesson Encouragement should be given
Step12 Homework
1Try to remember the spelling of words in Unit 2 and have a dictation
2Read Unit 2 and try to recite it
3Copy the numbers120 in their exercise books
新外研英语七年级Starter部分Module3 Unit1教案
Unit 1 What’s this in English
课型：Listening and speaking
课时：45 minutes
课前预测：They have learnt some everyday English In this Unit they continue to learn some more about it
教学方法：Interactive approach
板书设计：Key words and sentences about everyday English in PPT
教学目标：
1 Master the key words and expressions in Unit 1
2Learn to use the key sentences to ask and answer each other
3Cultivate their ability of creation
教学重难点：
1Key words and expressions
In writeonblackboardpenpencilbirdflower etc
2Key sentences
What’s this in English
How do you spell pencil
Write it on the blackboard
Sorry
Etc
3How to use what they have learnt to ask and answer each other
4How to use the key sentences in their real life
教学准备：
PPTpictures on the Internet videotape
教学程：
Step 1 Warming up
Have a quick test to revise what they have learnt in Module 2
1Revise the numbers
2Revise the key sentences what they have learnt in Module 2
3Have a quick answer in only 3 seconds
step2Introduction
1Show some pictures to learn new words and read them togetherespecially pay attention to their pronunciation
2Read all the new words freely give them some help and ask some of them to read them in class
step3Listen and read
Listen to the tape in Part 1 read after it Then read it in groups then in pairs Have an action in class Encouragement should be given
step4Listen and Point
1Listen to the tape in Part 2 repeat
2Read Part 2 with the help of their teacher freely
3Show some pictures to ask and answer each other
step5 Listen and write
1Listen and write the answers in Part 3 on their own
2Read the answers together to check them
step6Ask and answer
1 Ask and answer to finish Part 4 work in pairs according to the pictures in Part 4 freely
2 Action in classEncouragement should be given
step7Listen and write
1 Listen to the tape and write their answers in Part 5
2 Show the answers to check their answersgive more encouragement
step8Answer race
Divide them into 4 groups to have an answer race
1 What’s this in English
2 How do you spell it
step9Everyday English
Read Everyday English
1What’s this in English
2Write it on the blackboard
3Sorry
4How do you spell pencil
step10Exercises
Do some exercises in class to consolidate what they have learnt in this lesson Encouragement should be given
Step11 Homework
1Find some objects and work in pairs to ask and answer
What’s this in English How do you spell it
2Try to read Unit 1 smoothly or recite it
3Additional exercises
Step 12 A Song
Learn to sing the song What’s this after class
新外研英语七年级Starter部分Module3 Unit2教案
Unit 1 Can you help me please
课型：Listening and speaking
课时：45 minutes
课前预测 In this Unit they’ll continue to learn some more everyday English How to use them may be difficult for them
教学方法：Interactive approach
板书设计：Key words and sentences about everyday English in PPT
教学目标：
1 Master the key words and expressions in Unit 2
2Learn to use the key sentences to communicate each other
3Cultivate their ability of creation
教学重难点：
1Key words and expressions
Helpcoursethatagainwelcome etc
2Key sentences
Can you help meplease
How do you spell it
Can you say that again please
You’re welcome
Etc
3How to use what they have learnt to ask and answer each other
教学准备：
PPTpictures on the Internet videotape
教学程：
Step 1 Warming up
1Revise the words in Unit 1 by having a guessing game
2Ask them How do you spell… To check the spelling of the key words in unit 1
step2Introduction
1learn the new words and read them togetherespecially pay attention to their pronunciation
2Learn new words and read them together encouragement should be given
3Give them some help and ask some of them to read them in class
step3Practice
Show some pictures ask and answer like this
AWhat’s this in English
BIt’s a…
AHow do you spell it
BIt’s…
AThank you
BYou’re welcome
Ask some of them to have an action in class encouragement should be given
step4Listen and read
1Listen to the tape in Part 1 repeat
2Read Part 1 with the help of their teacher freely
3Read the dialogue in pairs
4Encourage them to have an action in class
step5Listen and point
1Listen to the tape in Part 2 and write the words below the pictures according to the spellings
2Read the words in groups then have a dialogue in pairs in class
step6Everyday English
Show Everyday English to read them together
1Can you help me please
Yes of course
2I don’t know
3Can you say that again please
4Thank you
You’re welcome
step7Read and match
1 Listen to the tape and write their answers in their books to finish Part 3
2 Show the answers to check their answersgive more encouragement
3 Check answers and read them together
step8Work in pairs
1 Work in pairs to finish Part 5 freely
2 Ask some of them freely in class
step9Listen and write
1 Listen to the tape in Part 6 write the answers
2 Check answers and read them together
step10Exercises
Do some exercises in class to consolidate what they have learnt in this lesson Encouragement should be given
Step12 Homework
1 Use their school things to ask and Answer Can you help meplease How do you spell it
2 Write their own dialogues in their exercise books
3 Additional exercises
新外研英语七年级Starter部分Module3 Unit3教案
Unit 1 What colour is it
课型：Listening and speaking
课时：45 minutes
课前预测：They have learnt some everyday English In this Unit they continue to learn some more about it
教学方法：Interactive approach
板书设计：Key words and sentences about everyday English in PPT
教学目标：
1 Master the key words and expressions in Unit 3
2Learn to use the key sentences to ask and answer each other
3Cultivate their ability of creation
教学重难点：
1Key words and expressions
blackwhiteredyellowcolour etc
2Key sentences
What colour is it
What colour are they
Is it a red car Yes it is No it isn’t
Etc
3How to use what they have learnt to ask and answer each other
4How to spell new words according to the phonetic symbols
教学准备：
PPTpictures on the Internet videotape
教学程：
Step 1 Warming up
Revise the numbers by a quick test
step2Introduction
1 Ask them what colour is it To learn different colors and read them togetherespecially pay attention to their pronunciation
2 Ask the same questions one by one to check if they have mastered the key sentences
3Write the different colors below the balls
4Have a quick test to say the names of different colors
step3Listen and Point
1 Listen to the tape in Part1 at first then listen again to repeat
2 Read Part 1freely with the help of their teacher
step4Read and match
1Listen to the tape in Part 3 write the answers at the same time
2Check answers by listening again
3work in pairs to read Part 3
step5Listen and write
1Listen to the tape in part 7 write the answers in their books
2 Check answer each other read them loud in class
step6Work in pairs
Work in pairs to finish Part 5 Ask some of them to act their dialogues in class encouragement should be given
step7Write
1 Read the words in the table in Part 5 quickly
2 Divide them into 3 groups according to the table below
3 Check answers and read them together
step8Challenges
1 Draw
2 Ask and answer what colour is it What colour are they
Is it a… Yes it is
Are they… No they aren’t
3 work in pairs to have a creation
Step9Exercises
Do some exercises in class to consolidate what they have learnt in this lesson Encouragement should be given
Step10Words and expressions in Module 3
Listen to the tape of words and expressions in Module 3 read after the tape at the same time
Step11 Homework
1Draw a picture Paint it and name the colors correctly
2Ask and answer according to the pictures What colour is it It’s…
3Read unit 3 smoothly
Step 12 A song
Learn to sing the song What colour after class
新外研英语七年级Starter部分Module4 Unit1教案
Unit 1 What day is it today
课型：Listening and speaking
课时：45 minutes
课前预测：They have learnt some everyday English In this Unit they continue to learn some more about it
教学方法：Interactive approach
板书设计：Key words and sentences about everyday English in PPT
教学目标：
1 Master the key words and expressions in Unit 1
2Learn to use the key sentences to ask and answer each other
3Cultivate their ability of creation
教学重难点：
1Key words and expressions
day today Monday Tuesday Wednesday etc
2Key sentences
What day is it today
What day is your favourite day
Etc
3How to use what they have learnt to ask and answer each other
4How to use the key sentences in their real life
教学准备：
PPTpictures on the Internet videotape
教学程：
Step 1 Warming up
1Revise the words and expressions in Module 3
2Revise the key sentencesWhat’s this in English How do you spell it
3Have a quick answer
step2Introduction
1Show some calendars to learn new words of a week and read them togetherespecially pay attention to their pronunciation
2Read all the new words freely give them some help and ask some of them to read them in class
3 Show them a real calendar to ask and answer What day is it today What day is it tomorrow
4Ask some of them to have an action in class
step3Listen and write
Listen to the tape in Part 5 check answers Encouragement should be given
step4Read and answer
1Read Part 1 and answer
awhere are they
b What day is it today
c What day is it tomorrow
2Check answers one by one
step5 Listen and read
1Listen to the tape in Part 1 read after the tape
2Read Part 1 freely give them some helpEncouragement should be given
3Work in groups or pairs to act Part 1
step6Read and match
1 Read and match to finish Part 3 work in pairs to check the answers
2 Read it in class
step7Listen and write
1 Listen to the tape in Part 6 and write their answers
2 Show the answers to check their answersgive more encouragement
3 Ask some of them to read the sentences
step8Ask and answer
Ask and answer to finish Part 7Ask some of them to have an action in classGive them more encouragement
step9Everyday English
Read Everyday English
1What day is it today
2What day is your favourite day
step10Exercises
Do some exercises in class to consolidate what they have learnt in this lesson Encouragement should be given
Step11 Homework
1 Find a real calendar to ask and answer
What day is it today
How do you spell Monday
What day is your favourite day
2Try to read Unit 1 smoothly or recite it
3Additional exercises
Step 12 A Song
Learn to sing the song What’s day after class
新外研英语七年级Starter部分Module4 Unit2教案
Unit 1 What’s the weather like
课型：Listening and speaking
课时：45 minutes
课前预测 In this Unit they’ll continue to learn some more everyday English How to use them may be difficult for them
教学方法：Interactive approach
板书设计：Key words and sentences about everyday English in PPT
教学目标：
1 Master the key words and expressions in Unit 2
2Learn to use the key sentences to communicate each other
3Cultivate their ability of creation
教学重难点：
1Key words and expressions
Spring summer autumn winter warm hot cold cool etc
2Key sentences
What’s the weather like
How is the weather Etc
3How to use what they have learnt to ask and answer each other
教学准备：
PPTpictures on the Internet videotape
教学程：
Step 1 Warming up
Revise Unit 1 by asking some questions
step2Introduction
1Show some pictures to learn the new words and read them togetherespecially pay attention to their pronunciation
2 Read them together encouragement should be given
3Give them some help and ask some of them to read them in class
4Ask them some questions as an inclusion such as
How many seasons are there in a year
What are they
What’s the weather like in…
step3Listen and repeat
1 Listen to the tape in Part 1repeat after the tape together
2 Close their booksask them to spell the words quickly
3 Listen to the tape in Part 2 repeat after the tape Then match the pictures check answers
4 Have a quick test to say a sentences according to the pictures what they see
step4Listen and point
1Listen to the tape in Part 3 repeat
2Read Part 3 with the help of their teacher freely
3Read the dialogue in pairs
4Encourage them to have an action in class
step5Discussion
Work in pairs to have a discussion What’s your favourite season Why Then have an action in class more encouragement should be given
step6Listen and write
Listen to the tape in Part 5 and write the answers on their own check answers one by one Then ask some of them to read their answers in class
step7Inclusion
1 Show the key sentences and read them
2 Find the use of in
Step8Fill a table
1 Go through the map in Part 6 Fill the table
2 Check answers and read them together
Step9Work in pairs
1 Work in pairs to finish Part 6 freely
2 Ask some of them work freely in class
Step 10 Everyday English
Read Everyday English as an inclusion
step10Exercises
Do some exercises in class to consolidate what they have learnt in this lesson Encouragement should be given
Step12 Homework
1Show some season pictures and work in pairs to ask and answer Or they can have a guessing game
2Read Unit 2 smoothly
3Additional exercises
Step 13 A song called The Four Seasons
新外研英语七年级Starter部分Module4 Unit3教案
Unit 1 What’s your favourite sport
课型：Listening and speaking
课时：45 minutes
课前预测：They have learnt some everyday English In this Unit they continue to learn some more about it
教学方法：Interactive approach
板书设计：Key words and sentences about everyday English in PPT
教学目标：
1 Master the key words and expressions in Unit 3
2Learn to use the key sentences to ask and answer each other
3Cultivate their ability of creation
教学重难点：
1Key words and expressions
Sport swimming basketball football table tennis etc
2Key sentences
What’s your favourite sport
Let’s play football after school
Etc
3How to use what they have learnt to ask and answer each other
4How to spell new words according to the phonetic symbols
教学准备：
PPTpictures on the Internet videotape
教学程：
Step 1 Warming up
Revise the four season by a quick answer one by one
step2Introduction
1 Show some pictures about sports to learn different activities and read them togetherespecially pay attention to their pronunciation
2 Read all the new words together then freely
3Questions what’s your favourite sport
Ask them freely help them to answer Football is my favourite sport Or
My favourite sport is football
4Continue to say Football is my favourite sport too Let’s play football after school
Help them to answer OK good idea
step3Inclusion
1 Show some verbs ask them to adding Then check answers
2 Have a small inclusion about the rules
Step4Work in pairs
Work in pairs to finish Part 6 Encouragement should be given
Step5Listen repeat and number
1Listen to the tape in Part 1 repeat
2Listen to the tape in Part 2 number the pictures
Step6Read and answer
1What’s Daming’s favourite sport
Football
2Is football Tony’s favourite sport
Yes it is
3 What’s Betty and Lingling’s favourite sport
Swimming are their favourite sport
step7Listen and read
1 Listen to the tape in Part 3 and read after the tape
2 Read again with the help of their teacher
3 Read freely then work in pairs
step8Listen and number
1 Go through Part 4 listen and write their answers by themselves
2 Check the answers and read the sentences together
Step 9Write
1 Finish Part 5 check answers and read it
2 Listen and write the answers in Part 7 check answers one by one ask them to read their answers together
Step9Exercises
Do some exercises in class to consolidate what they have learnt in this lesson Encouragement should be given
Step10Words and expressions in Module 4
Listen to the tape of words and expressions in Module 3 read after the tape at the same time
Step11 Homework
1A composition My favourite season
Summer is my favourite season
In summer I can play basketball with my friends after school I like swimming
in summer too Summer is a nice season
2Read unit 3 smoothly
Step 12 A song
Learn to sing the song Sports after class
Module 1 My classmates
教学容：Unit 1 Nice to meet you
二课型：Listening and speaking
三教学目标：
知识技：
1运动词be般现时陈述般疑问形式
2运代词Imyyouyourhehissheher
3听懂介绍
4利be动词作简单介绍询问方信息
情感态度价值观：
1 掌握作介绍时英美士中国答惯
2 培养良际交流态度交流时尊重方惯令方感舒服
四教学重难点：
重点：
1 掌握基词汇：Chinese from where year about Ms not hi our American he China What about America England
2 动词be般现时陈述般疑问形式
3 介绍表达方式
难点：
1运 be般现时陈述般疑问形式
2听懂介绍
3利be动词作简单介绍询问方信息
五教学准备：
次课堂听说课采互动式教学法创设真实语境通呈现伴互动组活动等师生生生交流充分体现学生学程中体位教师课堂引导者组织者合作者学生中学会英语综合培养学生英语语言运力教学程中采媒体手段辅助教学利种图片题务贯穿整教学程节课需准备：PPT课件录音机课堂练奖品
六教学程：
教学
步骤
教师活动
学生活动
设计意图
Step One
Warmingup (5’)
Activity 1 Greet the students as usual
T I’m very glad to be here and give you a lesson Just now you are puzzled about my name Now let me try to introduce myself
My name is Ms Mo I’m a teacher I’m from China and I’m Chinese I’m 24 years old Nice to meet you
Activity 2 New words study
Show two pictures of flags and students Make a story about them
T Just now I said I’m from China and I’m Chinese And you are also from China Today I’m going to introduce two of my friends Let’s look at their pictures and guess Where are they from
1Greet the teacher
2 Read these new words and practice this dialogue
A Where are you from
B I’m from England and I’m English I’m from America and I’m American
图片吸引学生兴趣做出介绍引出话题重点句型
利介绍新伴事开展容呈现新单词句型
Step Two
Listening (5’)
Activity 3 Listening and vocabulary
T Now you’ve met Betty and Tony They are my friends and they are now your friends too Would you like to know more about them Let’s listen to the tape and listen what they are talking
Activity 4 Listen and read
T：From this dialogue above we can know that Betty and Tony are students You are students in my class And they are in Ms Li’s class Let’s listen to the tape and see what they are talking about While listening you should think about these two questions as follow
1 Listen and check (√ ) the number of speaker
a) 1 b) 2 c) 3
2 Listen again and check (√ ) the words you hear
class friend
hello name
teacher too
2Students close the book listen to the tape and answer the questions
1 Who are they
2 Is Daming from China
3Read this dialogue after the teacher
简短听力材料完成课文第12部分听力文听力做准备
带着问题合课听课文学生听时候更目性训练学生抓取信息力
Step
Three
Afterlistening practice (10’)
Activity 5 Now check (√) the true sentences
1 Ms Li is from Wuhan
2 Lingling is twelve years old
3 Daming is thirteen years old
4 Tony is not in Class 4
5 Betty is from America
Activity 6 Choose the correct answers
Show some special sentence in the dialogue on the screen (般疑问句)
般疑问句：疑问句种指yesno回答问句
1—Is Daming from Beijing
—Yes he isNo he isn’t
2—Is Lingling from Beijing
—Yes she isNo she isn’t
3—Is Tony from America
—Yes he isNo he isn’t
4—Is Betty English
—Yes she isNo she isn’t
5—Are you from China
—Yes I amNo I’m not
Activity 7 Complete the passage
Teacher read the new words first and students read after the teacher
Betty Tony Daming and Lingling are (1) in Class 4 (2) 7 Betty is from (3)
and Tony is from (4) Daming and Lingling are (5)
1Students do this exercise by themselves first
2Next check their answers with partners and find the original sentences in the dialogue
3Try to correct the wrong ones
4Then the teacher asks students to say out their answers
1Students do this exercise by themselves
2Check the answers with the whole class
3Pair work
Students ask and answer these dialogues with partners
Teacher asks some pairs to make a presentation in front of the whole class
1Students do this exercise by themselves first
2Then the teacher ask some students to read their version
3Show the answers on the screen and explain the key points
4Read the short passage together
通句子正误判断文章中找出原句环节训练学生听力材料中提取信息力
活动说活动通问答形式进步检查学生话容理解时学be动词般现时般疑问句
通短文填空学生运话中出现重点词汇考查重点词语信息掌握方面考查学生短文理解力
Step Four
Consolidation (9’)
Activity 8 Language points
1 I’m from Wuhan武汉
里be from表示里
外：be from come from
eg They are from England
They come from England
注意：I’m from China and I’m Chinese
中国中国
2． I’m twelve years old 十二岁
表述年龄表示 ……岁省略
3． What about you呢？
4．Welcome to…欢迎……
eg Welcome to our school
5． be verbs
T Pay attention to the red words is am are these three are called be verbs Can you make a conclusion about their usage？ When do we use is am are let the students think about this question for a while and answer together
6． 列句：两更意思关系紧密句子合成句子形成列句分句and连接
eg I’m your teacher and you are my students
1Take notes write down the key points
2Translation
1 学生I’m a student
2 12岁 He is twelve years old
3 身体They are very well
4 男孩You are a boy
5 女孩She is a girl
6 狗 It is a dog
3Conclusion
be 动词法歌
amareIs 连着单数名词is复数名词全are
变否定容易benot 加变疑问前提首句写关键末句问号莫忘记
4Practice
Use is or isn’t are or aren’t to fill in the blanks(is or isn’t are or aren’t 填空）
1) Lingling Chinese
2) She English
3) Lingling and Daming teachers
4) They students
Find more sentences in the dialogue and read them（寻找列句）
次课文中重点句型进行梳理整合结合适练学生时条理吸收新知识加运时培养学生记笔记总结纳学策略
Step Five
Speaking （10’）
Activity9 Summary and pair work
T Today we have learned how to ask personal information Do you still remember them Let’s try together
The teacher asks some pairs to show in front of the whole class
Activity 10 Self introduction
T Boys and girls did you notice that if we put the answers to the questions together we can make a self introduction So now let’s try to do it You can follow these sentence structures
Give students 3 minutes and ask 2 of them to make a show
2Let the students to choose the best team in this lesson
1) A What’s your name
My name is …
2) A Are you English Chinese American
Yes I am No I’m not I’m… I’m from…
3) A How old are you
I’m…years old
4) A What class are you in
I’m in Class… Grade…
5) A Nice to meet you
Nice to meet you too
Practice this dialogue with their partners
Teacher asks some pairs to show in front of the class
Hello class My name is … I’m from … and I’m …I’m a student I’m … years old I’m in Class… Grade… Nice to meet you Thank you
Students practice by themselves
Then two students make a self introduction in front of the class
通桌问答方式学生掌握听力活动中展示语法句法更重交际中学会介绍获取细节性信息
呈现环节充分激发学生思维情感踊跃发言
Step Six
Home
work
（1’）
Homework
1 Listen to the tape and read after it three times
2 Finish the exercises of Unit 1
3 Preview the second unit
Finish the homework
课作业助学生巩固已学知识补充方面锻炼
板书
设计
Module 1 My classmates
Unit 1 Nice to meet you
1) A What’s your name
My name is …
2) A Are you English Chinese American
Yes I am No I’m not I’m… I’m from…
3) A How old are you I’m…years old
4) A What class are you in I’m in Class… Grade…
5) A Nice to meet you
Nice to meet you too
达标训练题（满分100分）
单项选择 （50分）
( ) 1 Zhang Ling and I are thirteen years old ______ are friends
A They B You C We
( ) 2 Tom is from ______ and he is ______
A English England B England English C English English
( ) 3 —Nice to meet you
—_____
A Nice to meet you too B Good afternoon C Goodbye
( ) 4 —Where are you from
—______
A I’m in Class One B I’m Li Lei C I’m from Shenzhen
( ) 5 Beijing is a big ______
A city B school C class
二句子改错 （50分）
面句画线部分中处错误请指出改正
1 Lingling is twelve and she is in class 2
A B C
2 Mr Smith is from America but he is a teacher
A B C
3 Miss Li Lingling and Daming is all Chinese
A B C
4 David is from England and she is in China
A B C
5 There are twenty nine students in our class
A B C
Book1 Module1My classmates
教学容：Unit2 I m Wang Lingling and I’m thirteen years old
二 课型：Reading and writing
三 教学目标：
1够正确列单词词组：but everyone capital last name first namebigsmall
2够读懂介绍短文
3够进行介绍介绍
4区交流时学会尊重域表达惯理解
四 教学重难点：
1掌握课新词词组
2掌握中外姓名表达惯：first name last name
3够进行简单介绍
五 教学准备：
课堂整体运务型教学模式 创设真实语境通呈现伴互动组活动等师生生生交流充分体现学生学程中体位教师课堂引导者组织者合作者课指导学生通阅读获取信息培养学生阅读技教学程中采媒体手段辅助教学利种图片题务贯穿整教学程节课需准备：PPT课件课堂练表格奖品
六 教学程：
教学
步骤
教师活动
学生活动
设计意图
Step One
Warmingup (3’)
Lead in
Play a piece of music and then show some pictures about the stars include some simple personal information
T
Who is shehe
Where is shehe from
How old is shehe
1 Answer the questions in the whole classlike this SheHe is…SheHe is from…SheHe is…years old…
2Answer the questions in person
节课复激发学生兴趣直接效学生思维引介绍话题学生轻松愉快气氛中进入课学
Step Two
Pre
reading
(8’)
Activity 2 New words study
1Lead the students to learn the new words in groups
2Show the sentences about the new words in this unit and some pictures
3Choose the little teacher to teach the new words and the teacher correct the mistakes
4Check the exercise in Activity 1
1Learn the new words in groups
2Fill in the blanks
Check the answers with the whole class
3Little teacher to teach the new wordsThe others to read after the little teacher
4Competitive in the whole class
组学单词体现学生体位全班学参中通图片创设情景学新单词加深学生新单词记忆增加学生学趣味性老师带读锻炼学生丰富课堂教学形式完成导学案词汇练加强学词汇巩固运学生扫清阅读障碍
Step Three
While
reading (20’)
1 Scanning
(1)Ask students to scan
the passage
T How many students are there in this passage
T Read quickly and tell me who they are
2 Skimming
Ask students to skim the passage and check (√) the true sentences and then correct the false sentences
3Careful reading
(1) Paragrap1
①Choose the best answers
T Now please look at paragraphs 1 and choose the best answers of the two questions
②Let the students read Paragraph 1 in groups of six and find out difficulties
③Solve difficulties
T Let’s continue learning Paragraph 2
(2) Paragraph 2
①Present some sentences to the students and ask them to write T or F also correct the wrong sentences after reading Paragraph 2
②Ask a student to be a little teacher to check the answers
③ Let one team students read Paragraph 2 and the other students listen carefully to point out important points
④Solve difficulties
T The last paragraph is talking about Tony Smith Let’s read and know more about him
(3)Paragraph 3
①Let the students fill in the blanks after reading Paragraph 3
②Let the students to check the answers in groups first and then competive
③Ask a group of six students to read paragraph 3 Let the other students listen carefully and find out difficulties
④Solve difficulties
T Let’s read the passage together
(4)Ask the students
read the passage
together make sure they
understand the passage
(1)Scan the passage and answer like this
Ss Three
Ss David Lingling Tony Smith
Group competition
（2）Read the passage and check (√) the true sentences and then correct the false sentences by themselves
1 Henry is Daming’s English name
2 Lingling’s English name is Linda
3 Daming is twelve years old
4 Wang Hui is from Beijing
5 Tony is twelve years old
6 Tony is from the capital of England
(1) Read paragrap1
①Choose the best answers
1Where is the capital of China
AEngland
B China
2How old is Lucy
A She is twelve years old
B We don’t know
C She is from Beijing
②Read Paragraph 1 in groups of six and find out difficulties
③Solve the difficulties together
(2)Read the paragraph 2 also correct the wrong sentences
①write T or F after reading Paragraph 2
1 Wang Lingling is twelve years old( )
2 Wang Lingling and Wang Hui are in the same class( )
3 Henry is from Shanghai and it’s a samll city ( )
②A student to be a little teacher to check the answers Others try their best to answer the questions
③One team students read Paragraph 2 and the other students point out difficulties points
④To say the difficulties
and solve together
(3)Read the Paragraph 3
① Fill in the blanks
after reading paragraph 3
My name is ______ _______
I’m from__________It’s a _____city in England Tony is my ______name and Smith is my ________nameI’m thirteen______old It’s nice to_____ you all
②The students check the answers in groups first and then competive
③A group of six students to read paragraph 3 The other students listen carefully and find out difficulties
④Say the difficulties and solve them
(4)The students read the
passage together to make sure
understand the passage
求学生快速阅读课文整体握课文容
通学生快速阅读培养学生获取旨力 进步学做铺垫
学生带着务（问题）阅读课文找答案助学生更加准确获取信息提高阅读效果技学生通分层次阅读文章获取具体信息知识点课文理解分段学突破组活动通学生间合作学学生充分实践运语言激发学生创造性思维发展
Step Four
Post
reading
(6’)
1Retell
①Let the students fill
in the blanks according
to the picture
②Call back the answers
from two students then
read the short passage
in the whole class
2Speaking
① Ask and answer about the people in the pictures
②Ask some students to come to the blackboard and introduce themselvesand their friends
the others listen and retell
1 Look at the picture
and the table to fillin the blanks
Li Daming’s ________ name is David He is _______ years old and he is fromBeijing Beijing is ______ _________ _____ ChinaWang Lingling is_______ years old Wang Hui is ______ friend He’s______ Shanghai Shanghai is a big _____ Tony Smith is from______ He is _______Tony is______ first name and Smith is his _____ name
Pair work
①One ask and one answer Check in groups
②Ready in groups of sixListen carefully and retell
复述课文学生加深课文容理解
适量口头练学生巩固课时语言重点锻炼口头表达力
Step Five
Summary（2’）
1Get the students to
sum up the language points
T What have we learned today
Ss……
2Let the students to choose the best team in this lesson
1Sum up the language points
2To choose the best groups
引导学生节课总结学生做发言培养学生学总结良学惯
简短评价学生课堂表现肯定激励学生学兴趣树立学英语信心
Step Six
Home
work
（1’）
采访两新学分问问题：
What＇s your name
Where are you from
How old are you
What＇s your favourite subject
采访记录整理成篇My new classmates短文（适增加采访问题全文少60单词）
Finish the homework
课作业助学生巩固已学知识补充方面锻炼写作阅读拓展学生终完全掌握语言实践运语言
七 板书设计：
Module 1 Unit 2 I m Wang Lingling and I’m thirteen years old
What’s your name My name is…
Where are you from I’m from…
Nice to meet you … Nice to meet you too
达标训练题(100分)
阅读文章中找出重信息填写面表格（50分）
My name is Jim Green I am twelve I am not from China and I am not Chinese I am English but I am a student in a Chinese middle school I am in Class 3 Grade 1
Li Ping is my friend He is thirteen He is Chinese He is from Hunan He is not in Class Three He is in Class 1 We are good friends
Read the passage again Find the important information and then fill in the table below
Name
Age
Country(国家)
Class
Jim Green
twelve
(1)__ ____
(2)______ Grade 1
Li Ping
(3)______
(4)______
(5)______ Grade 1
二Write sentences for you （50分）
1)_____________________________________________________
2)______________________________________________________
3)______________________________________________________
4)_______________________________________________________
5）______________________________________________________
Book1 Module 1 My classmates
八 教学容：Unit3 Language in use
九 课型：Revision and application
十 教学目标：
1 正确运模块词汇：Chinese from where year about American all capital England about What about first name last name等
2 运动词be般现时陈述句般疑问句形式运代词I my you your he his she her
3 be动词做简单介绍询问方信息
4 掌握英美国家姓名表达方式中国掌握作介绍时英美士中国答惯
十 教学重难点：
够运学句型结构朋友介绍情况
十二 教学准备：
节课型Revision and application根新课标求结合教材学生特点采务型互动式进行教学结合情景法交际法听说法纳法等教学方法实施课堂活动开启学生思维通系列条理教学活动引导学生探究学互动合作学学生体验愉快学节课需教具资料：PPT图片等
十三 教学程：
教学步骤
教 师 活 动
学 生 活 动
活 动 目
1 Leadingin
（7’）
1Show the pictures and ask the students to make dialogues to introduce three people to your class
2Give instructions of word game
1The students act out the dialogues in pairs introduce the three pepole to the class with the pictures
2 Play a word game a little teacher others give the answers
1Review and consolidate the usage of the present simple be and I he she my his her you your it our
2Review and consolidate the new words
2 Whiletask(17’)
1 Ask the students to write the grammar they have leant in this module as many as they can
The teacher give some examples
2Let the students do Activity 2 and then check the answers
Students finish it by themselves like this
动词Be般现时：
1 肯定句：语+ be(amisare) +
2 否定句：语+be+not+
3 般疑问句：Be+语+？
4 特殊疑问句：疑问词+般疑问句？
动词Be常句式：
1 be + 形容词
I am very happy 幸福
He is very kind 非常
2 be + 名词
Mr Wang is our English teacher
王先生英语老师
They are our good friends
朋友
3 be + 介词短语
She is at home 家里
Are you from America 美国？
The book is on the desk 书桌子
4 be + 副词 Class is over 课
2Do Activity 2 look at the pictures in Activity 1 and complete the sentences
Then check the answers with the partners
Review and consolidate the grammar in this modulel
3 Let the students do Activity 3 and then check the answers
4Let the students do Activity 4 and then check the answers
3 Do Activity3 Complete the conversation Then ask two students to check the answersRead in whole class
4 Do Activity3 Complete the table The students will have a match for it
5Around the world
Ask the students to learn the differnce expression of names
And fill in the form
The students will be given three minutes to fill in the form
Three students will have a match for it on the blackboard
To know the differnce expression of names
Family nameLast name
Given nameFirst name
Yang Liwei
Bill Gates
Li Ming
Tony Smith
3 Posttask
(19’)
1 Organization
2 Organization
1Students work in groups of sixAsk and answer questionsUsing the questions in the text and writing down their best friends’ information
2 Make a report about their best friends’ information Then share with the class
1To practice the skill of speaking
2 Enable students to talk about themselves and their friends
3 Ask the students to write a short passage in the test
4 Organization
3Write a short passage in the test Using the information in the table to help you
4 Some students share their passage with the class See who is the best
To practice the skill of writing
4 Summary
(1’)
Ask the students to conclude the usage of the present simple be and I he she my his her you your it our
Students conclude the usage of the usage of the present simple be and I he she my his her you your it our
Let the students internalize the grammar they’ve learned in this module
5 Homework（1’）
查找资料名资料全班学介绍心目中喜爱英明星
尊敬少60字
板书设计
板书设计 Module 1 Unit 3 Language in use
What’s your name My name is…
Where are you from I’m from…
How old are you I’m …years old
达标训练题（100分）
空白处填适单词（50分）
1 He is ____ Beijing and he is ___ my class
2 I’m from _____ and I’m _______
3 Lingling is not from _______ and she
isn’t _______
4 Tom is _____ （15岁）years old
5 We ___ students We ____ _____ Beijing
二假设Ann请根表格材料提示I’m Ann题学作介绍少50单词（50分）
Name
安
Age
14
From
America
Class
七年级班
Languages
英语汉语
Family
父亲母亲弟弟
Book1 Module 2 My Family
教学容：Unit 1 Is this your mum
二 课型：Listening and speaking
三 教学目标：
1 To talk about your family members
2 To listen and understand familiar topic
3 To learn some key words and useful expressions
四 教学重难点：
1单词词组：brother cousin daughter family grandfather parent son sister uncle a photo of… in front of… on the left next to
2听读关介绍家庭简短话辨认话中物关系
3指示代词介绍家庭询问家庭情况
五 教学准备：
课指导学生通听力获取信息培养学生听力技课堂采媒体手段辅助教学轻松愉快氛围中较真实语境联系学生生活实际结合已知识验运学语言基础知识学互相学学生语言实践中相互启发生成体验成功培养学生合作精神发展思维想象等力教学程中采媒体手段辅助教学利种图片题务贯穿整教学程节课需准备：PPT课件挂图录音机课堂练表格奖品
六 预求：
根音标学课新单词
七 教学程：
教学
步骤
教师活动
学生活动
设计意图
Step One
Warmingup (3’)
Lead in
1 First ：let the students see a video It is a song about familyAnd then answer
1How many people are there in the video
2Who are they
Second Greeting Free talk to lead in our today’s module (Module2 My family Unit 1
Is this your mum )
1 Enjoy the video and try to answer the questions
2 Talk with the teacher and partners
学生喜欢动画首歌曲导入新课学生进入英语氛围中激发学生学兴趣利进入新课学中
Step Two
Pretask(5’)
Task1Check the new words
1 Let the students see the screen
A boy Tony and then study the new words(about his family)
2Organize the students to read the new words together
3Check the students’ new words learning according to the Activity 1
1See the pictures and things to say out the new words
2 Read the new words together
3 Check the students’ new words learning according to the Activity 1
利媒体生动形象学生展示新单词学生轻松环境学会单词通图片情景学单词做词离句
Step Three
Whiletask (20’)
Task2listening
(1) Play the tape ask students to listen and check the people Tony mentions(Activity 2)
(2)Guide the students to listen to the conversation and choose the correct answer (Activity3)
Task 3 Reading
(1) Organize the students to read the conversation with the video
(2)Ask the Ss to work with their groups to read the conversation
(3) Organize the students to underline the correct words
(4)Organize the students to check their answers one by one
（Activity 4）
Task 4 Solve the language points
(1)Organize students to come to the blackboard and show out some difficult language points that they found
(2)Help the students to solve the difficult points
Task5 Show some photos of my family(introduce the teacher’s family members )
(1) Listen and check the people Tony mentions (Activity 2)
(2)Listen to the conversation and choose the correct answer Then check
(1)Read the conversation with the video
(2) Read the conversation in groups
(3) Underline the correct words（Activity 4）
(4) Check the answers one by one
(1) Students come to the blackboard to show out some language points the other students listen to them carefully and note
(2)solve the difficult points with the teacher’s help
Listen and appreciate (欣赏)some pictures about the teacher’s family members )
利听读练方式加强学生课文理解培养学生细节听力技巧够听取信息训练培养学生细节听力技巧
通视频听读话帮助学生进步理解课文容
组活动通学生间合作学学生充分实践运语言培养团结合作精神
通学生台展示找语言点培养学生胆量培养学力
教师点拨补充语言点学生进步理解知识点
环节老师通介绍家庭帮学生复刚刚学容吸引学生兴趣接学生做话做铺垫
Step Four
Posttask
(9’)
Task 6Do some speaking
(1) Show some photos of your family and talk about your family with your family
(2) Have the Ss come to the blackboard and show out their photos of their family And then make dialogues with partners
(1) Ask students to do some
Exercises and then check
(1) Make dialogues in pairs with the teacher’s help
(2) Act out the new dialogues
(3)Do the exercises then check
通做话训练学生说力学生加深课文容理解适量口头练学生巩固课时语言重点
通笔头练进步巩固学
Step Five
Summary（2’）
1Get the students to sum up the language points
T What have we learned today
Ss……
2Let the students to choose the best team in this lesson
1Sum up the language points
2To choose the best groups
引导学生节课总结学生做发言培养学生学总结良学惯
简短评价学生课堂表现肯定激励学生学兴趣树立学英语信心
Step Six
Home
work
（1’）
想象家庭样少女少孙子孙女请画出family tree 学描述出
Finish the homework
课作业助学生巩固已学知识补充方面锻炼
板书
设计
Module2 My Family 组评价
八 Unit1 Is this your mum
T1 T2 T3
Example There are three people in my family They are my father my mother and I My father is forty seven years old My mother is forty six years old Both of them are workers
Let the students introduce their families
A Is this your mumdad
B Yes it is this is my
A Are those your grandparents
B Yes they areNo they aren’t
A Who’s this
B That’s my
A What a happy family
B Thank you
达标训练题
单词练练
祖父 外祖父 gr_nd_ather
祖母 外祖母g_andm_ther
父亲 fa__er
母亲 moth__
兄弟 b__ther
姐 妹 s_s_er
姨 伯母 au_t
叔叔 伯伯 un__e
二根首字母完成单词
1 It is a p____ of Tony’s family
2 How m___ people are there in Lingling’s family
3 Daming’s sister is on the l__
4 Tony’s a___ is next to his u____
三根汉语提示完成句子
1 妹妹医生站旁边
___ sister is a _____ She is standing ___ __ me
2 奶奶美国名公汽车司机
___ grandma is ____ America She’s a bus _____
3 新行车片
Look _____ ___ _____ ______ of my new bike
4 妈妈紧挨着爸爸
His mother is ____ __ his father
四方框中选出合适词填空
her we our my his she he
My name’s Rebecca These are ___ friends There are from different countries Susan is American ___ father is a doctor Mike isn’t Chinese ___is English ___ mother is a teacher ___ is ___ English teacher ___ are her students
Book 1 Module 2 My Family
教学容：Unit2 These are my parents
二 课型：Reading and writing
三 教学目标：
1To read the passage aloud and find specific information about people
2To learn some key words and useful expressions
3To write personal information using punctuation (capital letters and full stops) correctly
四 教学重难点：
1阅读介绍物职业工作点简短文章
2写出简短句子介绍家庭成员正确运写句号
3运指示代词名词格运称代词格形式形容词性物代词
五 教学准备：
课堂整体运务型教学模式阅读课四阶段教学模式课指导学生通阅读获取信息培养学生阅读技教学程中采媒体手段辅助教学利种图片题务贯穿整教学程节课需准备：PPT课件挂图录音机课堂练表格奖品
六 预求：
根音标学课新单词
七 教学程：
教学
步骤
教师活动
学生活动
设计意图
Step One
Warmingup (5’)
1Lead in
Look and say
Look at a picture and say
Who’s this
This is …
What’s your father’s mother’ job
HeShe is …
2．Work in pairs
Ask the students to make dialogues with partners
according to activity 6
1What’s your father’s name
2 What’s your father’s job
3 What’s your mother’s name
4 What’s your mother’s job
Look at a picture and answer the questions according to the picture
Make dialogues with their partners according to the activity 6
1 What’s your father’s name
2 What’s your father’s job
3 What’s your mother’s name
4 What’s your mother’s job
通图片回答问题引导学生回顾节课容引入课相关容
通环节说句子中考验学生知识掌握程度训练学生反应形中培养学生胆说英语惯
Step Two
Pre
reading
(5’)
1Label the places in the pictures with the words and expressions from the box
2Label the people in Activity 1 with the words and expression from the box（activity 2）
1 Label the places in the pictures with the words and expressions from the box Then check
2 Label the people in Activity 1 and then check
引导学生标注课文图片中工作点职业学新单词时通图片学生进步解相关职业学生扫清阅读障碍
Step Three
While
reading (18’)
1 Scanning
(1)Ask students to scan
the passage and write the letters of the pictures in Activity 1
2 Skimming
Ask students to skim the passage and complete the table in Activity 4
3Careful reading
(1)Paragraph 12
①Choose the best answers
T Please read paragraph12 and choose the best answers in groups
1Scan the passage and write the letters of the pictures in Activity 1
2Skim the passage and complete the table in Activity 4
①Read paragraph1 and choose the best answers in groups
求学生快速阅文章完成相关务帮助学生理解课文容
通学生快速阅读培养学生获取旨力进步理解文章容 进步学做铺垫
学生带着务（问题）阅读课文找答案助学生更加准确获取信息提高阅读效果技学生通分层次阅读文章获取具体信息知识点课文理解分段学突破
1) Betty is from ______
A America B England C China
2) Betty’s mother works at a _
A hotel B school C theatre
3) Daming’s father is ________
A a nurse B a policeman C an actor
②Organize some students to come to the blackboard and show out some difficult language points that they found in these paragraphs
(2)Paragraph 34
①Read paragraph 34 and check the true sentences
②Some students come to the blackboard and show out some difficult language points that they found in these paragraphs
①Students check the true sentences about paragraph 34
also correct the wrong sentences
1 Tony is from England
2 Tony’s mother teaches Chinese at a school
3 Lingling’s mother works at a but station
②Organize some students to come to the blackboard and show out some difficult language points that they found in these paragraphs
②Some students come to the blackboard and show out some difficult language points that they found in these paragraphs
Step Four
Post
reading
(10’)
1 Organize the Ss to introduce Betty Daming Tony and Lingling with the information in the table in Activity 4
2 Activity 6 Have the Ss to work in pairs asking and answering the questions
3 Writing（Activity 5）
①Look at the sentences and underline capital letters and full stops
②Ask some students to show out their answers
③explain the use of capital letters and full stops
1 Introduce Betty Daming Tony and Lingling with the information in the table in Activity 4 one by one
2 Asking and answering the questions in pairs in Activity 6 Then introduce their partner’s father and mother
3 Show out their answers and take a note
通完成课练加强刚学课文容巩固时学写字母句号法
Step Five
Summary（1’）
1Get the students to
sum up the language points
T What have we learned today
Ss……
2 Let the students to choose the best team in this lesson
1Sum up the language points
2To choose the best groups
引导学生节课总结学生做发言培养学生学总结良学惯
简短评价学生课堂表现肯定激励学生学兴趣树立学英语信心
Step Six
Home
work
（1’）
Write down your family (3050字)
a bigsmall family there are people grandma grandpa mother father uncle aunt sister brother cousin job worker teacher
Finish the homework and review the new words and expressions
课作业助学生巩固已学知识写作阅读拓展学生终掌握语言实践运语言
八 板书设计：
Module2 My Family 组评价
Unit 2 These are my parents T1 T2 T3
Work in pairs
This is …
SheHe is from …
My mother is…
My father’s job is …
SheHe works at …
达标训练题
根句意写单词
1 Dad’s mum is a nurse She’s at a _______
2 My dad is a ______ He works at a school
3 Daming’s uncle is a manager He works in a ____
4 Linda is my mother’s sister she is my ____
5 My father is a _________ His job is at a police station
二单词适形式填空
1 There ____ (be) 30 students in my class
2 We see many ______ (doctor) in the hospital
3 How many ______ (person) are there in your family
4 He is Tom Give ____ (he) the English book
5 This is ______ (Betty) family picture
三句型转换
1 There are 5 people in my family（变般疑问句作肯定回答）
__ ___ 5 people in your family
Yes there is
2 These are Betty’s grandparents（划线部分提问）
______ grandparents are these
3 He is a doctor（a teacher改选择疑问句）
__ he a doctor __ __ _______
4 Thank you for your help（改义句）
Thank you for _______ ___
5 Is this your grandmother（作肯定回答）
Yes _ __
Book1 Module 2 My Family
教学容：Unit3 Language in use
二 课型：Revision and application
三 教学目标：
1 正确运模块词汇指示代词名词格
2 正确运称代词格形式形容词性物代词
3 够家谱形式画出家庭结构图学介绍家庭说基础够落实笔头够写短文介绍家庭
四 教学重难点：
指示代词称代词格形式形容词性物代词
五 教学准备：
节课型Revision and application根新课标求结合教材学生特点采务型互动式进行教学结合情景法交际法听说法纳法等教学方法实施课堂活动开启学生思维通系列条理教学活动引导学生探究学互动合作学学生体验愉快学节课需教具资料：幻灯图片等
六 教学程：
教学步骤
教 师 活 动
学 生 活 动
活 动 目
1 Leadingin
（8’）
1 Ask the students to work in pairs ask and answer questions about the families make dialogues like these(Activity 1)
Is this your family
Yes it is
Are these your grandparents
Yes they are
1The students act out the dialogues in pairs using the following sentences
Is this your family
Yes it is
Are these your grandparents
Yes they are …
Review and consolidate the sentences which they have learn
2 Whiletask(20’)
1 Ask the students to do Activity 2
Look at the pictures and talk about the families
① Lily’s family
② Jack’s family
③ Li Ming’s family
Eg This is Lily’s family Her father is a doctor and her mother is a nurse Her grandfather…
1 Look at the pictures and talk about the families
① Lily’s family
② Jack’s family
③ Li Ming’s family
Review and consolidate the vocabulary and language just learned in the first two units
2
Let the students do Activity 2 and then check the answers
3Ask students to
finish Activity 345
4 Ask students to read Around the world and then answer the questions after reading
2 Do Activity 2
Look at the pictures and complete the sentences with this that these those Then check the answers with the partners
3 Finish Activity 345 and then check it together
Read Around the world and answer the questions after reading
通练巩固学知识
Enlarge the knowledge about the world
3 Posttask
(10’)
1 Ask students to work in pairs
(activity 6)
Draw your family tree Work in pairs Talk about each other’s family
2Ask the students to act out their conversations
3Let students do some exercises and then check
1Work in pairs
Draw your family tree Work in pairs Talk about each other’s family (activity 6)
2Act out your conversations
3 Do some exercises and then check
1To practice the skill of speaking
2 Enable students to talk about their family
Practice the language points
4 Summary
(1’)
Ask the students to say out what to learn
Students conclude the knowledge that they learn
Let the students internalize the grammar they’ve learned in this module
5 Homework（1’）
Write about your family
My father is a(n)…at…
板书设计
Module 2 My Family
Unit3 Language in use
达标训练题
根句意完成句子
1 __ _____ any bread in the box
2 She doesn’t ____ a nice kite
3 Under the tree _____ ___ some women drinking tea
4 ___ _____ any cakes in your bag
5 ___ _____ your parents
二根括号求改写列句子
1 There are five people in my family (划线部分提问)
____________________________
_____________________________
2 This is my parent (改成复数形式句子)
_____________________________
3 His brother works at a factory (变般疑问句)
____________________________
4 This is David’s sister (变否定句)
____________________________
5 This is a big family (变感叹句)
____________________________
三根汉语意思完成英语句子空词数限
1 贝蒂妈妈医院工作
Betty’s mother _____ at a _______
2 姐姐警察局工作
His _____ works at a _____ ______
3 祖父母没中国
His grandparents aren’t in China ____ ___
4 家口？
________________________ in your family
5 妈妈姨姨？
Is she ______________________
6 爷爷奶奶？
____ these ____________
Book 1 Module 3 My school
十四 教学容：Unit 1 There are thirty students in my class
十五 课型：Listening and speaking
十六 教学目标：
1正确运单元词汇短语：computer furniture map picture television wall thirty forty fifty sixty seventy eighty ninety really many how many there a lot of any world
2听懂介绍学校简单话
3掌握there be句型肯定否定般疑问特殊疑问句式相应回答运句型介绍教室样子
4学描述理想教室样子理想教室样子设想等
十七 教学重难点：
掌握there be句型肯定否定般疑问特殊疑问句式相应回答运句式介绍教室样子
五教学准备：
课指导学生通听力获取信息培养学生听力技课堂采媒体手段辅助教学轻松愉快氛围中较真实语境联系学生生活实际结合已知识验运学语言基础知识学互相学学生语言实践中相互启发生成体验成功培养学生合作精神发展思维想象等力教学程中采媒体手段辅助教学利种图片题务贯穿整教学程节课需准备：PPT课件挂图录音机课堂练表格奖品
六 预求：
根音标学课新单词
七 教学程：
教学
步骤
教师活动
学生活动
设计意图
Step One
Warmingup (3’)
Lead in
1Free talk
(1)Show some pictures and ask Ss like these
What’s in the picture
IsAre there …
What’s in the classroom
There isare …
(2)Show more pictures and let Ss talk about them and learn some new words try to use the sentences with There isare…
1 Answer the questions
2 Talk with partners learn some new words and try to use the sentences with There isare
学生free talk程中感受新语言项目通环节活跃课堂气氛调动学生学兴趣
Step Two
Pretask(5’)
Task1 Check the new words
1 Show some pictures and things to get the students to say out the new words
2 Organize the students to read the new words together
3Ask the Ss to describe the pictures and try to use the words in the box(Activity 1)
1 Look at the pictures and things to say out the new words
2 Read the new words together
3 To describe the pictures and try to use the words in the box(Activity 1)
引导学生谈实物ppt图片检查学生词汇掌握程度训练学生表达力通图片情景学单词做词离句Check完词汇时做Activity 1进行巩固
Step Three
Whiletask (20’)
Task2listening
(1)Ask the Ss to read the numbers in the box in Activity 2 and match the words with numbers in Activity 6
(1) Play the tape ask the students to listen and choose the correct picture in Activity 1 (Activity 2)
(2)Organize the students to check their answers
(3)Guide the students to listen to the conversation and complete the table(Activity 3)
T Here’s the dialogue about Linda’s and Daming’s classrooms Let’s listen and complete the table
(4)Organize the students to check their answers
Task 3 Reading
(1) Organize the students to read the conversation with the video
(2)Ask the Ss to work with their groups to read the conversation
(3) Have a competition Read the dialogue in groups and choose the best group
Task 4 Solve the language points
(1)Organize students to come to the blackboard and show out some difficult language points that they have found
(2)Help the students to solve the difficult points
(1)Read the numbers aloud and match the words with the numbers in Activity 6
(1) Listen to the tape and choose the correct picture in Activity 1 (Activity 2)
(2) Check the answers
(3) Listen to the conversation and complete the table(Activity 3)
(4)Check the answers
(1)Read the conversation with the video
(2) Read the conversation in groups
(3) Read the dialogue in groups and choose the best group
(1) Students come to the blackboard to show out some language points the other students listen to them carefully and make notes
(2)Solve the difficult points with the teacher’s help
利听读练方式加强学生课文理解培养学生细节听力技巧够听取信息训练培养学生细节听力技巧
通视频听读话帮助学生进步理解课文容
组活动通学生间合作学学生充分实践运语言培养团结合作精神
通学生台展示找语言点培养学生胆量培养学力
教师点拨补充语言点学生进步理解知识点
Step Four
Posttask
(9’)
Task 6Do some speaking
(1) Get the Ss to talk about Linda’s and Daming’s class with the information in the table in Activity 3 in groups then individual
（2）Ask students to talk about their ideal classroom
A How many … are there in your classroom
B There are…
A Is there a …
B Yes there isNo there isn’t
(3) Have the Ss act out their new dialogues
(4) Organize the Ss to talk about their ideal classroom
(5) Ask students to do some
exercises and then check
(1) Try to talk about Linda’s and Daming’s class with the information in the table in Activity 3 in groups then individual
（2）Make dialogues in groups with the teacher’s help And write down the information in the table in Activity 7
(3) Act out the new dialogues
(4) Talk about their ideal classroom in groups then individual
(5)Do the exercises then check
培养学生表达力引导记住话容
通做话训练学生说力学生加深课文容理解适量口头练学生巩固课时语言重点
通笔头练进步巩固学
Step Five
Summary（2’）
1 Get the students to sum up the language points
T What have we learned today
Ss…
2 Let the students choose the best team in this lesson
1 Sum up the language points
2 To choose the best team
引导学生节课总结学生做发言培养学生学总结良学惯
简短评价学生课堂表现肯定激励学生学兴趣树立学英语信心
Step Six
Home
work
（1’）
Write a passage about their ideal classroom
Write a passage about their ideal classroom
课作业助学生巩固已学知识补充方面锻炼
板书
设计
Module 3 My school 组评价
八 Unit 1 There are thirty students in my class
What’s in your classroom T1 T2 T3
There is are ________
How many students are there in your class
There are sixty
达标训练题
单项选择
（ ）1 There _______ 21 boys in our class
A am B is C are
（ ）2 There aren’t _______ computers on our desks
A some B any C much
（ ）3 Are there any books on your desk _________
A Yes there is B Yes there are C Yes they are
（ ）4 There a pen and some rulers on the desk
A is B are C have
（ ）5The teacher asks us to listen to him
A in the class B in class C at class
二根汉语完成句子空词
1．班四十六学生
______ ______ 46 students _______ ______ ________
2．李老师桌子台电脑？
______ _______ a computer on ______ _______ _________
3．班少名女生？
______ _______ _______ are there in _______ _______
Book 1 Module 3 My school
十八 教学容：Unit2 The library is on the left of the playground
十九 课型：Reading and writing
二十 教学目标：
1够正确列单词词组：building hall gate library office playground science lab behind in front of between middle near with for room
2通描述判断出图中物体间位置关系
3正确表示方位介词描述图中物体位置关系
4运学结构介绍学校
二十 教学重难点：
1正确表示方位介词描述图中物体位置关系（重点）
2运学结构介绍学校（难点）
二十二 预求：
根音标学课新单词
二十三 教学准备：
课堂整体运务型教学模式阅读课四阶段教学模式课指导学生通阅读获取信息培养学生阅读技教学程中采媒体手段辅助教学利种图片题务贯穿整教学程节课需准备：PPT课件挂图录音机课堂练表格奖品
二十四 教学程：
教师活动
学生活动
设计意图
Step One
Warmingup (5’)
Lead in
1Free talk
(1) Ask the Ss like these
What’s in the classroom
There isare …
Where is the…
(2)Show a picture of a school and ask the Ss like these
What’s in the picture？
Where is the library
(3)Help the Ss to answer The library is on the left of the playground Show more pictures of different positions
(4) Let the Ss read Betty’s words silently to find where the Ss are sitting
1 Answer the questions
2 Read Betty’s words silently to find where the Ss are sitting and label the names
先引导学生回顾节课容巩固there be结构语句通环节活跃课堂气氛说句子中考验学生方位介词知识掌握程度阅读作准备
Step Two
Prereading(5’)
Check the new words
1 Show some pictures and things to get the students to say out the new words
2 Organize the students to read the new words together
3Ask the Ss to label the pictures with the words and expressions from the box(Activity 1)
1 Look at the pictures and things to say out the new words
2 Read the new words together
3 To label the pictures with the words and expressions from the box(Activity 1)
引导学生谈实物ppt图片检查学生词汇掌握程度训练学生表达力通图片情景学单词做词离句Check完词汇时做Activity 1进行巩固阅读作铺垫
Step Three
Whilereading (20’)
1 Reading
(1) Scanning
Ask the Ss to read the passage and label the map of the school then check the answers
(2) Skimming
Ask students to read the passage again and check the true sentences
(3) Careful reading
Ask the Ss to read the passage again and answer the questions in Activity 4 then check the answers in groups Organize the Ss to check the answers in the whole class
2 Solve the language points
(1)Organize students to come to the blackboard and show out some difficult language points that they have found
(2)Help the students to solve the difficult points
(1)Read the passage and label the map of the school
(2) Check the answers
(1) Read the passage again and check the true sentences
1 There are six buildings in our school( )
2 In the middle of the school is a library( )
3 On the right of classroom is the dining hall( )
(1) Answer the questions
(2) Check the answers in groups
(3) Check the answers in the whole class
(1) Students come to the blackboard to show out some language points the other students listen to them carefully and make notes
(2)Solve the difficult points with the teacher’s help
求学生快速阅读文章标出建筑物名称达训练快速阅读力目
通学生快速阅读培养学生获取旨力进步理解文章容 进步学做铺垫
学生带着务（问题）阅读课文找答案助学生更加准确获取信息提高阅读效果技组活动通学生间合作学学生充分实践运语言激发学生创造性思维发展
通学生台展示找语言点培养学生胆量培养学力
教师点拨补充语言点学生进步理解知识点
Step Four
Postreading
(8’)
1Retell
①Let the Ss fill in the blanks according to the picture
②Call back the answers from two students then the whole class read the short passage
2Writing
①Write sentences about their school
②Ask some students to say out their sentences
①Look at the picture and fill in the blanks
This is a ___ of our school There are __ buildings in our school __________the school is a big playground The _____ is on the left of the playground ____ the library are the school offices The ________ is between this building and the dining hall ______ it is the sports hall and the building in front of that is for _____
②Two students say out the answers the whole class read the short passage together
① Write sentences about their school
②Some students say out their sentences
复述课文学生加深课文容理解
通写作学生巩固学增强写作力适量口头练学生巩固课时语言重点
Step Five
Summary（2’）
1 Get the students to sum up the language points
T What have we learned today
Ss…
2 Let the students choose the best team in this lesson
1 Sum up the language points
2 To choose the best team
引导学生节课总结学生做发言培养学生学总结良学惯
简短评价学生课堂表现肯定激励学生学兴趣树立学英语信心
Step Six
Home
work
（1’）
(1) Write a passage about their school
(2) Finish the exercises in the workbook of Unit 2
Finish the homework
课作业助学生巩固已学知识补充方面锻炼
板书
设计
Module 3 My school 组评价
Unit 2 The library is on the left of the playground T1 T2 T3
Where is the…
on the left on the right
behind in front of
between …and …
in the middle of
达标训练题
完成句子
1 贝蒂玲玲旁边
Betty _____ ______ ______ Lingling
2．明莉莉前面
They _____ _____ _____ ______ Daming and Lily
3 汤姆凯特吉姆面
Tom _____ ______ Kate and Jim
4 —学校办公室？
—办公室
—______ _______ ________ school offices
—Yes there ________ _______ offices
Book 1 Module3 My school
七 教学容：Unit3 Language in use
八 课型：Revision and application
九 教学目标：
1 掌握正确运模块词汇
2 掌握there be句型肯定否定般疑问特殊疑问句式相应回答
运句型介绍事物
3 正确表示方位介词描述物体位置关系
4 提高学英语兴趣树立信心培养积极动参种语言实践活动学态度
十 教学重难点：
运there be句型表方位介词描述介绍学校情况
十 教学准备：
节课型Revision and application根新课标求结合教材学生特点采务型互动式进行教学结合情景法交际法听说法纳法等教学方法实施课堂活动开启学生思维通系列条理教学活动引导学生探究学互动合作学学生体验愉快学节课需教具资料：幻灯图片等
十二 教学程：
教学步骤
教 师 活 动
学 生 活 动
活 动 目
1 Leadingin
（8’）
1 Ask the Ss
What’s the topic of this module
What’s in the school
Show and get the Ss to complete the word map in Activity 3
2 Get the Ss to talk about their school And write some key structures sentences on the blackboard
1 Answer the teacher’s questions and complete the word map
2 Talk about their school with the words on the word map
eg Is there a library in your school
Where is it
How many books are there in it
Review and consolidate the sentences which they have learned
2 Whiletask
2 Let the students do Activity 2 and then check the answers
3Ask students to read Around the world and then answer the questions after reading
2 Do Activity 2 and check the answers
3Read Around the world and answer the questions after reading
Consolidate the prepositions of place
Enlarge the knowledge about the world
3 Posttask
(10’)
2 Ask students to work in groups
Draw a map of your school
2Ask the students to introduce their school
3Let students do some exercises and then check
1Work in groups
Draw a map of their school
2Introduce their school
3 Do some exercises and then check
1To practice the skill of speaking
2 Enable students to talk about their ideal school
3Practice the language points
4 Summary
(1’)
Ask the students to say out what they have learned
Students conclude the knowledge that they have learned
Let the students internalize the grammar they’ve learned in this module
5 Homework（1’）
Draw a map of your ideal school and write a passage about your ideal school
板书设计
Unit 3 Language in use
Is there a library in our school Yes there is
The library is behind the on the left of the playground
How many books are there in the library
There are …
达标训练题
I 句型转换
1 There are some offices in front of our classroom(改般疑问句)
____ ____ _____office in front of your classroom
2 There are some computers on our desks(改否定句)
_____ ______ _____ computers on our desks
3 Is there a computer on your desk (作否定回答)
______ ______ ______
II Complete the passage
There _______ 44 students in Jeff’s class There are 21 ______ and 23 girls There _____ a blackboard on the front wall There ______ two maps on the wall but there _____ any pictures in the classroom There ______ 38 students in Dick’s class 20 boys and _____ girls There _____ a computer on the teacher’s desk There are four pictures in the classroom but there ______ a map
Book 1 Module 4 Healthy food
二十五 教学容：Unit 1 We’ve got lots of apples
二十六 课型：Listening and speaking
二十七 教学目标：
1正确运单元词汇短语 food drink candy fruit meat vegetable apple bean beef carrot chicken chocolate coffee juice milk potato tea tomato water kind some bad go shopping havehas got lots of too much
2听懂关食物饮料话
3掌握have got肯定句否定句疑问句回答
4谈喜欢食品健康食品购买食物
四教学重难点：
掌握have got肯定句否定句疑问句回答 运have got
谈食物饮料
五教学准备：
课指导学生通听力获取信息培养学生听力技课堂采媒体手段辅助教学轻松愉快氛围中较真实语境联系学生生活实际结合已知识验运学语言基础知识学互相学学生语言实践中相互启发生成体验成功培养学生合作精神发展思维想象等力教学程中采媒体手段辅助教学利种图片题务贯穿整教学程节课需准备：PPT课件挂图挂图关某实物录音机课堂练表格奖品
六预求：
根音标学课新单词
七教学程：
教学
步骤
教师活动
学生活动
设计意图
Step One
Warmingup (3’)
Lead in
1Free talk
(1)Show some pictures and ask Ss like these
Are you hungry
What’s you favorite food
(2)Show more pictures and let Ss talk about them
2 Answer the questions
(2)Talk with partners about food
学生free talk程中感受新语言项目通环节活跃课堂气氛调动学生学兴趣
Step Two
Pretask(5’)
Task1 Check the new words
1 Word game Show some pictures and things to get the students to say out the new words quickly
2 Guessing game
Let the Ss play a guessing game
3Ask the Ss to look at the pictures and talk about them(Activity 1)
4 Ask the Ss to label the food in the pictures with the words from the boxes (Activities 23)
1 Look at the pictures and things to say out the new words quickly
2 Play a guessing game Guess out What’s in the bag Use the sentence Have you got any …
3Look at the pictures and talk about them(Activity 1)
4 Label the food in the pictures with the words from the boxes (Activities 23)
游戏形式引导学生快速说出实物ppt食物饮料名称引导学生学新词汇然猜游戏形式巩固词汇学新句型通图片情景学单词做词离句
Step Three
Whiletask (20’)
Task2listening
Play the tape ask students to listen and check (∨) the food and drink Betty and her mother have got (Activity 4)
Task 3 Listening and Reading
(1)Tell students they are going to listen to Tony and his father talking about going shopping and complete the table (Activity 5)
(2)Organize the students to read the conversation with the video
(3)Ask the Ss to work with their groups to read the conversation
(4) Have a competition Read the dialogue in groups and choose the best group
Task 4 Solve the language points
(1)Organize students to come to the blackboard and show out some difficult language points that they found
(2)Help the students to solve the difficult points
Task5 Retell the dialogue
(1)Ask students to retell the conversation with the information in the table in Activity 5 in groups
（2）Ask two of the students to retell the dialogue
Listen to the tape and choose check (∨) the food and drink Betty and her mother have got (Activity 4)
(1) Listen to Tony and his father talking about going shopping complete the table and (Activity 5)
(2)Read the conversation with the video
(3) Read the conversation in groups
(4) Read the dialogue in groups and choose the best group
(1) Students come to the blackboard to show out some language points the other students listen to them carefully and note
(2)Solve the difficult points with the teacher’s help
(1)Try to retell the conversation with the information in the table in Activity 5 in groups
(2)Two students retell the dialogue the others listen
利听读练方式加强学生课文理解培养学生细节听力技巧够听取信息训练培养学生细节听力技巧
通视频听读话帮助学生进步理解课文容
组活动通学生间合作学学生充分实践运语言培养团结合作精神
通学生台展示找语言点培养学生胆量培养学力
教师点拨补充语言点学生进步理解知识点
通复述话加深课文掌握时锻炼口语
Step Four
Posttask
(9’)
Task 6Do some speaking
(1)Ask students to talk about What they have got at home and make a list
(1) Talk about What they have got at home and make a list
通做话训练学生说力学生加深课文容理解适量口头练学生巩固课时语言重点
通笔头练进步巩固学
A Have you got any apples
B Yes I have I have got some apples No I haven’t
Have got
Haven’t got
Apples
√
Chicken
Beef
Tomatoes
(2) Have the Ss to talk about what the friends’ home have got
(3)Ask students to do some
Exercises and then check
(2) Talk about what the friends’ home have got
(3)Do the exercises then check
Step Five
Summary（2’）
1 Get the students to sum up the language points
T What have we learned today
Ss…
2 Let the students to choose the best team in this lesson
1 Sum up the language points
2 To choose the best groups
引导学生节课总结学生做发言培养学生学总结良学惯
简短评价学生课堂表现肯定激励学生学兴趣树立学英语信心
Step Six
Home
work
（1’）
(3) Make dialogues with partners to talk about the food
(4) Finish the exercises in the workbook of Unit 1
Finish the homework
课作业助学生巩固已学知识补充方面锻炼
板书
设计
Module4 Healthy food 组评价
二十八 Unit1 Unit 1 we’ve got lots of apples
We’ve got some … T1 T2 T3
Have we got any…
Yes we haveNo we haven’t
达标训练题
单项选择
（ ）1There isn’t _______meat in that box
A any B some C a
（ ）2Mary has got some
A apple B milk C tomato
（ ）3 I don’t like vegetables I like fruit
A and B so C but
（ ）4 There is a glass of on the table
A cakes B apples C water
（ ）5 John like apples of all the
A vegetables B fruits C drinks
二根汉语完成句子空词
1天晚回家
It was late ______ I went home
2冰箱里没牛奶需购物
There isn’t any ______ in the fridge We need to ____ _____
3块蛋糕样
_______ _______another cake
4俩太工作做
We both have______ _______ ________to do
5想起购物？
_______ you ______ ______ _______with me
Book 1 Module 4 Healthy food
二十九 教学容：Unit2 Is your food and drink healthy
三十 课型：Reading and writing
三十 教学目标：
1够正确列单词词组： healthy bread fish ice cream noodle rice eat child children be good for be bad for egg eye cheese soup well fat or breakfast every lunch home dinner banana
2够读懂关健康食品短文
3够发表食品法
4写出关健康食品短句掌but连词功
5通阅读关健康食品短文培养中国饮食感情培养民族豪感
三十二 教学重难点：
1够读懂关健康食品短文阅读中找出healthy food and drinkunhealthy food and drink 完成务（重点）
2够发表食品法（难点）
三十三 教学准备：
课堂整体运务型教学模式阅读课四阶段教学模式课指导学生通阅读获取信息培养学生阅读技教学程中采媒体手段辅助教学利种图片题务贯穿整教学程节课需准备：PPT课件挂图录音机课堂练表格奖品
三十四 教学程：
教学
步骤
教师活动
学生活动
设计意图
Step One
Warmingup (3’)
1Lead in
1Free talk
(1)Show some pictures and ask Ss like these What’re these
Ss They’re…
2．Taste and say
Ask 3 students to come to blackboard and taste wine cola and orange juice Ask them to say which food and drink are healthy
1Say the sentences
like this They’re…
2Taste and say
Sentence like this The orange juice is healthy drink for children The wine is unhealthy drink for children
The cola is unhealthy drink
先引导学生回顾节课容巩固关食品单词
通环节活跃课堂气氛说句子中考验学生Unit1知识掌握程度训练学生反应形中培养学生胆说英语惯
Step Two
Pre
reading
(5’)
1 Show the pictures in Activity 2 get the Ss to learn the new words
2 Organize the Ss to work in groups making the three lists from the food and drink of the pictures
Delicious food and drink
Favourite food and drink
Healthy food and drink
1 Learn the new words with the pictures
2 Work in groups making the three lists from the food and drink of the pictures
Delicious food and drink
Favourite food and drink
Healthy food and drink
Then show their answers
引导学生谈图片训练学生描述食物力描述时学新单词句型学生扫清阅读障碍
Step Three
While
reading (24’)
Step Three
While
reading (24’)
1 Scanning(Activity3)
(1)Ask students to scan the passage
T Please scan the passage and choose which food and drink are healthy for children
2 Skimming
Ask students to skim the passage
T How many paragraphs are there in the passage
Ss Three
T Read quickly again and match the main ideas with each paragraph
3 Careful reading
①Ask the students to carefully read Paragraph 1&2 then complete the table
②Let the students read Paragraph 3 in groups of six and find out difficulties
③Solve difficulties
T Let’s listen and read the passage together
④Ask the students listen and read the passage together make sure they understand the passage
(1)Scan the passage and choose healthy food and drink for children (Activity3)
Skim the passage and match the main idea with each paragraph
Paragraph 1 Unhealthy food and drink for children
Paragraph 2 Healthy food and drink for children
Paragraph3 A healthy diet
①Read the passage of Paragraph 1&2 then complete the table
②Read Paragraph 3 in groups of six and find out difficulties
③Solve the difficulties together
④The students listen and read the passage together make sure understand it
求学生快速阅读短文选出healthy food and drink for children够巩固刚学食物句型
通学生略读阅读培养学生获取旨力进步学做铺垫
学生带着务（问题）阅读课文找答案助学生更加准确获取信息提高阅读效果技学生通分层次阅读文章获取具体信息知识点课文理解分段学突破组活动通学生间合作学学生充分实践运语言激发学生创造性思维发展
Step Four
Post
reading
(10’)
1 Retell (Activity4)
①Let the students fill
in the blanks according
to the table
②Call back the answers
from two students then
read the short passage in the whole class
2Speaking
Choose food from Unit 1 and 2 for your meals (breakfast lunch dinner)Now work in pairs Talk about your answers like this
①What’s your favourite food and drink
②Is it healthy food and drink Then ask some students to come to the blackboard and act
①Complete the passage with the correct form of the words and expression from the box
(Activity4)
Work in pairs Talk about their answers like this
①What’s your favourite food and drink
②Is it healthy food and drink Then some students to come to the blackboard and act
复述课文学生加深课文容理解
适量口头练学生巩固课时语言重点
Step Five
Summary（2’）
1Get the students to
sum up the language points
T What have we learned today
Ss…
2 Let the students to choose the best team in this lesson
1 Sum up the language points
2 To choose the best groups
引导学生节课总结学生做发言培养学生学总结良学惯
简短评价学生课堂表现肯定激励学生学兴趣树立学英语信心
Step Six
Home
work
（1’）
Write a passage to describe their a healthy diet
Finish the homework
课作业助学生巩固已学知识补充方面锻炼写作阅读拓展学生终完全掌握语言实践运语言
七板书设计：
Unit2 Is your food and drink healthy 组评价
T1 T2 T3
It’s good for…
It’s bad for…
It’s important to…
达标训练题
单项选择
（ ）1Meat and fish _______healthy food
A am B are C is
（ ）2The students are in good They like eating ______ food
A healthy health B healthy health C health healthy
（ ）3 is on the table
A Many apples B Much carrots C Much tea
（ ）4 My food is meat I often eat it
A boring B favourite C awful
（ ）5 Tony is a clever boy he doesn’t study hard
A So B but C or
二根汉语完成句子空词
1女孩喜欢喝乐
The little girl’s ______ _____ is _______
2——汤姆喜欢食物什？
——面条汉堡包
——_______Tom’s _________food
——They’re ______ and _____
3牛肉土豆健康食品
Beef and potatoes_______ ________ food
4果汁水牛奶健康食品乐健康食品
Juice water and milk ______ healthy drinks _______ cola________ a healthy drink
5——蔬菜？
——没牛奶
—— _____ we _____ ______vegetables
—— Yes we ______ ______ we _____ _____ _____ milk
Book 1 Module 4 Healthy food
三十五 教学容：Unit3 Language in use
三十六 课型：Revision and application
三十七 教学目标：
1 正确运模块词汇：healthy bread fish ice cream noodle rice eat child children be good for be bad for egg eye cheese soup well fat or breakfast every lunch home dinner banana等
2熟练运havehas got句型
3句子中正确some any
4正确区分数名词数名词正确数名词复数形式
5够运学知识发表食品法学间进行真实交际
三十八 教学重难点：
1够运学知识发表食品法
2够制作食品海报进行展示
三十九 教学准备：
节课型Revision and application根新课标求结合教材学生特点采务型互动式进行教学结合情景法交际法听说法纳法等教学方法实施课堂活动开启学生思维通系列条理教学活动引导学生探究学互动合作学学生体验愉快学节课需教具资料：幻灯图片调查表等
四十 教学程：
教学步骤
教 师 活 动
学 生 活 动
活 动 目
1 Leadingin
1 Play a word game Four Ss from each group come to the blackboard and write down the words of 4 kinds
Food drink vegetable fruit
See which one write the most words
2 Get the Ss to talk about what they have got in groups And write some key structures on the blackboard
1 Play a word game Four Ss from each group come to the blackboard and write down the words of 4 kinds as many as possible
Food drink vegetable fruit
2 Talk about what they have got in groups
eg A Have you got any fish
B No I haven’t I haven’t got any fish
C Has B got any fish
D No he hasn’t He hasn’t got any fish
Review and consolidate the food and drink
2 Whiletask
1 Let the students do Activity 1 and then check the answers
1 Do Activity 1 Work in pairs Look at the picture and talk about the food in the fridge
2 Write about the food in the fridge Then check the answers with the partners
Review and consolidate the vocabulary just learned in the first second units
2 Let the students finish (Activity4)
Students finish (Activity4)2
3 Posttask
1 Organization
1 Have a party about their weekend Then share with the class
1 Talk about healthy food and drink for children using the vocabulary just learned in the first second units
2 Ask the students to make a poster about a healthy breakfast
2 Make a poster about a healthy breakfast in groups
To practice the skill of writing
4 Summary
(1’)
Ask the students to conclude the usage of singular and plural nouns correctly
Students conclude the usage of singular and plural nouns correctly
Let the students internalize the grammar they’ve learned in this module
5 Homework（1’）
Write a passage to introduce your eating habits
板书设计
Module 4 Healthy food
Unit 3 Language in use
I haven’t got any fish potatoes
I have got some meat oranges
HeShe has some…
He She hasn’t any
达标训练题
单项选择
（ ）1There are many _______in the school
A boy B girl C students
（ ）2I have here
A two cups of tea B two cup of tea C two cups of teas
（ ）3Fish and milk my favourite food
A be B are C is
（ ）4 healthy we should eat less junk food
A To be B Are C Be
（ ）5 These want to have some ______ for lunch
A Americans fish B American fish C Americans fishs
二句型转换
1 There is a pen and two pencils in my pencilcase (划线部分提问)
__________ ________ your pencilcase
2 We have got some fruit (改般疑问句)
_______ you ______ _______ fruit
3They have got some eggs (改否定句)
They ______ ______ _______ eggs
4Have you got any oranges（做肯定回答）
_____ ______ ______
5 Betty’s mum hasn’t got any potatoes She’s got some meat (but连接两句子)
___________________________________________________
Book 1 Module 5 My School Day
教学容： Unit1 I love history
二 课型：Listening and speaking
三 教学目标：
1掌握节课单词：half past o’clock art geography history maths PE IT lesson like difficult love subject because interesting love
2听懂时间表达法分辨学校科目
3理解关a school day话
4介绍学校开设科目课时间
四 教学重难点：介绍学校开设科目课时间
五 教学准备：
课指导学生通听力获取信息培养学生听力技课堂采媒体手段辅助教学媒体课件挂钟模拟钟（意调整时间）
六 预求：
根音标学课新单词
七 教学程：
教学
步骤
教师活动
学生活动
设计意图
Step One
Warmingup (3’)
Lead in
1Free talk
（1）Review numbers
（2）Show a big clock to the students Ask What’s the time and get the Ss to learn how to say out the time
（1）Play a game Say out the following numbers quickly onetenfourteenfifteentwentytwenty—two thirty forty fifty
（2）Look at the clock
They may say
It’s one o’clock
It’s half past one
It’s ten past two
It’s ten to three
学表达时间做准备游戏激发学生兴趣然导出话题
复学学时间表达法引导学生学past to表达时间
Step Two
Pretask(5’)
Task1Check the new words
1 Show some pictures and things to get the students to say out the new words
2Organize the students to learn the key structures by asking What are our lessons today
1Look at the pictures and things to say out the new words history maths etc
2 Talk about the lessons
We have Chinese English maths…
We have Chinese at eight o’clock
We have English at…
引导学生谈实物ppt图片检查学生词汇掌握程度训练学生表达力通图片情景语境学单词句型做词离句
Step Three
Whiletask (20’)
Task2 Do activity 2
1 Give students some minutes to do activity 2 by themselves
2 Add biology politics
Task3listening
(1) Play the tape ask students to listen and answer the two questions
1 What lessons do they have on Monday
2 What subject is Betty good at
(2)Organize the students to check their answers
Task 3 Reading
(1) Organization
(2)Organize the students to read the conversation with the video
(3)Ask the Ss to work with their groups to read the conversation
(4) Have a competition Read the dialogue in groups and choose the best group
Task 4 Solve the language points
(1)Organize students to come to the blackboard and show out some difficult language points that they found
(2)Help the students to solve the difficult points
Task5 Retell the dialogue
(1)Ask students to complete the passage
（Activity 5）
（2）Ask two of the students to retell the dialogue
1 First learn by themselves then check the answer in the group
2 Think all the subjects in school that they study
(1) Listen to the tape and answer the two questions
1 What lessons do they have on Monday
2 What subject is Betty good at
(2)Check the answers
(1) Ss read the conversation in activity 3 and check the true sentences
(2)Student read the passage with the video Then work in groups to practice
Try to read the best in groups
(1) Students come to the blackboard to show out some language points the other students listen to them carefully and note
(2)solve the difficult points with the teacher’s help
(1)Students complete the passage
(2)Several students retell the dialogue the others listen
学生通学完成务培养学生学力熟悉学科目名称
训练学生听力扑捉话信息力
循序渐进培养学生听读力模仿力组赛激发学生竞争意识
组合作探究完成学务培养学生团结协作精神
培养学力
教师点拨补充语言点学生进步理解知识点
通复述话加深课文掌握时锻炼口语
Step Four
Posttask
(9’)
Task 6Do some speaking
Group work
Make a conversation
Talk about your lessons
1 What are your lessons today What lessons do we have today
2 Do you like maths
3 When is your maths lesson
4 I have art at eight o’clock
(2) Have the Ss to introduce their lesson a day
(3) Give some exercise on the screen
(1) Make dialogues in groups with the teacher’s help
(2) Introduce their lesson a day in groups
(3) Do the exercise and check the answers Other students correct the mistakes
通组活动进行话练助学生情境中进行交际提高学生英语语言综合运力
通题巩固节课学知识
Step Five
Summary（2’）
1Get the students to sum up the language points
T What have we learned today
Ss……
2Let the students to choose the best team in this lesson
1Sum up the language points
(1) time expressions
(2) at on in
(3) the simple present tense
2To choose the best groups
引导学生节课总结学生做发言培养学生学总结良学惯
简短评价学生课堂表现肯定激励学生学兴趣树立学英语信心
Step Six
Home
work
（1’）
Talk about your favourite school day
Talk about their favourite school day
分层作业材施教
板书
设计
Module 5 My School Day 组评价
Unit1 I love history
1 — What’s the time What time is it T1 T2 T3
— It’s … o’clock It’s half past …
2 — What day is it today
— It is …
3 — When is your … lesson
— I have … at …
4 — Do you like…
— Yes I like … No I don’t like
达标训练题
写出列时间表达法
1 700 ______________________ 2 930 _______________________
3 620 _______________________ 4 1110 ______________________
5 555 _______________________ 6 345 _______________________
二 根汉语提示完成句子
1 天午玲玲明节数学课
Lingling and Daming ____ __ ______ ______ this morning
2 历史课什时候？
_____ __ your history ______
3 午没英语
We _____ ____ English in the morning
4 — 天星期？ — 星期五
— _____ ____ is it today — It’s ______
5 八点钟语文
We have ________ at ______ _______
6 喜欢化学 喜欢数学
They ____ _________ but they _____ ____ _______
Module 5 My school day
四十 教学容：Unit 2 We start work at nine o’clock
四十二 课型：Reading and writing
四十三 教学目标：
1 掌握列单词短语： go to school weekday get up have breakfastlunchdinner start house work break go home evening watch do homework go to bed sleep
2 掌握灵活运列句子：
(1) I go to school on weekdays but not on Saturday and Sunday
(2)I get up at half past seven in the morning and then have breakfast
3读懂介绍学校生活文章
4and but联进两简单句
5够简单描写天学校生活
四十四 教学重难点：
1学会般现时态描述惯性惯性动作（重点）
2够般现时态描述惯性惯性动作（难点）
四十五 教学准备：
阅读活动设计中采填表回答问题简单复述等形式引导学生明白阅读目提高阅读兴趣训练阅读技巧培养学生阅读力节课需准备：PPT课件挂图录音机课堂练表格奖品
四十六 教学程：
教学
步骤
教师活动
学生活动
设计意图
Step One
Warmingup (3’)
Lead in
1 Daily work
Morning Report
2 Free talk
Ask What day is it today
What are your lessons today
What’s your favourite lesson
What time do you have Chinese Etc
1 One student give a Morning Report
2 Free talk
Talk about with the teacher
日常汇报形成学生良说英语惯训练口语
通谈话引入课话题
2
Step Two
Pre
reading
(5’)
Task Learn the new words
Show some pictures on the computer and get the Ss to talk about them to learn the new words
T What time do you get up
T What do you do then
Look at the pictures on the computer and talk about them to learn the new words
S I get up at half past six
S I wash my face and have breakfast Etc
引导学生谈图片训练学生描述物力描述时学新单词句型学生扫清阅读障碍
Step Three
While
reading (24’)
Step Three
While
reading (24’)
1 Ask students to read the passage quickly and put the pictures in order
2 Scanning
Ask students to match the times with the pictures in Activity 1
3 Skimming
Ask students to skim the passage and answer
How many lessons do they have every day
5 Careful reading
Task 1 Ask them to read the passage and finish Activity 3 Underline the correct expressions
Then check the answers by asking individual student
Task 2 Ask them to read carefully complete the table in groups
Task 3 Reading
(1) Organize the students to read the passage
(2)Ask the Ss to read in groups
(3) Have a competition Read the dialogue in groups and choose the best group
Task 4 Solve the language points
(1)Organize students to come to the front and show out some difficult language points that they found
(2)Help the students to solve the other difficult points which they didn’t mention
To teach to join the sentences with and then
Grammar Explain the simple past tense
1 Read the passage quickly and put the pictures in order
2 Scanning
Match the times with the pictures in Activity 1
3 Skimming
Read the passage and answer
How many lessons do they have every day
Read the passage and finish Activity 3
1 ）I get up start work at half past seven
2 ）We have a break have lunch at half past twelve
3 ）I go home watch TV in the evening
4 ）I do my homework see my friends in the evening
5 ）I go home go to sleep at ten o’clock
Read carefully complete the table in groups
What time
What to do
in the morning
730
830
go to school
start work
1100
in the afternoon and evening
1230
130
330
go home
go to bed
1 Watch the video and read with it then read the passage together
2 Work in groups to practice
3 Try to read the best
(1) Students come to the blackboard to show out some language points the other students listen to them carefully and note The phrases they may tell
have lunchhave ricedrink water go homewatch TVhave dinnerdo my homework
go to bedin the morning
in the afternoonin the evening
(2)Listen carefully to the teacher Take notes
训练听力课文整体感知
通scanningskimming培养学生阅读程中掌握浏览跳读等阅读技巧
通观录调动视觉听觉记忆力参语言活动
学生带着问题读文章学生质疑老师进行探讨诱发学生尝试动机培养学力
第二次阅读篇章旨学生掌握篇章细节信息通信息纳检查学生篇章初步理解程度
熟读课文容掌握课文单词词汇
培养合作精神
锻炼学生口头表达力胆量培养学力
教师点拨补充语言点学生进步理解知识点
Step Four
Post
reading
(10’)
1Retell
①Let the students fill
in the blanks according
to the picture and the
table
②Call back the answers
from some students then
read the short passage
in the whole class
2Speaking
Organize the students to share their school day in a group of four
2 Look at the picture
and the table to fill
in the blanks
I’m Alex Greenall I ____ ___ at half past seven ___ the morning I go to school at _____ ____ _____ and lessons _____ at nine o’clock We have _____ lessons in the morning I ____ __ _____ at eleven o’clock I don’t like ________ We have lunch at ____ _____ ______ Lessons start in the afternoon at _____ ___ _____ We have ____ lessons in the afternoon We ____ _____ at half past three I go to bed at _____ o’clock
Share your day in group of four
通课文容复述进步课文容语言点巩固语言点运落实篇章中运更具意义
话题继续延伸进步鼓励学生发挥想象力观动性实际相结合提出新观点新思路新方法
Step Five
Summary（2’）
1Get the students to
sum up the language points
T What have we learned today
Ss……
2Let the students to choose the best team in this lesson
1Sum up the language points
2To choose the best groups
引导学生节课总结学生做发言培养学生学总结良学惯
简短评价学生课堂表现肯定激励学生学兴趣树立学英语信心
Step Six
Home
work
（1’）
Write a passage to describe their best friendThey may begin like this
Hi I’m _____ I study in…
Finish the homework
课作业助学生巩固已学知识补充方面锻炼写作阅读拓展学生终完全掌握语言实践运语言
七板书设计：
Module 5 My School Day 组评价
Unit 2 We start work at nine o’clock T1 T2 T3
1 I get up at half past seven in the morning
and have breakfast
2 in the morning
in the afternoon
in the evening
3 I get up at seven o’clock and then go to
school at eight o’clock
达标训练题
单词适形式填空
1 She ____ (go) to bed at nine o’clock
2 You ________ (not go) home
3 She _______ (watch) TV in the evening
4 He gets up and ___ (have) breakfast
5 _______ (lesson) start at half past one in the afternoon
6 We do our __________ (homework) in the evening
二英汉词组互译
1 起床
2 课间休息
3 学
4 吃早饭
5 喝水
6 at half past ten
7 go to bed
8 go to the playground
9 have dinner
三 句型转换
1 I go to school at 830 (划线部分提问)
_____ __ you __ to school
2 She gets up at half past six (改否定句)
She ______ ___ up at half past six
3 In the morning we have a break We play football (and两句子连起)
In the morning we have a break ___ ____ _______
4 We start lessons at nine o’clock (改般疑问句)
___ you ____ ______ at nine o’clock
5 They do the housework in the evening (改否定句)
They _____ __ the housework in the evening
Module 5 My school day
四十七 教学容：Unit3 Language in use
四十八 课型：Revision and application
四十九 教学目标：
1掌握运模块单词短语
2运实义动词（语I they you we）般现时肯定句否定句般疑问句特殊疑问句
3运介词atinon表示时间
4伴谈理想中学校生活
五十 教学重难点：
运学知识谈理想学校生活
五教学准备：
节课型Revision and application根新课标求结合教材学生特点采务型互动式进行教学结合情景法交际法听说法纳法等教学方法实施课堂活动开启学生思维通系列条理教学活动引导学生探究学互动合作学学生体验愉快学节课需教具资料：幻灯图片调查表等
六 教学程：
教学步骤
教 师 活 动
学 生 活 动
活 动 目
1 Leadin
1Play a game Simon Says T Simon says get up then do the action
2 Duty report
1Play a game Simon Says
2 Listen to a morning report One student come to the front to give a lecture
游戏枯燥乏味词组操练融入游戏乐趣复旧知识时提高学生反应力
2 Whiletask(17’)
1 Give three verbs on the blackboard (have do go) get the Ss to write as many phrases as they can
2 Get the Ss to make sentences with the (have do go) phrases and write some important sentences on the blackboard
3 Organize the Ss to do Activity 4and 5 Then Activity 3
5 Around the world
Say In China we start class usually at 800 in the morning and we finish class usually at 600 in the evening What about the children in UK Read and find the answer quickly
Organize them to read the short passage together once
6English Grammar for this module Ask some students to summary the key sentences
Teach the Simple Present Tense by using ppt
1 Write as many phrases as they can using have do go
eg have lessons have a break have breakfast etc
2 Make sentences with the (have do go) phrases
eg We have lessons on Monday
I have breakfast at half past six
3 Finish the exercises in Activity 4 5 3
5 Read and find the answer
What time do the children in UK begin classes and finish school
Answer in pairs
Read the short passage together once
6 Summary the language points which they learnt in Module 5
Grammar
I talk to my friends
You have dinner in the evening
We have art and history
They don’t start at eight o’clock
Learn the Simple Present Tense and take notes
词短语句子引导学生复 知识
通游戏活跃课堂气氛通学生造句赛掌握单元短语够课外延伸时训练学生发散思维创新意识
汇总介词at in on 法重点掌握
at 时刻前
in 表示午午晚on 表示某天某天午午晚
通短文解国家学生学情况通综合问题针性训练学生阅读概括力
通声朗读学生进步熟悉短文
通学生查找资料复单元知识纳单元涉般现时句型学会学
3 Posttask
(19’)
Work in pairs Ask them to imagine their ideal school day (Activity7)
Talk about their ideal school day in a group of three Choose their favorite one to share with the whole class
学生通单元学获语言储备语言输出做铺垫进步巩固学容
4 Summary
(1’)
Ask the students to conclude the structure of
the Simple Present Tense
Students conclude the structure of the simple the Simple Present Tense
学会纳总结学知识
5 Homework（1’）
1 Write a passage called My ideal school day
板书设计
Module 5 My school day
Unit 3 Language in use
I go to the park on Sunday
I don’ t go to school
达标训练题
选择正确介词 (at in on) 完成面句子
1 We have history __ the afternoon
2 I go to school __ half past seven
3 Do you have a piano lesson __ Saturday
4 They do their homework __ ten o’clock
5 What time do you go to school __ the morning
6 The children have computer lessons __ four o’clock __ Fridays
二 单项选择题
1 Jenny ____ in an office Her parents ____in a hospital
A work works B works work C work are working D is working work
2 One of the boys_____ a black hat
A have B there is C there are D has
3 We will go shopping if it____ tomorrow
A don＇t rain Bdidn＇t rain Cdoesn＇t rain Disn＇t rain
4 He said the sun ____in the east and ____in the west
A rose set B rises sets C rises set D rise sets
5 Wang Mei ____ music and often ____ to music
A like listen B likes listens C like are listening D liking
listen
6 Jenny____ English every evening
A has study B studies C study D studied
Book1 Module 6 A trip to the zoo
教学容：Unit 1 Does it eat meat
二课型：Listening and speaking
三教学目标：
语言目标
(1)To help students master the words ： elephant giraffe kangaroo lion monkey panda polar bear tiger wolf zebra bamboothere such as leafleaves dangerous
(2)To help students master the sentences：
①Does it eat meat
Yes it does
No it doesn’t
力目标
(1) To understand and get more detailed information about animals from
listening and reading
(2) To ask and answer questions about the habitat and the food of different animals
(3) To talk about their favourite animal
情感目标
Students can love and protect animals from learning
四教学重难点：
重点：
(1)重点句型：般现时（语第三称单数）般疑问句肯定否定形式
(2)重点话题：
Talk about one’s favourite animal
难点：
(1)掌握般现时（语第三称单数）般疑问句肯定否定形式
(2) 恰道英语问答关动物问题介绍喜爱动物
五教学准备：
次课堂听说课采互动式教学法创设真实语境通呈现伴互动组活动等师生生生交流充分体现学生学程中体位教师课堂引导者组织者合作者学生中学会英语综合培养学生英语语言运力教学程中采媒体手段辅助教学利种图片题务贯穿整教学程节课需准备：PPT课件录音机课堂练奖品
六教学程：
教学
步骤
教师活动
学生活动
设计意图
Step One
Warmingup (6’)
)
Activity 1 Greet the students as usual
T T HelloclassNice to meet you
Ss Nice to meet you too
T What’s the weather like today
Ss It’s…
T The weather will be … this weekend (too)
I’m going to the park
Where are you going
Ss …
T Tony and Lingling are having a trip to
the zoo Ok Today we are going to learn Module 6 A trip to the zoo This is Beijing Zoo(show a short film about Beijing Zoo)
T What can you see from the film
S…
Activity 2 New words study
T Now let’s see What kinds of animals in Beijing Zoo
Guessing game
(1)monkey
T The animal likes to eat bananas What is it
(2)elephant
T The animal has a long nose and two big ears
(3)tiger
T It’s the king of forest
2 Show pictures to learn new words
(1) panda (2) giraffe (3) kangaroo Australia (4) polar bear Arctic (5)zebra (6)wolf Europe (7) camel
3 Repeat after the little teacher
4 Read by Ss together
5 Read the new words together
(1) Greet the teacher
(2) Talk
something about the short film
(1) Guess the animals
(2)Read after the little teacher
(3)Read the new words together
(4)Check the exercise in groups
创设话情景提问方式提问学生引入话题关北京动物园短片学生更直观感知课容导入课新单词学
通游戏Guessing
game检查学生词汇掌握程度训练学生表达力通图片情景学单词做词离句组竞赛完成练活跃课堂气氛巩固新词
Step Two
Listeningand reading (8’)
Activity 3 Listening
(1)T Now Tony and Lingling are in Beijing ZooWould you like to know more about them Let’s listen to the tape and listen what they are talking
(2)Organize the students to check their answers
Activity 4 Reading
(1) Organize the students to read the conversation with the video
(2)Ask the Ss to work with their groups to read the conversation
(3) Have a competition Read the dialogue in groups and choose the best group
(1) Students close the book listen to the conversation and fill in the blanks
(2)Check the answers in groups
(1)Read the conversation with the video
(2) Read the conversation in groups
(3) Read the dialogue in groups and choose the best group
利听读练方式加强学生课文理解培养学生细节听力技巧够听取信息训练培养学生细节听力技巧
通视频听读话帮助学生进步理解课文容
组活动通学生间合作学学生充分实践运语言培养团结合作精神
Step
Three
Afterlistening practice (10’)
Activity 5 Solve the language points
(1)Organize students to come to the blackboard and show out some difficult language points that they found
(2)Help the students to solve the difficult points
Activity6 Retell the dialogue
(1)Ask students to complete the passage
（Activity 5）
（2）Ask two of the students to retell the dialogue
(1) Students come to the blackboard to show out some language points the other students listen to them carefully and note
(2)solve the
difficult points with the teacher’s help
(1)Students complete the passage
(2)Two students retell the dialogue the others listen
通学生台展示找语言点培养学生胆量培养学力
教师点拨补充语言点学生进步理解知识点
通复述话加深课文掌握时锻炼口语
StepFive
Speaking （15’）
Activity7 Summary and pair work
T Today we have learned something about animals NowLet’s work in pairs Ask and answer
The teacher asks some pairs to show in front of the whole class
Activity 8 Role plays
Free talk Work in pairs and make up a similar dialogue Let’s go to the zoo
1) A what’s your favourite animal
B My favourite animal is…
2) A Does it eat plants
BYes it does No it doesn’t
3) A Does it come from China
B Yes it doesNo it doesn’t
4) A Is it the panda
B
Practice this dialogue with their partners
Teacher asks some pairs to show in front of the class
（1）Work in groups of six students and make role plays Imaging they are in the zoo
(2)Then some groups show in front of the class
通做话训练学生说力学生加深课文容理解适量口头练学生巩固课时语言重点
话题课文知识实际生活延伸体现语言语原充分激发学生思维情感踊跃发言
Step Six
Home
work
（1’）
Activity 9Homework
1 Listen to the tape and read after it three times
2 Finish the exercises of Unit 1
3 Preview the second unit
Finish
the homework
课作业助学生巩固已学知识补充方面锻炼
板书
设计
Module6 A trip to the zoo
Unit 1 Does it eat meat
1) Does it eat meat
Yes it does No it doesn’t
2) Shall we…
Yes let’s… No …
3) There be…
Be there…
Yes there isare No there isn’taren’t
达标训练题（满分100分）
单项选择 （50分）
( ) 1 Welcome ______Beijing
A at B in C to D on
( ) 2 The ______ don’t like eating meat
A wolf B panda C monkeys D wolves
( ) 3 —The polar bear_________tne Aratic
A comes from B come from C are from D from
( ) 4 —________the tiger_______grass
A Does eats B Does eats C Does eat D Do eat
( ) 5 Where are the children
Look _________
A there are they B there they are C here are they D are they here
二根汉语完成句子 （50分）
1 欢迎北京动物园里
________ __ Beijing Zoo
2 天接万六千
______ ________ _____ visit it every day
3 袋鼠澳利亚
The kangaroo _______ ____ Australia
4老虎吧
_____ ___ and ___ a tiger
5 熊猫喜欢动物
The panda is ___ ________ ______
Module6 A trip to the zoo
九 教学容：Unit2 The tiger lives in Asia
十 课型：Reading and writing
十 教学目标：
1掌握节课单词词组：little a little only about kilo people as well as grass large usually alone be good at strong catch even all kinds of
2读懂介绍动物篇章找出文中相关细节信息
3学知识描写喜欢动物
4正确写字母
十二 教学重难点：
1够理解介绍动物篇章
2学知识描写喜欢动物
十三 教学准备：
课堂整体运务型教学模式阅读课四阶段教学模式课指导学生通阅读获取信息培养学生阅读技教学程中采媒体手段辅助教学利种图片题务贯穿整教学程节课需准备：PPT课件挂图录音机课堂练表格奖品
十四 预求：
根音标学课新单词
十五 教学程：
教学
步骤
教师活动
学生活动
设计意图
Step One
Warmingup (5’)
Step Two
Pre
reading
(5’)
1Lead in
Guess the animal in each picture and then tell us where it comes from
Eg
(1)It’s the king of the forest
It lives in ____
(2)It’s small and cute
It likes eating bananas and peaches
It lives in ____
2．（1）Find these place on the map
Africa America Asia Europe
（2）Look at the map again and write four sentences Use the words from the box
Eg：
There are tigers in Asia
There are elephants in…
Look at a picture and guess the animal in each picture and then tell us where it comes from
（1）Find these place on the map
（2）Look at the map again and write four sentences Use the words from the box
Eg：
There are tigers in Asia
There are elephants in…
猜图游戏：图片根提示回答图中说种动物说说该动物里生长时学生图找出方引导学生回顾节课容引入课相关容
通环节激发学生学兴趣活跃课堂气氛通图片学生进步解相关容学生扫清阅读障碍
Step Three
While
reading (18’)
1 Scanning
Scanning the passage and answer the questions
(1) How many animals are mentioned(提) in the passage
(2) What are they
2 Skimming
Ask students to skim the passage and complete the table(Activity 3)
3Careful reading
(1)Paragraph 1
①Read Paragraph 1 and then fill in the blanks
②Organize some students to come to the blackboard and show out some difficult language points that they found in these paragraphs
(2)Paragraph 23
①Read Paragraph 23 and then choose the right answers
②Organize some students to come to the blackboard and show out some difficult language points that they found in these paragraphs
(3)Read paragraph45
①Read paragraph 45 and answer the questions
②Organize some students to come to the blackboard and show out some difficult language points that they found in these paragraphs
1 Scanning the passage and answer the questions
(1) How many animals are mentioned(提) in the passage
(2) What are they
2Skim the passage and and complete the table (Activity 3)
①Read Paragraph 1 and then fill in the blanks
②Some students come to the blackboard and show out some difficult language points that they found in these paragraphs
①Read Paragraph 23 and then choose the right answers
②Some students come to the blackboard and show out some difficult language points that they found in these paragraphs
①Read paragraph 45 and answer the questions
②Organize some students to come to the blackboard and show out some difficult language points that they found in these paragraphs
求学生快速阅文章完成相关务帮助学生理解课文容
通学生快速阅读培养学生获取旨力进步理解文章容 进步学做铺垫
学生带着务（问题）阅读课文找答案助学生更加准确获取信息提高阅读效果技学生通分层次阅读文章获取具体信息知识点课文理解分段学突破
Step Four
Post
reading
(10’)
1 Writing（Activity 5）
①How much do you know
about the animals
②Correct the mistakes
③Ask some students to say out their answers
①How much do you know
about the animals
②Correct the mistakes
③Ask some students to say out their answers
通完成课练加强刚学课文容巩固时学写字母句号法
Step Five
Summary（1’）
1Get the students to
sum up the language points
T What have we learned today
Ss……
2 Let the students to choose the best team in this lesson
1Sum up the language points
2To choose the best groups
引导学生节课总结学生做发言培养学生学总结良学惯
简短评价学生课堂表现肯定激励学生学兴趣树立学英语信心
Step Six
Home
work
（1’）
Write something about your favourite animal (3050字)
my favourite animal there be come from live in eat sth like sth doesn’t like sth
Finish the homework and review the new words and expressions
课作业助学生巩固已学知识写作阅读拓展学生终掌握语言实践运语言
十六
十七 八
十八 板书设计：
Module6 A trip to the zoo Unit2 The tiger lives in Asia
My favourite animal there be come from live in eat sth
like sth doesn’t like sth
组评价
T1 T2 T3
达标训练题
三完形填空（题15分满分15分）
There is a zoo in our city My parents often take me there on the 26 I like animals I have a lot of 27 animals in my room In the 28 I can see tigers elephants bears monkeys pandas snakes and many other 29 Some animals are friendly but some are not Tigers bears and some snakes are 30 That is why they have to stay in 31 But I do not think it is good for animals to stay in cages They should be free The animals in cages can’t be 32
I think the most interesting animals in the zoo are the dolphins I like 33 them swim and jump They swim so fast and jump so high They can play with a ball They can stand up and walk 34 water They are very 35 to people If you fall into the water and can’t swim they may come to help you
26 A summer B month
C autumn D weekend
27 A real B funny
C toy D your
28 A zoo B park
C bank D library
29 A tigers B people
C friends D animals
30 A dangerous B safe
C interesting D ugly
31 A houses B buildings
C cages D ponds（池塘）
32 A angry B happy
C sad D strong
33 A looking B seeing
C watching D noticing
34 A in B at
C with D on
35 A friendly B rude
C warm D cold
Book 1 Module 6 A trip to the zoo
五十 教学容：Unit3 Language in use
五十二 课型：Revision and application
五十三 教学目标：
i 语言知识目标：
①正确运般现时单数第三称肯定句否定句般疑问句回答
②正确运模块词汇：bear elephant giraffe lion monkey panda tiger zebra zoo animal come from dangerous bamboo cute which over there funny Africa Asia Europe little a little kilo people all over the world African as well as grass be good at strong many kinds of等
2语言技目标：
①运般现时询问回答关动物话学间进行真实交际
②般现时学展示介绍动物作品
3情感态度目标：
通学种表示动物词汇提高英语兴趣英语学积极性
五十四 教学重难点：
够般现时学展示介绍动物作品
五十五 教学准备：
节课型Revision and application根新课标求结合教材学生特点采务型互动式进行教学结合情景法交际法听说法纳法等教学方法实施课堂活动开启学生思维通系列条理教学活动引导学生探究学互动合作学学生体验愉快学节课需教具资料：幻灯图片调查表等
五十六 教学程：
教学步骤
教 师 活 动
学 生 活 动
活 动 目
1 Leadingin
（7’）
1 Show the pictures and ask the students to make dialogues about what they are
2 Give instructions of guessing game
1The students act out the dialogues in pairs about what they are with the pictures
2 Play a guessing game asking their partners some questions in order to guess which places they traveled eg Do you like animals Where are they from
Review and consolidate how to use do and does
2 Whiletask(17’)
1 Let the students do Activities 24 and then check the answers
1 Do Activities 24 Then check the answers with the partners
Review and consolidate the vocabulary just learned in the first two units
2 Ask the students to translate around the world into Chinese
2 The students will be given five minutes to translate around the world into Chinese
To learn about the foreign culture
5 Ask the students to make a poster of their favorite animal
3 They will have a match for writing and drawing on the blackboard (See which group can do the best of the four groups)
4 Two students will review the poster on the blackboard And see which group will do the best
5 The students make a poster of their favorite animal and get ready to interview their best friend
To practice talking about their favorite animal
3 Posttask
(19’)
1 Organization
2 Organization
1Students interview their best friends about their favorite animal using the poster in the above and writing down their best friends’ information
2Make a report about their best friends’ favorite animal Then share with the class
1To practice the skill of speaking
2 Enable students to talk about their favorite animal using the Simple Present Tense
3 Ask the students to write about some dangerous animals
4 Organization
3 Write an email to the best friends about some dangerous animals
4 Some students share their emails with the class See who writers the best
To practice the skill of writing
4 Summary
(1’)
Ask the students to conclude the usage of the simple present regular verbs
Students conclude the usage of the simple present regular verbs
Let the students internalize the grammar they’ve learned in this module
5 Homework（1’）
Write about your favourite animal
板书设计
Module 6 A trip to the zoo
Unit 3 Language in use
It doesn’t eat meat Does it eat meat
Yes it is No it doesn’t
The tiger lives in Asia
达标训练题
单项选择
（ ）1 Here ___your magazines
A am B is C are D be
（ ）2 The elephant comes from ______It’s _______
A American America B Africa Africa
C Australian Australia D India Indian
（ ）3 —Can you speak English Mr Wang
—Yes but only____
A little B a little C a lot D a few
（ ）4 Tom is ______Chinese
A good at B good for C good to D well at
（ ）5 My pen pal lives _______England
A on B in C at D
（ ）6 —Where ______the camel come ________
— Asia
A does from B do from C does of D do of
（ ）7 Where does Lily _______
A come from B be from C is from D from
Book 1 Module7 Computers
五十七 教学容：Unit 1 How do I write my homework on the computer
五十八 课型：Listening and speaking
五十九 教学目标：
1掌握单元词汇短语：connect turn turn on learn use save box finally paper print
2听懂电脑操作相关连续指令 听力材料中辨认电脑相关信息
3掌握行动词般现时特殊疑问句回答
4简单描述介绍电脑相关操作
六十 教学重难点：
1听懂电脑操作相关连续指令
2掌握行动词般现时特殊疑问句回答 运般现时询问做某事什方做某事等
五教学准备：
课指导学生通听力获取信息培养学生听力技课堂采媒体手段辅助教学轻松愉快氛围中较真实语境联系学生生活实际结合已知识验运学语言基础知识学互相学学生语言实践中相互启发生成体验成功培养学生合作精神发展思维想象等力教学程中采媒体手段辅助教学利种图片题务贯穿整教学程节课需准备：PPT课件挂图录音机课堂练表格奖品
六十 预求：
根音标学课新单词
六十二 教学程：
教学
步骤
教师活动
学生活动
设计意图
Step One
Warmingup (3’)
Lead in
1Free talk
(1)Show some pictures and ask Ss like these
What is this
Do you often use a computer
What do you often do on the computer
(2)Show more pictures and let Ss talk about them try to use the sentences with What how where when
(1)Answer the questions and discuss the questions in group
(2)Talk with partners and try to use the sentences withWhat how where when
学生free talk程中感受新语言项目通环节活跃课堂气氛调动学生学兴趣
Step Two
Pretask(5’)
Task1Check the new words
1 Show some pictures and things to get the students to say out the new words
2Organize the students to read the new words together
3Ask the Ss to describe the picture and try to use the words in the box(Activity 1)
1Look at the pictures and things to say out the new words
2 Read the new words together
3 To describe the picture and try to use the words in the box(Activity 1)
引导学生谈实物ppt图片检查学生词汇掌握程度训练学生表达力通图片情景学单词做词离句Check完词汇时做Activity 1进行巩固
Step Three
Whiletask (20’)
Task2listening
(1) Play the tape ask students to listen and number the words as the students hear them (Activity)
(2)Ask the students to label the parts of the computer according to the computer in the classroom (Activity 2)
(3)Ask one student to connedct the screen to the computer
T Do you know how to do before you use the computer Let’s do it together (Activity3)
(4)Organize the students to check their answers
Task 3 Reading
(1) Organize the students to read the conversation with the video
(2)Ask the Ss to work with their groups to read the conversation
(3) Have a competition Read the dialogue in groups and choose the best group
Task 4 Solve the language points
(1)Organize students to come to the blackboard and show out some difficult language points that they found
(2)Help the students to solve the difficult points
Task5 Retell the dialogue
(1)Ask students to complete the passage
（Activity 5）
(2)Ask two of the students to retell the dialogue
(1) Listen to the tape and number the words (Activity 1)
(2)label the parts of the computer(Activity 2)
(3)The other students fill in the blank (Activity3)
(4)Check the answers
(1)Read the conversation with the video
(2) Read the conversation in groups
(3) Read the dialogue in groups and choose the best group
(1) Students come to the blackboard to show out some language points the other students listen carefully them carefully and note
(2)solve the difficult points with the teacher’s help
(1)Students complete the passage
(2)Two students retell the dialogue the others listen
利听读练方式加强学生课文理解培养学生细节听力技巧够听取信息训练培养学生细节听力技巧
通视频听读话帮助学生进步理解课文容
组活动通学生间合作学学生充分实践运语言培养团结合作精神
通学生台展示找语言点培养学生胆量培养学力
教师点拨补充语言点学生进步理解知识点
通复述话加深课文掌握时锻炼口语
Step Four
Posttask
(9’)
Task 6Do some speaking
(1)Ask students talk about what your school will be like in ten years
A We will study at home and only go to school for sports and games
B Well this is good but I’ll miss my teachers and friends
(2) Have the Ss act out their new dialogues
(3)Ask students to do some
Exercises and then check
(1) Make dialogues in groups with the teacher’s help
(2) Act out the new dialogues
(3)Do the exercises then check
通做话训练学生说力学生加深课文容理解适量口头练学生巩固课时语言重点
通笔头练进步巩固学
Step Five
Summary（2’）
1Get the students to sum up the language points
T What have we learned today
Ss……
2Let the students to choose the best team in this lesson
1Sum up the language points
2To choose the best groups
引导学生节课总结学生做发言培养学生学总结良学惯
简短评价学生课堂表现肯定激励学生学兴趣树立学英语信心
Step Six
Home
work
（1’）
Make dialogues with partners to talk about how to write homework on the computer
Finish the homework
课作业助学生巩固已学知识补充方面锻炼
板书
设计
Module7 Computers 组评价
六十三 Unit1 How do I write my homework on the computer T1 T2 T3
First next then finally…
I usually sometimes don’t usually…
What…
Where…
How often…
达标训练题
单词填空
1 ________(首先) I want you to help me do it
2 What are we going to do ________(次)
3 ________(然) you can find your way
4 ________() I want to say Thank you to all of you
二根汉语完成句子空词
1电脑显示器？
What’s wrong with my______ ________
2 写家庭作业？
______ _______ he _________ his homework
3电脑？
_______ I _______ your computer
4需开新文件
You need to ______ _________ _________ ________
Book 1 Module7 Computers
六十四 教学容：Unit2 When do you use a computer
六十五 课型：Reading and writing
六十六 教学目标：
1够正确列单词词组： share Australia company customerInternet check plan ticket movie search for information send cinema visit
2够读懂介绍电脑情况短文
3够正确特殊疑问词when how等
4通阅读电脑情况正确认识合理电脑网络
六十七 教学重难点：
1够读懂介绍电脑情况三篇短文阅读中找出作者相关细节信息完成务（重点）
2够正确特殊疑问词（难点）
六十八 教学准备：
课堂整体运务型教学模式阅读课四阶段教学模式课指导学生通阅读获取信息培养学生阅读技教学程中采媒体手段辅助教学利种图片题务贯穿整教学程节课需准备：PPT课件挂图录音机课堂练表格奖品
六十九 教学程：
教学
步骤
教师活动
学生活动
设计意图
Step One
Warmingup (3’)
1Lead in
Play a piece of music and then have a conversation with the students
What’s this
We often use the computer to …
How do you write your homework on the computer
2．See and say
Ask some students to present some ways of using the computer Ask other students to say out the sentences Use the sentences like this What are they doing Do you often …
1Say the sentences
like this It is a computerWe often use the computer to…
2See the action and say
sentence like this He is downloading the music…
I often…
先引导学生回顾节课容巩固学电脑词句表达
通环节活跃课堂气氛说句子中考验学生Unit1知识掌握程度训练学生反应形中培养学生胆说英语惯
Step Two
Prereading
(5’)
Show the students some pictures about using the computer and lead the students to describe what they are doing Also present new words and teach them
egshareAustraliacompany customer Internet …
learn some new words and try to describe them like this I share my computer with my brother
引导学生谈图片描述时学新单词句型学生扫清阅读障碍
Step Three
While
reading (20’)
1 Scanning
Ask students to scan the passages
T What are the passages talking about
2 Careful reading
①Ask students to skim the passages
T Jack Alice and like using the computer Find out Who can use the computer on Sundays
Who often share the computer with his father
Who has a friend in Australia
②T Let’s read again and tell true or false
Ask a student to be a little teacher to check the answers
③Let some team students read the paragraphs and the other students listen carefully to point out important points
④Solve difficulties
3Ask the students
read the letter
T Let’s read the letter together Make sure they
understand the letter
Scan the passage and answer the question
①Read the passages and answer the questions
②Write T or F after reading
1 Jack’s father uses the computer every Friday night
( )
2 Alice checks emails at home ( )
3Mike likes playing computer games ( )
4 Mike and his parents use their home computer ( )
A student acts a little teacher to check the answers Others try their best to answer the questions
③Read Paragraph A&B in groups of six and find out difficulties
④To say the difficulties and solve the difficulties together
The students read the
letter together ang make sure to
understand the passage
通学生快速阅读培养学生获取旨力
学生带着务（问题）阅读课文找答案助学生更加准确获取信息提高阅读效果技学生通分层次阅读文章获取具体信息知识点课文理解分段学突破组活动通学生间合作学学生充分实践运语言激发学生创造性思维发展
Step Four
Postreading
(10’)
1 Let the students do Activity 3
2 Let the students do Activity4
3 Retell
①Let the students fill
in the blanks according
to the picture and the
table
②Call back the answers
from two students then
read the short passage
in the whole class
2Make a survey
Ask the students to make a survey in group Then ask teams to report
When do you use a computer…How do you …
Match the words and expressions in ColumnA with those in Column B
Complete the passage with the correct form of the words from the box
Look at the picture and the table to fill in the blanks
Jack has a _______ at home His father and he _____it His father is a ______ of a coes on the ______ to ______ the times Jack _____ or _______ on the computer every Friday night Alice can use the computer ____ She ____ information fo her ____and check her email She talk to her ______ on the Internet Mike’s ______ don’t use computer He use it on ____ He ________ to his friends and play computer ______ But _______ he plays a lot of games and ________ doesn’t like it
2 Make a servey and report
I often use a computer I …on the computer…
完成活动3活动4面复述课文作铺垫
复述环节学生加深课文容理解
适量口头练学生巩固课时语言重点
Step Five
Summary（2’）
1Get the students to
sum up the language points
T What have we learned today
Ss……
2Let the students to choose the best team in this lesson
1Sum up the language points
2To choose the best groups
引导学生节课总结学生做发言培养学生学总结良学惯
简短评价学生课堂表现肯定激励学生学兴趣树立学英语信心
Step Six
Homework
（1’）
Write a passage to talk about when and how you use a computer
Finish the homework
课作业助学生巩固已学知识补充方面锻炼写作阅读拓展学生终完全掌握语言实践运语言
板书设计
Module4 Module7 Computers 组评价
七十 Unit2 When do you use a computer
share a computer T1 T2 T3
go on the Internet
talk to customers
watch movies
work for a company
…
达标训练题
单项选择
（ ）1 _______the radiol I d like to listen to the weather report over it
ATurn off B Turn on C Turn out D Turn down
（ ）2 do you write emails to your parents
Once a week
A How often B How long C How soon D Where
（ ）3 Jack usually his homework after dinner
A writes B do C take D buys
（ ）4 I have got to tell you
A two piece of information B two piece of informations
C two pieces of information D two piece of informations
（ ）5 What do on the weekend
A usually he does B does he usually
C does usually he D he usually does
二．求完成句子
1 He helps you to buy tickets(变否定句)
2 She likes listening to the music (变般疑问句做否定回答)
3 You can write the name on the box (划线部分提问)
4 My sister goes to school by bus (划线部分提问)
5 Lily gets up at six (划线部分提问)
Book 1 Module 7 Computer
七十 教学容：Unit3 Language in use
七十二 课型：Revision and application
七十三 教学目标：
1 正确运模块词汇
2 运特殊疑问句询问做某事步骤细节
3 会描述做某事步骤 学间进行真实交际
4简单表示计算机途
七十四 教学重难点：
运特殊疑问句询问做某事步骤细节描述做某事步骤 学间进行真实交际
七十五 教学准备：
节课型Revision and application根新课标求结合教材学生特点采务型互动式进行教学结合情景法交际法听说法纳法等教学方法实施课堂活动开启学生思维通系列条理教学活动引导学生探究学互动合作学学生体验愉快学节课需教具资料：幻灯图片调查表等
七十六 教学程：
教学步骤
教 师 活 动
学 生 活 动
活 动 目
1 Leadingin
（7’）
Show the pictures and ask the students to make dialogues about how to write homework on a computer
1The students act out the dialogues in pairs about how to write homework on a computer with the pictures
复巩固电脑写作业步骤前面两模块学单词描述件事情进程
2 Whiletask(17’)
1 Let the students do Activity 1 and then check the answers
2 Let the students do Activity 2 and then check the answers
3 Organization
4 Organization
5 Let the students do Activity 3 and then check the answers
6Ask the students to write questions with the words in the form
1Match the questions with the answers Then check the answers with the partners
2Complete the conversations
3 They will have a match for writing on the blackboard (See which group can write the most correct sentences of the four groups)
4 Two students will collect the sentences on the blackboard And see which group will do the best
5Complete the sentences with the correct form of the words in brackets
6The students write questions and get ready to interview their best friend
复巩固特殊疑问句法掌握行动词般现时特殊疑问句回答 运般现时询问做某事什方做某事等
Questions
answers
Where use a computer
Who go on the Internet
What do on the computer
When go online
How open a document
…
3 Posttask
(19’)
1 Organization
2 Organization
1Students interview their best friends about using a computer They use the questions in the form above and write down their best friends’ information
2 Make a report about their best friends’ answers using the information in the form Then share with the class
通组进行采访汇报形式操练口头表达力学生学会灵活掌握行动词般现时中特殊疑问句回答
3 Ask the students to write about their using a computer with first next then finally…
4 Organization
3Write an email to the best friends about their using a computer withfirst next then finally…
4 Some students share their emails with the class
通写作方式学描述件事情进程步骤熟练展示出 真实运日常交际中
4 Summary
(1’)
1Get the students to sum up the language points
T What have we learned today
Ss……
2Let the students to choose the best team in this lesson
1Sum up the language points
2To choose the best groups
引导学生节课总结学生做发言培养学生学总结良学惯
简短评价学生课堂表现肯定激励学生学兴趣树立学英语信心
5Homework（1’）
Write an email to your best friend about their using a computer with first next then finally…
板书设计
Module 7 Computer
Unit 3 Language in use 组评价
First next then finally… T1 T2 T3
I usually sometimes don’t usually…
What…
Where…
How often…
达标训练题
． 求改写句子
1 Tom sends three emails to his teacher(划线部分提问)
2 Jim plays games on his computer (变否定句)
3Lucy usually buys a ticket on the Internet (划线部分提问)
4Mr Wang uses his computer in the evening (划线部分提问)
5She often does her homework on the computer (变般疑问句)
二．求完成句子
1常网搜索信息
I often ________ _______ ________ on the Internet
2通常样制定旅游计划
How do you usually _______ _________ _________
3请开电脑
Please ___________ __________ the computer
4没时间买票
I haven’t got any time to _______ ___________
Book 1 Module8 Choosing presents
学情分析
单元教学象初学生学英语热情积极性较高思维活跃爱表现爱活动通半学期学教师指导动参活动合作探究相部分学生英语表达意愿节课容学生非常熟悉实际生活密切相关较感兴趣教学中设计量活动针层次学生学安排选择难易活动题目更机会说英语增强学信心完成课学务时学生胆发表见解强烈英语表达力发挥特长
教材分析
模块话题生日学生较感兴趣话题生日说十分重生日仅种行反映出定文化特点模块第单元邀请朋友参加生日聚会容涉中国孩子外国孩子生日学生解国外生日文化较中西方生日文化培养提高学生跨文化交际意识第二单元题挑选生日礼物课文介绍爱教师教学中纳总结表达喜设计学组织次生日聚会活动帮助学生运表达方式仅增进学生相互间情感交流培养良学关系时生日活动程中引导学生避免浪费注意健康良惯
模块教学目标
（）语言知识目标
1功：Would you like to…发出邀请
2语法：掌握频度副词正确运动词第三称单数形式掌握形容词性物代词法
3词汇：card party present would always great cake never cut give sing happy choose wear shoe spend money film song usually sometimes often ect
4语音：k g θ ð ʃ ʒ
（二）语言技目标
1听：识 Would you like to … 句型发出邀请听懂关生日简单描述
2说：Would you like to …句型发出邀请询问方生日
3读：读懂关生日庆祝短文识爱
4写：正确般现时介绍爱
5演示表达：描述家朋友喜欢特点挑选生日礼物
（三）学策略
1学策略：注意学生活中关生日礼物简单英语
2合作学策略：关心生日情况喜惯
3：学生活相结合
（四）文化意识
解国家赠送生日礼物时风俗惯
（五）情感态度
培养乐交友乐合作健康品格
（六）务
学设计场生日聚会
Unit 1 I always like birthday parties
教 材
英语（新标准）七年级册
课时
1课时
教 学 设 计
课 型
Listening and speaking
教学目标
1Language Knowledge
To use the key vocabulary card party present would always never cut give sing happy secret
To use the key structures Would you like to…
I always often usually sometimes never…
2 Listening and speaking skills
1)To understand conversations involving birthday in listening Improve the students’ listening ability
2) To understand the description of birthday celebration
3) To use the invitation expressed by Would you like to…
4) To ask about one’s birthday
3 Affection and attitudes To like making friends with others and care for others’ likes
教学重点
1 To understand conversations involving birthday in listening Improve the students’ listening ability
2 To talk about one’s birthday
教学方法
听说法练法
教学准备
录音机媒体直观教具
教
学
程
教
学
程
教学
步骤
教师活动
学生活动
活动目
Step1
Pretask
1Warming up
Greet to the Ss
2Lead in
1 Organize the Ss to enjoy and sing a happy song—Happy birthday
Q What is the song about
To lead the title
3 Free talk
Q1 When is your birthday
Q2：How do you celebrate your birthday
1Greet to the teacher
2 Listen to the songs and sing with the recorder
3Answer the question
What is the song about
( Birthday)
4 To read the title once And answer the teacher’s questions
调动学生学情绪导入新课
Step2
While_ task
Presentation of key words
(T What do we usually do on our birthday to lead in this part)
1 Show the Ss the pictures and teach the new words
2 Check the new words
1 Look at the pictures and answer the teacher’s questions They can answer all together or a group or one by one
2 Look at the pictures Say out the new words one by one
媒体展示课文关图片学生直观图片轻松学新词汇新颖动感图片增加学乐趣
Task1Listening
(Activity 2)
1 Play the tape Have the students number the words as they hear Then check the answers
2 Guide the students to learn the conversation (Activity 3)
(T I have a friend his name is Tony This Saturday is his birthday What does he do And What about his friends to lead in the conversation)
3 Play the tape again and get the students to listen and choose the best answers Then check
Task1 Listening
1 Listen and number the words as they hear Then check
2 Listen to the conversation and choose the best answers Then check
1Daming’s birthday is on _______
A Sunday B Friday
C Saturday
2 Tony likes _______
A cards B birthday parties C flowers
3 Daming’s mother never makes _____
A Jiaozi B a birthday cake C noodles
4 Lingling ______ gets birthday presents
A always B sometimes C never
学生听录音根录音容作出判断加强学生课文理解训练学生听力材料中够听取信息培养学生细节听力技巧
Task2 Reading
(Acitivity 3)
1 Let the Ss read the conversation and do Activity3
2 Let them check their answers
3 Organize the students to read the conversation with the video
4 Ask the Ss to work with their groups to read the conversation then ask several pairs to act it out
Task3：Language points
1 Organize three students to come to the teacher’s desk and show out some phrases and the difficult points
2 Help the students to solve the difficult points
Task 4 Practice
1 Ask the students to do Activity4 and retell it
2 Let the students complete the sentences with the words from the box then check the answers (Activity5)
Task 2 Reading
1 Read the conversation and do Activity 3
2 Check the answers one by one
3 Read the conversation with the video
4 Read the conversation in groups then read in roles
Task3 Language points
1 Three students come to the teacher’s desk to show out some phrases and the difficult points the other students listen to them carefully and note them
2 Solve the difficult points with the teacher’s help
Task 4 Practice
1 Do Activity4 individually and retell it
2 Finish off Activity 5 then check the answers
环节操练学生通细读话获取具体信息组活动通学生间合作学巩固节课语言点培养学生语言表达力表演中锻炼学生胆量
Step3
Posttask
Task5：Make a survey
1 Let the Ss work in groups of three One interviews the other two students about their birthdays
2 Let the Ss do a report according to the information
3 Ask three or four Ss to report their surveys Let other Ss listen and choose the best reporters
1 Work in groups of three One interviews the other two students about their school things Use the questions
A What do you usually do on your birthday
B I usually…
A Would your friends like to come to your birthday party
B Yes they’ d like to
A What parents do you get from your friends
B I always often usually get… but I never get…
2 After finishing it they must do a report
3 Three or four Ss report their surveys to the class The other Ss listen and choose the best reporters
课学知识学间进行采访交流记信息信息进行整理汇报样巩固课重点句型培养综合运力探究力
Step4 Sum up
Sum up
总结纳识记
巩固课堂知识
Step5
Homework
Let the Ss finish the exercises in the paper
Finish the exercises in the paper
通课练加强消化掌握课堂知识
板书设计
Moule8 Choosing presents 组评介：
Unit 1 I always like birthday parties T1 T2 T3
1 Would you like to…
Yes I’d like to Sorry I’m afraid I can’t I have to…
2 I always usually often sometimes never…
教学反思：
1 整节课气氛活跃课堂引入然新颖容真实老师学生感兴趣歌曲入手引起学生兴趣图片出现学生欣然接受新知识点师生双边关系融洽学生轻松谐气氛中学英语表现感觉学乐趣更激发学兴趣
2 活动设计贴学生历生活务设计具明确目性操作性务简繁易难层层深入吸引全体学生参
3 充分训练学生听说读写力尤读写综合部分设计练题环节学生较课堂操练进入课书面练效果较
4 存问题改进措施
1) 表演汇报学生较积极口语水限导致参表演汇报学生面够广力鼓励学生胆参处理分层教学学生特长充分发挥
2) 互动评价够元化应进步改进完善
附调查表
Survey
1 Make a survey
Names
What do you usually do on your birthday
What presents do you get
Would your friends like to come
Peter
have a birthday party eat noodles eat birthday cake
a birthday cake (always)
a birthday cake (often)
Yes
2 面句子采访学：
AWhat do you usually do on your birthday Peter
B I usually…
A Would your friends like to come to your birthday party
B Yes they’ d like to
A What parents do you get from your friends
B I always often usually get… but I never get…
3 Give a report and choose the best reporter (评出佳报告员)
Report
Peter usually has a birthday party eats noodles and birthday cakes on his birthday His friends would like to come to his party He always gets a birthday card and he often gets a birthday cake from his birthday…
练题
求完成句子
1 Tom gives me a present (改义句)
Tom _____ a present __ ___
2 never plays he games computer (连词成句)
____________________________
3 She does her homework at home(改否定句)
She ______ ___ her homework at home
4 This Saturday is my birthday (划线部分提问)
_____ __ _ your birthday
二根汉语提示完成句子
1 托尼通常收张生日贺卡Tony ______ ____ a birthday card
2 常做蛋糕He ____ _____ a cake
3 汉语英语唱歌He ____ the song in French
4 生日聚会样？_____ _____ a birthday party
5 举办生日聚会We _____ ____ a birthday party
Unit 2 She often goes to concerts
七十七 教学容：Unit2 She often goes to concerts
七十八 课型：Reading and writing
七十九 教学目标：
1掌握单元单词 choose wear shoe spend money film song weekend
2读懂关生日短文识爱
3般现时介绍爱描述家朋友喜特点挑选生日礼物
八十 教学重难点：
1 理解关生日短文
2 般现时介绍爱
八十 教学准备：
课堂整体运务型教学模式阅读课四阶段教学模式课指导学生通阅读获取信息培养学生阅读技教学程中采媒体手段辅助教学利种图片题务贯穿整教学程节课需准备：PPT课件挂图录音机课堂练表格奖品
八十二 预求：
根音标学课新单词
八十三 教学程：
教学
步骤
教师活动
学生活动
设计意图
Step One
Warmingup (5’)
1Lead in
(1)Ask students to discuss If your birthday is tomorrow What presents would you like Why
(2)Let students look at the pictures and choose their birthday presents
(1)To discuss their birthdays presents and reasons
(2) Look at the pictures and choose their presents
通讨引导学生回顾节课容巩固般现时语法知识通环节活跃课堂气氛说句子中考验学生Unit1知识掌握程度训练学生反应形中培养学生胆说英语惯
Step Two
Pre
reading
(5’)
1 Learn the new words
(1) Show students some pictures and check the new words
(2) Ask the students to label the picture with the words from the box ( Activity 1)
(1) Look at the pictures to say out some new words
(2) Label the pictures with the picture with the words from the box then check the answers ( Activity 1)
引导学生谈图片训练学生描述物品物力描述时学新单词句型学生扫清阅读障碍
Step Three
While
reading (18’)
1 Scanning
(1)Ask students to scan
the passage and answer
Who does the passage talk about
2 Skimming
1 Ask students to skim the passage and match the people with what they like doing (Activity 2)
2 Let the students check the answers
3Careful reading
(1)Paragraphs 1 and 2
① Read Para 1 and 2then answer the following questions
1How often do Daming’s grandparents get some exercise
2Does Daming’ mother like chocolate
3 How many silk scarves does she have got
②Organize some students to come to the blackboard and show out some difficult language points that they found in these two paragraphs
(2)Paragraph 3 and 4
①Read para3and 4then answer the following questions
4Does Betty’s cousin like reading
5 What does she often do
6 Does Tony’s sister like music
②Organize some students to come to the blackboard and show out some difficult language points that they found in these two paragraphs
(3)Paragraphs 5
①Let the students fill in the blanks after reading it
Lingling’s aunt and uncle like _______ but they _____ ______ go to football matchesThey usually watch football _____ _______They like _______ AC Milan
②Organize some students to come to the blackboard and show out some difficult language points that they found in this paragraph
(4) choose presents from the pictures in Activity1 for them
1Daming’s grandparents __________
2 Daming’s mother______
3 Betty’s cousin_______
4Tony’s sister________
5Lingling’s aunt and uncle
_________
(1) Scan the passage and answer the question：
Who does the passage talk about
1 Skim the passage and match the people with what they like doing (Activity 2)
2 Check the answers
①Read Para 1 and 2then answer the questions
②Some students come to the blackboard and show out some difficult language points that they found in these atwo paragraphs
①Read Para 3 and 4 and answer the questions
②Some students come to the blackboard and show out some difficult language points that they found in these two paragraphs
①The students fill in the blanks after reading it
②Some students come to the blackboard and show out some difficult language points that they found in this paragraph
(4) choose presents from the pictures in Activity1 for them
求学生快速阅文章回答问题帮助学生理解课文容
通学生快速阅读培养学生获取旨力进步理解文章容 进步学做铺垫
学生带着务（问题）阅读课文找答案助学生更加准确获取信息提高阅读效果技学生通分层次阅读文章获取具体信息知识点课文理解分段学突破组活动通学生间合作学学生充分实践运语言激发学生创造性思维发展
Step Four
Post
reading
(10’)
1 Retell
①Let the students fill
in the blanks according
to the passage
（Activity 3）
②Call back the answers
from two students then
retell the short passage
in the whole class
2Writing
① T It is more important to show your love for your parents and your friends So we should learn to thank
② Write about the things you like or don’t like and the things your best friend likes or doesn’t like and choose presents for them
①Fill in the blanks according
to the passage (Activity 3
②Call back the answers then
retell the short passage
① Write about the things you like or don’t like and the things your best friend likes or doesn’t like and choose presents for them
复述课文学生加深课文容理解
通写作学生巩固学增强写作力适量口头练学生巩固课时语言重点
Step Five
Summary（1’）
1Get the students to
sum up the language points
T What have we learned today
Ss…
2 Let the students to choose the best team in this lesson
1 Sum up the language points
2 To choose the best groups
引导学生节课总结学生做发言培养学生学总结良学惯
简短评价学生课堂表现肯定激励学生学兴趣树立学英语信心
Step Six
Home
work
（1’）
Write a passage
Write about the things you like or don’t like and the things your best friend likes or doesn’t like and choose presents for them
Finish the homework
课作业助学生巩固已学知识补充方面锻炼写作阅读拓展学生终完全掌握语言实践运语言
七板书设计：（略）
达标训练题
单项选择
( ) 1 ____ mother likes singing
A Tony B Tony’s C Tony
( ) 2 There is _______ shoes under the bed
A a lot B a pair of C a
( ) 3I have a lot of _______
A magazines B novel C book
( ) 4 He doesn’t ______ the piano on Monday
A plays B playing C play
( ) 5 She likes ____ and she reads ___ book
A reading a lot B reading lots of C to read lot of
二求完成列句子
1 His favorite food is rice (改义句)
He ______ rice ________
2 She plays the piano and likes to sing (改否定句)
She _______ _______ the piano _______ like to sing
3 He often goes to the cinema (改般疑问句)
____ he often ___ to the cinema
4 Betty’s aunt and uncle live in the USA (划线部分提问)
______ __ Betty’s aunt and uncle ___
Book 1 Module8 Choosing presents
八十四 教学容：Unit3 Language in use
八十五 课型：Revision and application
八十六 教学目标：
1 正确运always often sometimes never usually often
2正确运动词第三称单数形式
3运学知识描述家朋友喜特点挑选生日礼物
八十七 教学重难点：
运学知识描述家朋友喜特点挑选生日礼物
八十八 教学准备：
节课型Revision and application根新课标求结合教材学生特点采务型互动式进行教学结合情景法交际法听说法纳法等教学方法实施课堂活动开启学生思维通系列条理教学活动引导学生探究学互动合作学学生体验愉快学节课需教具资料：幻灯图片调查表等
八十九 教学程：
教学步骤
教 师 活 动
学 生 活 动
活 动 目
1 Leadingin
（8’）
1Show some pictures and ask students to discuss in pairs and make sentences like these
I like watching films
I often go to the cinema
1 Discuss in pairs and make sentences like these
I like watching films
I often go to the cinema
Review and consolidate the sentences which they have learn
2 Whiletask(20’)
1Explain the grammar to the students 般现时
2 Let the students work in pairs Ask and answer questions about Grandpa
(Activity 1)
Does Grandpa always watch TV
Yes he does
3 Ask the students to do Activity 3 Rewrite the sentences with the words in brackets( Activity 3 )
1 Listen to the teacher to explain the grammar般现时
2 work in pairs Ask and answer questions about Grandpa
(Activity 1)
3 Do Activity3 and then check the answers
Review and consolidate the grammar and vocabulary just learned in the first two units
4 Ask the students to do Activity 4 Complete the sentences with Would you like or Let’s
5 Let the students do Activity5 Read the emails and check the true sentences ( Activity 5)
6 Ask students to read Around the world and then answer the questions after reading
Q1：What do people often give to children as birthday presents in the UK and the US
Q2 When do the children open their presents
6 Check the answers
4 Complete the sentences with Would you like or Let’s
5 Read the emails and check the true sentences ( Activity 5)
6 Read Around the world and answer the questions after reading
Q1：What do people often give to children as birthday presents in the UK and the US
Q2 When do the children open their presents
6 Show the answers
Review the words
Enlarge the knowledge about the world
3 Posttask
(10’)
1Ask students to work in groups of six Planning a classmate’s birthday party
2Ask the students to say out their ideas
3Let students do some exercises and then check
1Work in six
Talk about their ideas of the plan
2Say out the ideas
3 Do some exercises and then check
To practice the skill of speaking
Practice the language points
4 Summary
(1’)
Ask the students to say out what to learn
Students conclude the knowledge that they learn
Let the students internalize the grammar they’ve learned in this module
5Homework（1’）
Finish the workbook of Unit 3
板书设计
达标训练题
动词适形式填空
1 He ________ TV every evening (watch)
2 We always _____ to school on foot (go)
3 Tom with his classmates often ______ football after school (play)
4 Your shoes _____ under the bed (be)
5 His uncle usually _____ to work by bus (go)
6 I always _____ up at six in the morning (get)
7 John ______ like his father (look)
二单项选择
1 — Can your father drive
—Yes and he usually _____ to school
A drove B is driving C drives D has driven
2 Tom _____ to work by bicycle
A usually go B go usually C usually goes D goes usually
3 Jerry _________ for school
A is usually late B usually is late C is late usually D goes usually late
4 — Do you often exercise Jason
— No _____ I don’t like sports at all
A always B often C usually D never
5 — Is the cat ______ friend
— Yes _______
A your it isn’t B he it is C your it is D her it isn’t
Module 9 People and places
九十 教学容：Unit 1 We’re enjoying the school trip a lot
九十 课型：Listening and speaking
九十二 教学目标：
1掌握单元词汇短语：call lie lie in the sun take photos wait walk a few enjoy go back
2掌握现进行时态be (am is are) +doing法结构
3听懂含现进行时态简短话
4转述正做发生事情根图片视频真实行等描述正发生事情
九十三 教学重难点：
掌握现进行时态句子肯定疑问否定形式现进行时态叙述正发生事情
九十四 教学准备：
课指导学生通听力获取信息培养学生听力技教师教学时量游戏图片flash动画种媒体引起学生学兴趣引导学生交际中动态生成学生话说乐合作分享样利更运课知识达提高综合运语言力目时培养学生合作精神发展思维想象等力教学程中采媒体手段辅助教学利种图片题务贯穿整教学程节课需准备：PPT课件挂图录音机课堂练表格奖品
九十五 预求：
1根音标学课新单词
2查找相关资料找出认课较重语言点短语
九十六 教学程：
教学
步骤
教师活动
学生活动
设计意图
Step One
Warmingup (3’)
Lead in
1Free talk
(1)Show some pictures and ask Ss like these
What is he she doing now
Where are they What are they doing now
(2)Show more pictures and let Ss talk about them try to use the sentences with be doing
1Free talk
(1)Answer the questions
He is listening to music
She is dancing now
They are playing basketball
(2)Talk with partners and try to use the sentences with be doing
学生熟悉日常活动free talk程中感受新语言项目通环节活跃课堂气氛调动学生学兴趣
Step Two
Pretask(5’)
Task1Check the new words
1 Show some pictures and things to get the students to say out the new words and phrases
2Organize the students to read the new words together
3Ask the Ss to describe the picture and try to use the words in the box(Activity 1)
Where is Betty What is she doing
What is Lingling doing What are they doing
1Look at the pictures and things to say out the new words and phrases
2 Read the new words and phrases together
3 To describe the picture and try to use the words in the box(Activity 1)
引导学生谈实物ppt图片检查学生词汇掌握程度训练学生表达力通图片情景学单词做词离句Check完词汇时做Activity 1进行巩固
Step Three
Whiletask (20’)
Task2listening
1Play the tape ask the students to listen and number the pictures (Activity 2)
2Ask the students to Listen to the conversation carefully and match the people 15 with the actions ag
T Now we are going to listen to a dialogue between Betty and her mum Betty is in China and her mum is at home in America Let’s listen and match
1 Listen to the tape and
number the pictures (Activity 2)
2 Listen to the conversation carefully and match the people 17 with the actions ag
利听读写练方式加强学生课文理解培养学生细节听力技巧够获取信息训练培养学生细节听力技巧
通视频听读话帮助学生进步理解课文容
组活动通学生间合作学学生充分实践运语言培养团结合作精神
通学生台展示找语言点培养学生胆量培养学力
教师点拨补充语言点学生进步理解知识点
通进步描述话中物正做事情加深课文掌握时锻炼口语
1Betty a eat an ice cream
2 Tony b have lunch
3 Wang Hui c lie in the sun
4 Lingling e stand on the Great Wall
5 Daming f take photos
g buy presents
3Organize the students to check their answers
Task 3 Reading
1Organize the students to read the conversation with the video
2Ask the Ss to work with their groups to read the conversation
3 Have a competition Read the dialogue in groups and choose the best group
Task 4 Solve the language points
1Organize students to come to the blackboard and show out some difficult language points that they found
2Help the students to solve the difficult points
Task5 Retell the dialogue
1 Organize the students to complete the table(Activity 3)
2 Organize the students to underline the correct words(Activity 4)
3 Ask the students to work in pairs Say what people are doing in the conversation using the form in Activity 3
3Check the answers
1Read the conversation with the video
2 Read the conversation in groups
3 Read the dialogue in groups and choose the best group
1 Students come to the blackboard to show out some language points the other students listen to them carefully and note
2Solve the difficult points with the teacher’s help
1Students complete the table(Activity 3)
2Students underline the correct words
(Activity 4)
3Students work in pairs Say what people are doing in the conversation using the form in Activity 3
Step Four
Posttask
(9’)
Task 6Do some speaking
1Work in pairs Ask students to talk about the photos which they brought and say what people are doing in the photos at the moment
A This is a photo of my family
I’m sitting on the grass and
reading My father mother
brother sister is … We are
having a good time
B In this photo we are enjoy ing the school trip Li Ming is … Tony is …
2 Have some students to come to the blackboard to talk about their photos
3．Play a guessing game Have some Ss to do the actions in front of the class The other Ss guess what is he doing
4Ask students to do some
Exercises and then check
1Work in pairs Students talk about the photos which they brought and say what people are doing in the photos at the moment
2Some students to come to the blackboard to talk about their photos
3Play a guessing game Some Ss do the actions in front of the class The other Ss guess what is he doing
4．Do the exercises then check
通做介绍片训练学生说力学生加深课文容理解适量口头练学生巩固课时语言重点
通动作猜迷游戏激发学生学兴趣组竞争意识进步强化巩固现进行时态法
通笔头练进步巩固学知识
Step Five
Summary（2’）
1Get the students to sum up the language points
T What have we learned today
Ss……
2Let the students to choose the best team in this lesson
1Sum up the language points
2To choose the best groups
引导学生节课总结学生做发言培养学生学总结良学惯
简短评价学生课堂表现肯定激励学生学兴趣树立学英语信心
Step Six
Home
work
（1’）
1Choose one of photos and write down what people are doing
2Finish the exercises in the workbook of Unit 1
Finish the homework
课作业助学生巩固已学知识补充方面锻炼
板书
设计
Module9 People and places 组评价
Unit1 We’re enjoying the school trip a lot T1 T2 T3
1Sentences
I’ m standing on the Great Wall of China and talking to you
Wang Hui is taking a lot of photos
Daming is having lunch and lying in the sun
2 动词ing形式变化规
达标训练题
单项选择
（ ）1At the momenteveryone dumplings
A are eating B eating C is eating D eat
（ ）2Listen She in the classroom
A is singing B sing C to sing D is sing
（ ）3Americans like the sun
A lie in B lying in C to lie under D lying on
（ ）4My father enjoys piano
A to play B playing C play the D playing the
（ ）5This is not easy work
A a B C one D an
二 动词适形式填空
1 Listen She (sing) a song
2 Look Tony (take) photos
3 John (play) basketball at this moment
4 What are you doing
I (run) for the bus
5 Daming (eat)lunch and (lie)in the sun at the moment
Book 1 Module9 People and places
教学容：Unit2 They’re waiting for the buses or trains
二 课型：Reading and writing
三 教学目标：
1够正确单元单词词组
2够读懂包含现进行时态句型简单文章
3够介绍国家时差时间里国家做什事情
4掌握明信片格式运现进行时态正确写张明信片
5中外中解国家生活情况培养学生异国文化生活俗兴趣提高国文化认识进步树立正确语言学观
四教学重难点：
1够阅读包含现进行时态句型简单文章够介绍国家时间里做什事情（重点）
2读懂正发生事情描述学会明信片描述正做事情（难点）
五 教学准备：
课堂整体运务型教学模式阅读课四阶段教学模式课指导学生通阅读获取信息培养学生阅读技通解国家生活俗培养学生文素养异国文化认识教学程中采媒体手段辅助教学利种图片题务贯穿整教学程节课需准备：PPT课件挂图录音机课堂练表格奖品
六 预求：
1根音标学课新单词词组
2查找相关资料找出认课较重语言点短语
七 教学程：
教学
步骤
教师活动
学生活动
设计意图
Step One
Warmingup (3’)
1Lead in
Ask one Ss to do the action with the given words the other Ss guess and say like this He is swimming running…
2．See and say
Show some pictures to revise the pattern Get students to ask and answer in pairs For example What is she doing She is getting up
Say the sentences like this He is swimming running…
Ask and answer in pairs For example What is she doing She is getting up
通环节活跃课堂气氛说句子复节课现进行时态训练学生反应
通组合作进步考验学生Unit1知识掌握程度培养学生胆说英语惯
Step Two
Pre
reading
(5’)
1Show students a map of the world and some famous cities Tell them there are 24 time tones in the world and at the same moment people in different countries have different time tones and they are doing different activities
For example It’s 100 am in Beijing People are sleeping People aren’t having dinner（Activity 1）
2Let the students learn words and phrases they will use in the reading
materials
1Look at the world’s map and the cities learn the time tones Say people in different countries have different time tones and they are doing different activities For example It’s 100 am in London People are … People aren’t … （Activity 1）
2Learn the words and phrases they will use in the reading
materials
Such as running for trains having afternoon tea going to the opera watching a ballet getting dressed etc
引导学生谈图片 步骤中 学积极动发言答案统老师鼓励学生胆表达训练学生描述图画力描述时学新单词短语学生扫清阅读障碍
Step Three
While
reading (18’)
Step Three
While
reading (20’)
1 Scanning
(1)Ask students to scan
the passage
T People in different places of the world are doing different things Please read the passage and match the
paragraphs with the pictures in Activity 1
(2) Organize the students to check their answers
2 Skimming
(1)Ask students to skim the passage
T Read it quickly again and choose the correct answer in Activity 3
(2) Organize the students to check their answers
3Careful reading
(1)Paragraph A
Ask the Ss to read Paragraph A and answer the questions in groups
1) In London what are people doing at 5 PM
2) Some are having afternoon tea at home what are other people doing
(2)Paragraphs B&C
Ask the Ss to read Paragraphs B&C and check the true sentences
(3)Paragraph D&E
Ask the Ss to read Paragraphs D&E and complete the passages
(1)Scan the passage and match the paragraphs with the pictures in Activity 1
(2)Check the answers
(1)Skim the passage Read it quickly again and choose the correct answer in Activity 3
(2) Check the answers
Read Paragraph A and answer the questions in groups
1) In London what are people doing at 5 PM
____________________ ___
2) Some are having afternoon tea at home what are other people doing
_____________________ __
Read Paragraphs B&C and check the true sentences
1) People aren’t having dinner at home at eight PM ( )
2) Some are going to the cinema or watching films ( )
3)People in Beijing are sleeping at one o’clock
( )
3 Read paragraphs D&E and complete the passages
In Los Angeles it’s nine o’clockPeople aren’t ________ washing or__________ They’re working Children are starting ___________
In ______ it’s midday People aren’t working They are ___________ They are eating _______or hot dogs and drinking______They’re seeing
friends_______or shopping
求学生快速阅读文章段活动图片连起快速掌握文章旨意思
通学生快速阅读培养学生获取旨力进步掌握含现进行时态句子
学生带着务（问题）阅读课文找答案助学生更加准确获取信息提高阅读效果技学生通分层次阅读文章获取具体信息知识点课文理解分段学突破组活动通学生间合作学学生充分实践运语言激发学生创造性思维发展
Step Four
Post
reading
(12’)
1Retell
(1)Let the students retell the last two paragraphs
2Writing
(1)Show a postcard from Betty’ mum
T Here is a postcard from Betty’s mum She is in Los Angeles now Please read the postcard and check the true sentences(Activity 5)
(2) Ask Ss to writing Betty’s postcard to her grandma from the Great Wall (Activity 7)
(3) Ask Ss to read Betty’s postcard in the class
(1) Try to retell the last two paragraphs
In Los Angeles it’s nine o’clockPeople aren’t ________ washing or__________ They’re working Children are starting ___________
In ______ it’s midday People aren’t working They are ___________ They are eating _______or hot dogs and drinking______They’re seeing
friends_______or shopping
(1)Read the postcard and check the true sentences(Activity 5)
(2) Writing a Betty’s postcard to her grandma from the Great Wall (Activity 7)
Dear Grandma
Now I’ m standing
Love
Betty
(3)Read Betty’s postcard in the class
复述课文学生加深课文容理解适量口头练学生巩固课时语言重点
通学明信片格式学会正确书写明信片描述正做事情加强巩固模块重句型语言点训练学生书面表达力口语表达力体现学生学英语英语综合力
Step Five
Summary（2’）
1Get the students to
sum up the language points
T What have we learned today
Ss……
2Let the students to choose the best team in this lesson
1Sum up the language points
2To choose the best groups
引导学生节课总结学生做发言培养学生学总结良学惯
简短评价学生课堂表现肯定激励学生学兴趣树立学英语信心
Step Six
Home
work
（1’）
Write a postcard to your best friend to tell him her
What are your family doing at the moment
Finish the homework
课作业助学生巩固已学知识补充方面锻炼写作阅读拓展学生终完全掌握语言实践运语言
板书
设计
Module9 People and places 组评价
Unit2 They’re waiting for the buses or trains T1 T2 T3
1Sentences
In London it’s … and people are leaving work
Some people are …Some are …
In Beijing it’s … so people aren’t
2 明信片书写格式
达标训练题
单项选择
（ ）1 I can’t find Mary because all the girls are all the same clothes
A wearing B dressing C putting on D put on
（ ）2Can you him clearly (清楚)？
A to hear B hear C listen D to listen
（ ）3 My brother often me at the school gate
A is waiting B is waiting for C waits D waits for
（ ）4Now we’re in Beijing We’re Beijing tomorrow
A leave for B leaveing for C leaving D leaving for
（ ）5People run buses after work
A after B for C about D of
二完成句子
1现5点钟 喝午茶
_____five and people ____________________
2孩开始课
The boy _________________________
3探朋友
They _______________________________
4Tony 写明信片
_____ Tony ____________________Yes ____________
5莫斯科正电视者家里玩游戏
In Moscow people or
Book 1 Module9 People and places
四 教学容：Unit3 Language in use
五 课型：Revision and application
六 教学目标：
1正确运模块词汇： call lie in the sun take photos of wait for a few on sale enjoy hot dog restaurant go back等
2识话中谈正发生事情
3转述正做发生事情
4运现进行时态描述正做事情学间进行真实交际
七 教学重难点：
根图片真实行等描述正发生事情
八 教学准备：
节课型Revision and application根新课标求结合教材学生特点采务型互动式进行教学结合情景法交际法听说法纳法等教学方法实施课堂活动开启学生思维通系列条理教学活动引导学生探究学互动合作学学生体验愉快学节课需教具资料：幻灯图片调查表等
九 教学程：
教学步骤
教 师 活 动
学 生 活 动
活 动 目
Step One
Leadin
（3’）
1 Show the flash of some pigs but students can’t see what they are doing Get students to guess
T What is he doing Is he running Is he singing
1See and guess
He She is …
游戏引出话题活跃课堂气氛鼓励学生胆表达时复巩固现进行时态句型
Step Two
Whiletask(20’)
1 Show students the phrases ask and answer questions in pairs (Activity 4)
2 Let students see nine sentences and ask them to try to find out the rules of v ing forms
3Ask the students to do some exercises
1 Use the given phrases
ask and answer like this ：
A Are you running for a bus
B No Yes
2 See nine sentences and try to find out the rules of v ing forms
3Do some exercises
1）The girls_______(buy) hot dogs
2）Daming ________
(have) an ice cream
3）Tony _________(talk) on his cell phone
4）Betty_________(carry) a bag
5）Lingling_______(shop) in the mall
通两组问答训练学生胆开口表达真正学运英语培养学生胆合作精神
纳现进行时结构复巩固现进行时法
通笔头练时巩固模块重语言点
4Show the picture about Betty’s school trip on the Great Wall Ask Ss to say
(Activity 1)
5Ask the students to complete the conversation between Tony and his father
T Tony is visiting the Forbidden City now and he is calling his dad
(Activity 2)
3 Organize Ss to check the answers
4 Have Ss write about
the pictures
(Activity 2)
5 Have one student show his answer to the class
4Look at the picture and say what they are doing
(Activity 1)
5Complete the conversation between Tony and his father
(Activity 2)
3 Check the answers
4 Write about the
pictures(Activity 2)
5 Check the answers
通量口头训练笔头训练进步强化现进行时法加强词汇理解运鼓励学生相互合作相互学竞争提高英语学兴趣学生快乐中学
Step Three
Posttask
(14’)
1 Around the world
Show students pictures of the US
T There are different time zones from New York to Hawaii And people in different places are doing different things Please read and
finish the blanks
2 Make a radio report
Have Ss work in group s of three of four And plan a radio report
3Organization
4Organization
1 Read Around the world
And finish the blanks
It’s in New York and people are It’s in Los Angeles children are
It’s in Hawaii most people are
2Work in group s of three of four And plan a radio report
What news you’d like to report
List the activities
Make notes
Write down the news
3Show their reports to the whole class
4 Choose the best report
通阅读快速获取信息纳信息培养学生获取重信息力学外国文化生活俗增强学生提高国文化认识
通组合作讨完成新闻报道运模块学词汇句型运正确 时态表达鼓励学胆想象胆表达想法
Step Four
Summary
(2’)
Ask the students to conclude the usage of
the present continue tense
Students conclude the usage of the present continue tense
学生纳总结学重语言点语法点
Step Five
Homework（1’）
Write a news report
板书设计
Module9 People and places
Unit 3 Language in use
现进行时：be +Ving
达标训练题
单项选择
（ ）1 Wang Hui is __________ his mother on his cell phone
A drawing B leaving C calling D telling
（ ）2 Don’t talk here They are __________
A walking B playing C sitting D sleeping
（ ）3 —__________ the trip
—Yes we are
A Does he enjoy B Do you enjoy
C Is Sam enjoying D Are you enjoying
（ ）4 The tiger ____ breakfast
A run for B runs C is running D is running for
（ ）5He usually sends ________ postcards to his friend
A a lot B lot of C a lot of D a lots
二书面表达
写少5现进行时句子描述校园里正发生事情语句通意思连贯
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Unit 1 Are you getting ready for Spring Festival
学
情
分
析
17年级学生学英语较浓厚兴趣热情活泼动奇心强表现欲尊心强希老师学认赞扬
2学课前学生已够娴熟两合作组方法进行语言表达交流基英语相结合英语开展思维发表意见学生七年级初步解关现进行时句型单元前面基础引入现进行时般疑问句通学生较感兴趣话题Spring Festival教师预设务中引导学生交际中动态生成学生话说乐合作分享样利更运课知识达提高综合运语言力目
教
材
分析
Module 10节日话题容谈春节准备重点学现进行时般疑问句结构单元目标学进行时般疑问句结构通听读呈现般疑问句功运说写务循环训练强化语言知识
教
学
目
标
目标：①To understand the conversation about the Spring Festival
②To recognize phrases and recognize short answers
③To talk about the Festivals with given information
重难点：
vocabulary—Spring Festival ready get ready for learn dragon dragon dance lantern sweep
structures What is Lingling doing
She’s getting ready for the Spring Festival
Is your mother working
Yes she is No she isn＇t
教
学
策
略
模
式
课指导学生通听力获取信息培养学生听力技课堂采媒体手段辅助教学轻松愉快氛围中较真实语境联系学生生活实际结合已知识验运学语言基础知识学互相学学生语言实践中相互启发生成体验成功培养学生合作精神发展思维想象等力
教学程中种图片题务贯穿整教学程学生够表感觉知觉系动词表达感觉积极合作学增加课堂直观性趣味性学效性加课堂密度提高教学效果活跃课堂气氛鼓励学生积极参加活动中教学中采取组竞赛形式设置奖品学生学中乐乐中学
课堂整体运务型教学模式阅读课四阶段教学模式（参中学课堂教学模式选编第六章P95）
教学
准备
PPT课件课堂活动表格奖品
教学程
教
学
活
动
教
学
活
动
教
学
活
动
教学
步骤
教师活动
学生活动
设计意图
Step One
Warmingup (2’)
Lead in
1Organize the Ss to enjoy and sing a happy song—Happy New Year
2T What festival is the song about
To lead the title
1Listen to the songs and sing with the video
2 Answer the question
What festival is the song about
( Spring Festival)
3 To read the title once
先首新年歌引出节课题通环节活跃课堂气氛调动学生学兴趣
Step Two
Pretask(5’)
Task1Check the new words
1Show some pictures and get the students to check the new words
eg T What’s the girl doing
S She’s making lanterns
T Is her grandma making lanterns with her
S No she isn’t She’s cooking the meal
2Organize the students to read the new words together
1See the pictures and say the new words
2 Read the new words together
引导学生谈图片训练学生表达力通图片情景学单词现进行时句型做词离句
Step Three
Whiletask (22’)
Task2listening
(1) Play the tape Have the students match the people with what they are doing Then check the answers
T The new year is coming
What should we do(Activity 2)
(2)Guide the students to learn the conversation (Activity 3)
(T The ring bells Who’s that to lead in the conversation)
Task 3 Reading
(1) Organize the students to read the conversation with the video
(2)Ask the Ss to work with their groups to read the conversation
(3) Organize the students to choose the correct answers (Activity3)
(4)Organize the students to check their answers one by one
Task 4Language points
(1)Organize students to come to the blackboard and show out some difficult language points
(2)Help the students to solve the difficult points
Task 5Retell the dialogue
(1)Ask the students to complete the passage
(2)Ask the students to retell it
(1) Listen to the tape and match the people with what they are doing Then check
(2) Listen to the conversation and choose the best answers Then check
(1)Read the conversation with the video
(2) Read the conversation in groups
(3) Read the conversation again and choose the correct answers (Activity 3)
(4) Check the answers one by one
(1) Students come to the blackboard to show out some language points the other students listen to them carefully and note
(2)solve the difficult points with the teacher’s help
(1)Complete the passage
(2) Retell the dialogue
利听读练方式加强学生课文理解培养学生细节听力技巧
够听取信息训练培养学生细节听力技巧
学生带着务（问题）阅读课文找答案助学生更加准确获取信息提高阅读效果技学生通细读话获取具体信息组活动通学生间合作学学生充分实践运语言激发学生创造性思维发展通解释语言点复述话学生进步熟悉课文理解话
Step Four
Posttask
(10’)
Task 6Do some speaking
(1)Show some pictures and organize the students to talk about the other festivals
（2） Help the students to make dialogues of the other festivals like this
A Are they eating birthday cakes
B No they aren’t
A what are they doing
B They are eating moon cakes
（3）Organize the students to make dialogues in pairs according to some pictures and information
4 Have the Ss act out their
new dialogues
（1）Look and say out the other festivals
（2）make dialogues of the other festivals with the teacher’s help
（3） Work in pairs and make dialogues according to some pictures and information
4 Act out the new dialogues
通学节日次训练学生说力学生加深课文容理解适量口头练学生巩固课时语言重点
Step Six
Home
work
（1’）
发挥想象连词成文(4060字)
(festival get ready for cook the meal lantern sweep away cutting paper at work)
Finish the homework
课作业助学生巩固已学知识补充方面锻炼写作阅读拓展学生终完全掌握语言实践运语言
板书设计
Module10 Spring Festival 组评价
Unit1 Are you getting ready for Spring Festival
Is her grandma making lanterns with her T1 T2 T3
No she isn’t
What’s she doing
She’s cooking the meal
教学反思
达标训练题
根汉语提示 完成句子 空词
1 元宵节通常吃元宵
On Lantern _______ we usually ____ yuanxiao
2 贝蒂正学舞龙
Betty is _______ a dragon _____
3 玲玲家正春节做准备
Lingling’s ______ are ______ _____ ____ Spring Festival
4 正唱圣诞歌
They are _______ Christmas songs
5 正做灯笼
They are _______ _______
Book1 Module10 Spring Festival
十 教学容：Unit2 My mother’s cleaning our house and sweeping away bad luck
十 课型：Reading and writing
十二 教学目标：
1够正确列单词词组：Christmas February January before sweep away luck table celebrate traditional dumpling programme sweater coat mean lucky merry tell
2够通阅读材料读懂描述春节短文段落相应图片搭配
3继续学现进行时区分现进行时般现时法
4学知识描述英国圣诞节
十三 教学重难点：
1够通阅读材料读懂描述春节短文段落相应图片搭配熟练运现进行时（重点）
2区分现进行时般现时法 学知识描述英国圣诞节（难点）
十四 教学准备：
课堂整体运务型教学模式阅读课四阶段教学模式课指导学生通阅读获取信息培养学生阅读技教学程中采媒体手段辅助教学利种图片题务贯穿整教学程节课需准备：PPT课件挂图录音机课堂练表格奖品
十五 教学程：
教学
步骤
教师活动
学生活动
设计意图
Step One
Warmingup (3’)
1 Lead in
Play a piece of music and then ask some students to do some actions and others say out what the students are doing
See the actions and say sentences like this
xxx is writing…
xxx is singing…
xxx and xxx are…
先引导学生回顾节课容巩固现进行时法
通环节活跃课堂气氛说句子中考验学生Unit1知识掌握程度形中培养学生胆说英语惯
Step Two
Pre
reading
(5’)
Show three pictures to the students and ask the students to talk about what is happening
Look at the pictures and talk about what is happening
What’s Li Shan’s mother doing
She’s cleaning the house
…
引导学生谈图片训练学生现进行时态描述物行力描述时学新单词句型学生扫清阅读障碍
Step Three
While
reading (24’)
Step Three
While
reading (24’)
1 Scanning
(1)Ask students to scan the passage and match the paragraphs with the pictures in Activity1
T Spring Festival is one of the most important festivals in China We do many things for Spring Festival Please scan the passage and match the paragraphs with the pictures in Activity1
2Careful reading
①Present some sentences to the students and ask them to write T or F also correct the wrong sentences after reading Paragraph C
②Choose the best answers after reading
T Read the passage carefully and choose the best answers of the two questions
③Ask a student to be a little teacher to check the answers
3Reading in groups
①Let some team students read the passage paragraph by paragraph in groups of six and other students listen carefully to find out the important points
②Solve difficulties
③Ask the students to read the passage together and make sure they understand the passage
(1)Scan the passage and match the paragraphs with the pictures in Activity1
Picture A for paragraph A
…
①Tell true or false after reading
1 Spring Festival happens every year( )
2 people don’t clean their house before Spring Festival ( )
②Choose the best answers after reading
1 Li Shan usually ______ after the dinner
A eats dumplings
B watches TV
C cleans the house
2 What does hongbao mean
A It means rich
B It means good luck
C It means beautiful
③A student to be a little teacher to check the answers Others try their best to answer the questions
①Read the passage paragraph by paragraph in groups of six and other students listen carefully to find out the important points
②Solve difficulties
③The students read the passage together and make sure to understand the passage
求学生快速阅读文段选出段落相应图片够帮助学生更理解课文
学生带着务（问题）阅读课文找答案助学生更加准确获取信息提高阅读效果技学生通分层次阅读文章获取具体信息知识点课文理解分段学突破组活动通学生间合作学学生充分实践运语言激发学生创造性思维发展
Step Four
Post
reading
(10’)
1Retell
①Let the students complete the passage with the correct form of the words and expression from the box in Activity 3
②Call back the answers
from two students then
read the short passage
in the whole class
2Writing
Ask the students to write sentences with the notes in Activity4 and join two notes and write one sentence with and
①Complete the passage with the correct form of the words and expression from the box in Activity 3
②Call back the answers
from two students then
read the short passage
in the whole class
Write sentences with the notes in Activity4 and join two notes and write one sentence with and
复述课文学生加深课文容理解
and连接两句子练学生写作热身
Step Five
Summary（2’）
1Get the students to sum up the language points
T What have we learned today
Ss……
2Let the students to choose the best team in this lesson
1Sum up the language points
2To choose the best groups
引导学生节课总结学生做发言培养学生学总结良学惯
简短评价学生课堂表现肯定激励学生学兴趣树立学英语信心
Step Six
Home
work
（1’）
Write a passage about Christmas in Britain
Finish the homework
课作业助学生巩固已学知识补充方面锻炼写作阅读拓展学生终完全掌握语言实践运语言
板书设计
Module 10 Spring Festival
十六 Unit2 My mother’s cleaning our house and sweeping away bad luck
组评价
T1 T2 T3
现进行时be doing
般现时 do does
达标训练题
单项选择
1 She is _______ in her room at the moment
A looking her book B seeing the book
C reading the book D watching the book
2 Look The boy is __________ in the river now
A swiming B swimming C swim D swims
3 –Is she drawing pictures now
________________
A Yes she is B Yes he is C No she is D Yes she isn’t
4 My sister _________ eating an apple
A doesn’t B does C are D isn’t
5 My father often __________ to work
A walk B rides a bike C by bike D is walking
二 句型转换
1 He is taking some photos now (改般疑问句)
________ he taking _________ photos now
2 We are looking at the old watch (改否定句)
We ______ ________ looking at the old watch
3 Li Lei is cleaning the house now (划线部分提问)
_________ is Li Lei ________ now
4 They are doing their homework in the classroom (划线部分提问)
________ ________ they doing their homework
5 She usually washes her clothes on Sundays(now改写句子)
She _______ __________ her clothes now
文档香网(httpswwwxiangdangnet)户传
《香当网》用户分享的内容，不代表《香当网》观点或立场，请自行判断内容的真实性和可靠性！
该内容是文档的文本内容，更好的格式请下载文档
